C L A R K / K J O S

PROJECT MANUAL CKA Project: 18038

Wallowa County Healthcare District Medical Office Building Addition

603 Medical Parkway Enterprise, OR 97828

Permit / Bid Set January 25, 2019

CLARK//KJOS ARCHITECTS  ARCHITECTURE / PLANNING / INTERIOR DESIGN TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A. 00 0110 - Table of Contents B. 00 3100 - Available Project Information SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. 01 1000 - Summary B. 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements C. 01 3300 - Delegated Design Procedures D. 01 4000 - Quality Requirements E. 01 4050 - Coordination F. 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control G. 01 5719 - Temporary Environmental Controls H. 01 6000 - Product Requirements 01 6000.01 - Substitution Request Form I. 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions J. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements K. 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching L. 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals M. 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training 2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS A. 02 4100 - Demolition 2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE A. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories B. 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing C. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 2.04 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel B. 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing C. 05 4500 - Metal Support for Healthcare Equipment 2.05 DIVISION 06 -- , PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A. 06 1000 - Rough B. 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood C. 06 1800 - Glued-Laminated Construction D. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework 2.06 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation B. 07 2610 - Weather Resistant Barriers C. 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles D. 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim E. 07 8400 - Firestopping F. 07 9005 - Joint Sealers

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110

2.07 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A. 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors C. 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels D. 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts E. 08 5313 - Vinyl Windows F. 08 7100 - Door Hardware G. 08 8000 - Glazing H. 08 9100 - Louvers 2.08 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 0000 - Interior Finish Products B. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies C. 09 3000 - Tiling D. 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings E. 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring F. 09 6813 - Tile Carpeting G. 09 9000 - Painting and Coating 2.09 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 1124 - Tackable Systems B. 10 2123 - Cubicle Curtains C. 10 2600 - Protective Wall Covering D. 10 2601 - Wall and Corner Guards E. 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories F. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties G. 10 5100 - Lockers 2.10 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT A. 11 0500 - Equipment Coordination 2.11 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS A. 12 4960 - Window Shade Systems B. 12 5250 - Upholstered Seat Cushions

3.01 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION A. 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems 3.02 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING A. 22 0500 - Common Plumbing Materials and Methods B. 22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation C. 22 1000 - Plumbing Piping and Pumps D. 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment E. 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures 3.03 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) NONE - N/A A. 23 0500 - Common HVAC Materials and Methods

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110

B. 23 0548 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control C. 23 0590 - Testing, Adjusting & Balancing D. 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation E. 23 0923 - DDC Controls F. 23 0993 - HVAC Sequence G. 232100 - Hydronic Piping and Pumps H. 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping System I. 23 3000 - Air Distribution J. 23 3400 - HVAC Fans K. 23 7700 - VRV Low Temp Heat Recovery L. 23 8000 - Terminal HVAC Equipment 3.04 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL A. 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical B. 26 0519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables C. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D. 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems E. 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems F. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems G. 26 2416 - Panelboards H. 26 2726 - Wiring Devices I. 26 2800 - Circuit Protective Devices (and disconnects) J. 26 5000 - Lighting 3.05 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS A. 27 0000 - Low Voltage Overview B. 27 0530 - Interior Communications Pathways 3.06 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY A. 28 0010 - Basic Requirements B. 28 3110 - Fire Alarm Detection System Midification END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 00 3100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Certain information relating to existing surface and subsurface conditions and structures is available to bidders but will not be part of the Contract Documents, as follows: B. Site surcharge permit package, dated 03.18.2011. C. Site and Utility: Existing Civil sheet C1.01, dated 05.16.2011. 1. This drawing identifies the existing sanitary sewer line that the addition will into. D. Owner furnished and installed dental equipment drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 3.01 OBTAINMENT OF PERMITS A. Owner will obtain the following permits, at no cost to the Contractor: 1. Building Permit. B. Contractor to obtain the following required permits, at no cost to Owner: 1. Delegated design deferred submittals. . END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 SUMMARY 01 1000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Wallowa MOB Addition B. Owner Name: Wallowa Memorial Hospital. C. Architect's Name: Clark Kjos Architects. D. The Project consists of the construction of a 2,400 SF, single story addition to an existing B occupancy medical office building. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of demolition and removal work is indicated on drawings and specified in Section 02 4100. B. Scope of alterations work is indicated on drawings. C. Plumbing: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. D. HVAC: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. E. Electrical Power and Lighting: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. F. Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. G. Fire Alarm: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. H. Telephone: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. I. Security System: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. J. Contractor shall remove and store the following prior to start of work, for later reinstallation by Contractor: 1. Team Work 101 casework, appliances and lockers. 2. Doors and door hardware as indicated in door schedule. 3. Window shades. 4. ______. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner before Substantial Completion. Some items include: 1. All dental equipment as shown in dental equipment drawings (see available project information) 2. Medical equipment. 3. Panoramic xray 4. Gas tank storage 5. Movable cabinets. 6. Furnishings. 7. Small equipment. 8. Artwork. 9. Sidewalk snow melt system. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 SUMMARY 01 1000

1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others. 3. Use of site and premises by the public. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied. 2. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers and fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. B. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.02 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.03 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Requirements: END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 3300

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Summary of Delegated Design portion of Work. 2. Permitting for Delegated Design portion of Work. 3. Delegated Design submittals. B. Coordinate and assume full responsibility for design, engineering, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and installation of this work. C. Delegated Design efforts include the following: 1. Division 06 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 2. Division 05 Section - Metal Support for Healthcare Equipment 3. Divisions 21, 23, 26 and 27 - Seismic Anchorage for equipment, hoods, panels and other components of mechanical, plumbing, gas and electrical systems 4. Division 21 - Fire Suppression System 5. Division 28 - Fire Alarm and Detection System 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Delegated Design: Professional design service or certification specifically required of the Contractor in the Specifications. B. AHJ: Authorities Having Jurisdiction, defined in AIA Document A201. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Regulations. B. Provide complete, operational systems that perform their intended use. C. Engineer Delegated Design portions for gravity, lateral and seismic loads. 1. Load criteria is indicated in the specific product Section. 2. Indicate reactions to structure. 3. Provide services of a qualified professional engineer licensed in the Project jurisdiction. D. Execute the design intent as indicated in Project Drawings and Specifications. E. Obtain Permits and inspections and pay fees required by AHJ. 1.04 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will not pay for progress delays, additional Work, additional products, restocking, or re-working required by Contractor's failure to coordinate Delegated Design work with other Project work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Design: Submit drawings and product data that describe Contractor’s design prior to performing engineering calculations and final drawings. 1. Architect will evaluate proposed design and comment on conformance with intent of Contract Documents. 2. Preliminary review is for aesthetic and general function concerns and will not constitute approval of engineering. 3. Purpose of this submittal is to avoid engineering and detailing an unacceptable proposal. B. Final Design: Submit drawings, product data and engineering calculations that describe Contractor’s final design. C. Permit Review: Submit Delegated Design documents to AHJ for review and approval as a Deferred Submittal. Architect will deliver submittal to the AHJ and be the main point of contact with the AHJ. 1. Review by Architect or Architect’s consultant prior to submittal to the AHJ is required. Allow adequate time for Architect’s review as described in Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements. 2. Make corrections noted by Architect.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 3300

3. Obtain permits prior to executing work component. 4. Comply with AHJ requirements. 5. Execute corrections to Delegated Design work required by AHJ at no cost to Owner and prior to Substantial Completion. a. Notify Architect of changes required by AHJ as soon as they are known. 6. Include design criteria, design assumptions, structural calculations, fabrication and construction details, required clearances, and interface requirements. a. Delegated Design drawings are in addition to Shop Drawings. 7. Affix Design Professional's seal for State License on Submittals. D. Engineer’s qualifications. E. Product Data, Shop Drawings and Samples: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 for each product of Delegated Design portion of work. Product submittals are in addition to submittals for permit and design data. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Documentation: Comply with the following: 1. Uniform Drawing System, NCS/UDS published by National Institute of Building Sciences. 2. Minimum text size: 1/8 inch 3. Legible when microfilmed 4. Other requirements of AHJ B. Design requirements specific to Delegated Design portions are indicated in Drawings and in Sections that specify the component. C. Engineer’s Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. D. Pre-Submittal Meeting: Contractor shall meet with Architect, Consultant, and Delegated Designer to discuss requirements of work-portion, submittals, scheduling and sequencing. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Schedule design process and submittals required for Delegated Design portions to fit within Construction Schedule. B. Allow adequate time for AHJ review. Contact AHJ for time estimate and coordination of schedule. C. Architect’s approval of Final Design is required prior to submittal to the AHJ. Allow time specified in Section 013300 – Administrative Requirements for Architect’s review prior to submittal to the AHJ. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Testing and inspection agencies and services. C. Control of installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Compliance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. F. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. 1.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. B. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000

C. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. D. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. E. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. E. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 COORDINATION 01 4050

PART I GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Cleaning and protection. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and pre-installation conferences. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general installation. 4. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 2. Delivery and processing of submittals. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Project closeout activities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the Contractor’s principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 COORDINATION 01 4050

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with requier3d inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3.02 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining mat45ials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessively high or low temperatures. 3. Thermal shock. 4. Excessively high or low humidity. 5. Air contamination or pollution. 6. Water or ice. 7. Chemicals. 8. Light. 9. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 10. Combustion. 11. Electrical current. 12. Improper lubrication. 13. Unusual wear or other misuse. 14. Contact between incompatible materials. 15. Excessive weathering. 16. Theft. 17. Vandalism. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4355/D4355M - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2014. B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011. D. ASTM D4632/D4632M - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 2015a. E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2012. F. ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009). G. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; Current Edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of EPA (NPDES) for erosion and sedimentation control, as specified by the NPDES, for Phases I and II, and in compliance with requirements of Construction General Permit (CGP), whether the project is required by law to comply or not. B. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. C. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work. D. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 5 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713

1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. K. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. : Use one of the following: 1. Straw or hay. 2. Wood waste, chips, or bark. 3. Erosion control matting or netting. 4. Cutback asphalt. 5. Polyethylene film, where specifically indicated only. B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 pound per linear foot. 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 5 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713

3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355/D4355M after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 pounds-force, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 pounds-force, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632/D4632M. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632/D4632M. 6. Tear Strength: 55 pounds-force, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 pound per linear foot. G. Gravel: See Section 32 1123 for aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. 2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: 1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, , bark, wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. 1. Wood Waste: Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter; no anchoring required.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 5 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713

2. Asphalt: Use only where no traffic, either vehicular or pedestrian, is anticipated. I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1 1/2 to 3 1/2 inch diameter stone. B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets. 8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. C. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted. D. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 5 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713

C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 5 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 5719

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. D. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. E. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. F. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA (OCC) for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 Substitution Request 01 6000.1

TO: Clark/Kjos Architects 621 SW Alder St, Suite 700, Portland, OR 97205

PROJECT: Wallowa Medical Office Building Addition

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:

SECTION PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM

Proposed Substitution: ______

Fill in Blanks Below: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?

B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution?

C. What effect does substitution have on other trades? ______

D. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? ______

E. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are:  Same Different (explain on attachment)

F. Role of Submitter:  General Contractor Subcontractor Manufacturer Distributor  Representative G. Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable. H. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. I. The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. J. The undersigned agrees that the terms and conditions for substitutions found in the Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution.

Submitted by:

Signature ______For use by Design Consultant:  Accepted Accepted as noted Firm ______ Not Accepted Received Too Late

Address ______By ______

______Date ______

Date ______Remarks ______

Telephone ______

Fax ______

Email ______PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Sustainable design-related product requirements. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations. F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products. G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for VOC-restricted product categories. B. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal requirements potentially affecting product selection, packaging and substitutions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. C. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 6116. 2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 6116. 3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 4. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 5. Result in less construction waste. See Section 01 7419 6. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. D. Regionally-Sourced Products: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide materials amounting to a minimum of 10 percent of the total value of all materials (excluding plumbing, HVAC, electrical, elevators, and other equipment) that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a radius of 500 miles from the project site. E. Urea-Formaldehyde Prohibition: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide composite wood and agrifiber products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins. a. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product content. 2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000

F. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: 1. Definition: This provision applies to gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used anywhere on the interior of the building inside the weather barrier, including duct sealers. 2. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. a. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product content. 3. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. G. Aerosol Adhesives: 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by GreenSeal GS-36. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000

F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 7419. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 6116

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of compliance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner. B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities, 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000

8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. At penetrations of fire rated , partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. 3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.09 FINAL CLEANING A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, drainage systems, and ______. G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities. 2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 3. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329

D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. 4. Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. Submit one sets of revised final documents in final form within 30 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 30 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 30 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 30 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 2. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. E. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound . I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 DEMOLITION 02 4100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building demolition excluding removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances. B. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. C. Owner will provide a report identifying known hazardous materials and toxic substances within the project area, and will provide for removal and disposal under separate contract. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by Contractor. C. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. E. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. F. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A. Remove portions of existing site improvements and buildings as indicated on the drawings, and as required to accomplish the work. B. Remove other items for salvage, relocation, and recycling. C. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as specified in Section 31 2200. D. Notify Owner immediately if hazardous materials or toxic materials are encountered. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 7. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 DEMOLITION 02 4100

C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with Highways standards of the State of Oregon. B. Maintain one copy of each installation standard on site throughout the duration of concrete work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in- place concrete work. B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318. E. Use the following form types: 1. Walls: Site fabricated or reusable forms. 2. Elevated Floor Slabs: Prefabricated glass fiber pan forms, treated for exposed to view finish. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000

2.03 REMOVABLE PREFABRICATED FORMS A. At the discretion of the contractor. B. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick, matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. D. Pan Type: Glass fiber, of size and profile indicated. 2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: rigid plastic or wood strip type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths. D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. E. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 1200. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are not permitted except for thickened slab footings in drawings. 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of columns and walls. F. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. 3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 1000

D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.06 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.09 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). B. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. D. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2014. E. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished. B. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 1 1/2 inch. 2. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch. 3. Slabs on Fill: 1 1/2 inch minimum - see drawings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 2000

E. Comply with applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Underslab vapor barrier. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete foundation walls and footings. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads. G. Sealer, Hardener and Curing Compound at all areas to receive sheet flooring products. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork. B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007). E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. I. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. J. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012. K. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013. L. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015. M. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. N. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. O. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2014. P. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2014. Q. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2013. R. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used. D. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified. E. Sustainable Design Submittal: If any fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, rice hull ash, or other waste material is used in mix designs to replace Portland cement, submit the total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of portland cement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour if cold weather mix is used. F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 1000. B. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. B. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Multi-layer reinforced polyolefin or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A, 0.01 perms. 1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations. 2. Manufacturers: a. Perminator 15 mil by W.R. Meadows b. StegoWrap by Stego c. Vaporblock 15 by Raven Industries, Engineered Films Div., www.vaporblock.com. B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch. C. Curing Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03 3900. D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; white curing paper, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II. B. Epoxy Bonding System: C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. D. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation. 2. Height: To suit slab thickness. 2.07 CURING AGENTS AND SEALERS A. Sealer, Hardener and Curing Compound: Concrete surface treatment applied the day of the concrete pour in lieu of other curing methods for concrete slabs 1. Sealer complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A, ASTM C309 Type 1 Class A, penetrating product. 2. Warranty: Sealer manufacturer to provide minimum fifteen (15) year warranty from the date of original installation, against floor covering failure due to moisture vapor migtration or moisture-born contaminates. Warranty shall covering all labor and materials needed to replace all floor coverings that fail due to moisture vapor emission and moisture born contaminates. 3. Acceptable products: a. "CS2000" by Creteseal b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations and project structural notes. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. See structural notes in drawings 2.09 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000

3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Install vapor barrier in the floor slab assembly as shown on drawings and according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. D. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. E. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. F. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. G. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor retarder as indicated on drawings. Do not use sand. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. D. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. D. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. F. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/3 depth of slab thickness.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000

3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than seven days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than four days. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors: Apply sealer per sealer manufactuer's instructions, on the day of the pour or as soon as harsh weather permits, prior to any other chemical treatments. a. Coordinate observation of the application by sealer manufacturer's technician. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance with specified requirements. D. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Engineer within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 2200 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements. B. Structural Steel Framing: 1. Basis of Payment: Includes structural members fabricated, placed and anchored. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2017. B. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. E. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. G. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. H. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). I. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014. J. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. K. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014. L. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2014. M. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2014. N. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved 2014). O. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel; 2015. P. ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance; 2015. Q. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved 2015). R. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015. S. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2014.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200

T. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2013. U. ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry; 2012. V. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2014. W. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2018a. X. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a. Y. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. Z. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. AA. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. AB. RCSC (HSBOLT) - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts; Research Council on Structural Connections; 2014, with Errata (2015). AC. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). AD. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). AE. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual." B. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS) to also comply with Section 05 1213. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles, Plates, and Channels: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M. C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. E. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish as indicated.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200

F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153/A153M, Class C. G. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 1 washers. H. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, zinc-coated. J. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. D. Develop required camber for members. 2.03 FINISH A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303. B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts". E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Engineer. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud interior wall framing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c. B. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2011a. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention, and ______. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage: Minimumn 20-gage at assemblies supporting Portland Cement Plaster. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF WALL SHEATHING A. Install wall sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 METAL SUPPORT FOR HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT 05 4500

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide and install medical equipment support system for Owner-Furnished-Vendor-Installed equipment booms. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 – Delegated Design Procedures B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Delegated Design: Vendor shall provide design and engineering services as described in Section 01350 Delegated Design Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Successful vendor shall submit documents showing the complete system, including plans, sections and details of the system. Plans shall show all manufactured parts, by catalog numbers, all fabricated parts, and all fasteners and hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material and installation shall be provided by a qualified vendor, with at least five (5) years experience in the manufacture and installation of adjustable metal framing supports. Vendor shall demonstrate experience of projects of similar scope and size, and shall maintain a continuing quality assurance program for both its material and installation crews. B. Vendor shall provide the single source responsibility for materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers include: 1. Unistrut Corporation, www.unistrut.com B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements for substitution procedures. 2.02 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Materials used shall conform to the following ASTM specifications: ASTM 653SQ33, ASTM A570 Grade 33, ASTM A575, ASTM 675 Grade 50, SAE J429 Grade 2. B. All materials shall be protected from corrosion with a factory applied finish. C. All materials shall be stamped and identifiable by manufacturer and part number (where appropriate). Materials that appear damaged, distressed, unidentifiable or rusted shall not be used and will not be accepted. 2.03 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Structural steel members: 1. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M 2. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M 3. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 501, seamless or welded 4. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled 5. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A 6. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Ceiling anchorage: Whenever possible, attachment to ceiling structure above shall be done by means of imbedded concrete inserts, through bolts, or by direct attachment to the structural framing of the building. C. Seismic bracing: Support system shall be braced to meet all applicable seismic code requirements.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 METAL SUPPORT FOR HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT 05 4500

D. Loading: The support structure shall be designed to support a concentrated load as required by medical equipment manufacturer. The concentrated load shall be the maximum that will be encountered by positioning the equipment at the extremities of its travel (maximal load configuration). E. Safety factor: The system shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 2 and one half (2.5) based on ultimate strength under static loading conditions. F. Design tolerances: System shall be true, plumb and level to the tolerances indicated by medical equipment manufacturer, but no more than 1/720th of the span maximum deflection in either plane when maximum loading conditions are applied during equipment operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The contractor shall make field measurements to assure that the medical support can be installed according to plans, and without interference with structural framing, mechanical systems, plumbing or other obstructions. Any interferences shall be reported to the Architect. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. The contractor shall assure that the support system is installed in a timely and practical sequence, ahead of any extensive electrical, mechanical or HVAC work in the area, and prior to any ceiling framing or room finishes. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect equipment support system according to final approved design documents. B. Any changes or modifications from approved shop drawings shall require approval from the architect and engineer, and shall be noted on the final drawings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Protect installed support system from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural dimension framing. B. Sheathing. C. Preservative treated wood materials. D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of wood framing. C. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. D. Section 06 1800 - Glued-Laminated Construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. AWC (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; 2015. C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. E. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012. F. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a. G. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014. I. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010. J. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. K. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. L. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012. M. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2013. N. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. O. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010. P. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010. Q. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; 2015. R. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000

B. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC- accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; WCLIB (GR). B. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5. C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. E. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch. 2. Grade: No. 2 for 2x6 standard for 2x4. F. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 3 or Utility Grade. 2.03 TIMBERS A. Grading Agency: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; WCLIB (GR). B. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5. C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. D. Moisture Content: S-dry (19 percent maximum). E. Beams and Posts 4 inches and over in thickness: 1. Grade: No. 1. 2.04 EXPOSED BOARDS A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping. B. Moisture Content: S-dry (19 percent maximum). C. Surfacing: S4S. D. Species: Douglas Fir. E. Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, or Construction. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Any PS 2 type, rated Single Floor. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 48. 3. Performance Category: 1-1/8 PERF CAT.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000

B. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better. 3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185 galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M. C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185 galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M. 2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4A, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. 1. Preservative for Field Application to Cut Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer of factory treatment chemicals for brush-application in the field. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000

D. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. F. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AWC (WFCM) Wood Frame Construction Manual. G. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 3 inches of bearing at each end. H. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor ; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. I. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fire blocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.08 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 5 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Installation requirements for miscellaneous framing. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Material requirements for blocking, bridging, plates, and miscellaneous framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. C. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012. F. TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; 1989. G. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; 2015. H. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on plate connectors, bearing plates, and metal bracing components. C. Shop Drawings: See submittal requirements in Drawings and Structural Notes 1. Include identification of engineering software used for design. 2. Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer. 3. Submit design calculations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Oregon. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with TPI BCSI 1. B. Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plate Connectors: 1. Alpine, an ITW Company; ____: www.alpineitw.com/#sle. 2. MiTek Industries, Inc; ____: www.mii.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753

2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent. 2. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Blocking, Bridging, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 1000. B. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application. C. Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses. 3.02 ERECTION A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and TPI BCSI 1; maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete. B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. E. Install permanent bridging and bracing. F. Install headers and supports to frame openings required. G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06 1000. H. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section. I. After erection, touch-up primed surfaces with primer consistent with shop coat. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06 1800

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue laminated wood beams and columns. B. Steel hardware and attachment brackets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Glue Laminated Structural Column Members: By the unit. Includes unit member shop finished, connectors and brackets, placed and anchored. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 117 - Standard Specifications for Structural of Softwood Species; 2010. B. AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; 2007. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. E. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved 2014). F. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007. G. ASTM D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for Use Under Exterior Exposure Conditions; 2012a. H. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012. I. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. J. RIS (GR) - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; 2000. K. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. L. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and laminate members in accordance with AITC 117. B. Design Live and Dead Loads as indicated on structural drawings. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and resultant performance information. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three years of documented experience, and certified by AITC in accordance with AITC A190.1. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect members to AITC requirements for individually wrapped. B. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs. C. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06 1800

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued-Laminated Structural Units: 1. Sentinel Structures, Inc; _____: www.sentinelstructures.com/#sle. 2. Western Wood Structures, Inc; _____: www.westernwoodstructures.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 GLUED-LAMINATED UNITS A. Glued-Laminated Units: Fabricate in accordance with AITC 117 Industrial grade. 1. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. 2. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. 3. Fabricate member with camber built in. 4. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission. 5. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Softwood lumber complying with RIS (GR) grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. Design for the following values: 1. Combination 24F-V4 for simple span and 24F-V8 for all others 2. Columns may be any combined symbol and grade with Fc=1500 psi minimum and E- 1,800,00 psi minimum 3. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 4. Provide sustainably harvested lumber, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000. 5. Provide lumber harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 6. Lumber salvaged from deconstruction or demolition of existing buildings or structures is permitted provided it is clean, denailed, and free of paint and finish materials, and other contamination; identify source. a. Where used for structural applications, provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. B. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36/A36M weldable quality, prime paint except where embedded in concrete. C. Hardware: ASTM A 307 bolts and nuts, hot-dip galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A 153/A 153M, matching washers and nuts. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307 , matching washers and nuts. E. Laminating Adhesive: Tested for wet/exterior service in accordance with ASTM D 2559. 2.04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Factory-Treated Lumber: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for pressure impregnated wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Architectural grade for members exposed to view and industrial elsewhere. B. Welding: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. D. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. E. Fabricate member with camber built in. F. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission. G. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06 1800

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. B. Verify sufficient end bearing area. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of support items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage. B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated. C. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood lobby wall. B. Finish carpentry items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. B. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; 2015. C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Lobby Wall 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted unless reclaimed from building deconstruction or remodeling. B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lobby Wall: 1. Viridian Wood Products- www.viridianwood.com, old growth douglas fir- vertical grain paneling. B. Hardwood Lumber: ______species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. 1. Grading: In accordance with NHLA G-101 Grading Rules; www.nhla.org. 2.04 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood, Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium density core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application. 1. Grading: Certified by the American Plywood Association. B. Hardwood Plywood: Lumber core, type of glue recommended for application; Red oak face species, Rift cut. 2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS; color as selected by Architect; textured, low gloss finish; ______manufactured by ______.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000

B. Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 4100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 0000 - Finish Products: Plastic laminates and wood finishes for casework and countertops. C. Section 10 1124 - Tackable Wall Systems:Tackable panels to be incorporated into casework and installed between casework elements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014. B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2016, with Errata (2017). C. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000. C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. D. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. E. Panels fabricated from chopped wheat straw.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 4100

2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Wheatboard: Medium density (40 lbs/cu ft) panels composed of shredded wheat stalks with a no-added-formaldehyde MDI adhesive; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for components indicated on drawings. 1. Water Absorption (24-hour): No greater than 20-percent. 2. Thickness Swell (24-hour): No greater than 8-percent. 3. Moisture Content: No greater than 8-percent. B. : AHA A135.4; fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch thick, smooth two sides (S2S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components indicated on drawings. 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): As specified in Section 09000 Finish Products. B. Low Pressure Decorative laminate (LPDL): NEMA LD 3, type as recommended for specific applications. 1. Use at all cabinet interiors. a. Color: White. 2.05 COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Exterior-grade plywood substrate covered with plastic laminate, conventionally fabricated with edge condition as indicated on drawings. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; of width to match component thickness. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Doellken Woodtape (www.doellken-woodtape.com) b. Substitutions: See section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Certifications: Certified by GreenGuard. 3. Color: To match adjacent plastic laminate surface, including wood grain plastic laminate. 4. Use at all exposed edges, including box, door, drawer and shelf edges. C. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, 2-inch diameter, in color black. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers. C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finishsteel with satin finish. D. Drawer Slides: 1. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade. 2. Mounting: Side mounted. 3. Stops: Integral type. 4. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. 5. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc; ____: www.accuride.com/#sle. b. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Light-Duty Drawer Slides: www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with satin finish. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grass America Inc; Tiomos Hinge System: www.grassusa.com/#sle.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 4100

b. Blum, Inc; _____: www.blum.com/#sle. F. Keyboard Trays: Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 5700. G. Keyless Cabinet Locks: Rev-a-Shelf; Product RAL 11201-R. 1. Keys: Rev-a-Shelf: RAL11202 a. Provide one key for every four locks provided. H. Trash Management Rings: Mockett TM-8" or Bobrick B-529 I. Wall-mounted Shelf Standards and Brackets: 1. Wall standard: Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 87. 2. Bracket: Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 187 (length to match shelf depth indicated on drawings). 3. Front clip (provide one at each bracket): Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 212. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. C. Drawer Construction Technique: As recommended by fabricator. D. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. E. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with edging to match main surface. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. F. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 1. Orient wood grain laminate the same as specified for "Matching Wood Grain" below. G. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows: 1. Orient grain vertically unless noted otherwise. 2. Orient grain on soffits, valances and toe kicks to match the orientation of adjacent field panels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall. B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction. C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation as wall sheathing. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation. C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials. D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 APPLICATIONS 2.03 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces. 1. R-Value 5/inch 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 1 inch thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 4. Board Edges: Square. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 75 and 450 respectively, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. B. Storefront Insulation: Non-combustible, semi-rigid, water repellent mineral wool insulation board. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: CavityRock CurtainRock by Roxul Inc., www.Roxul.com. 2. Thickness: 3 inches. 3. Application: At spandrel glazing. 2.04 A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100

4. Thermal Resistance: Roof- R38, Exterior Wall- R19 5. Facing: Unfaced. 6. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation; _____: www.certainteed.com/#sle. b. Johns Manville; _____: www.jm.com/#sle. c. Bonded Logic: www.BondedLogic.com. B. Alternate Material: Natural Cotton Fiber Insulation 1. R-value: 3.5 Inch = R-13, 5.5 Inch = R-19 2. Fire Rating: Flame Spread -- 5(Class A), Smoke Developed -- 35 (Class A) 3. Fire Rating: 1-hour 4. Must Pass ASTM C 739) 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Exterior Wall Vapor Retarder: Scrim-reinforced polyethylene or foil laminated to scrimreinforcedKraft paper; laboratory-tested vapor transmission rating of 0.03 perms. Flamespread: 25 maximum. 1.Application: On inside of insulated wood stud framing at perimeter of building, underside of wood roof trusses, and where indicated on drawings. 2. Tape: 3M “Contractor Sheathing Tape” No. 8086 or equivalent, as recommended by manufacturer of insulation to be taped; flame spread 0 to 25. B. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install boards horizontally on walls. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.04 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall, roof, ceiling, and sound attenuation blankets at toilet rooms, exam rooms and office walls spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. F. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. G. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. H. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100

3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS 07 2610

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather barrier membrane B. Seam Tape C. Flashing D. Fasteners

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000. C. Provide all weather resistant membranes from a single manufacturer. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. E. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch. F. Quality Assurance Submittals. 1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation. G. Closeout Submittals. 1. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of DuPont TM Tyvek® weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. B. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened,

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 1 of 5 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS 07 2610

undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company ; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8-9835); http://construction.tyvek.com

2.2 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: High-performance, flash spun-bonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated, secondary weather barrier is based upon DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D and related assembly components. B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: Type 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 30 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 235 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: 2.4 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Infiltration Resistance: Air infiltration at >750 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 33/41 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 822 , Method A. 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 . Flame Spread: 15, Smoke Developed: 25.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections; to sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Project Site, ready for installation. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finish surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Make exposed joints flush and hairline. F. Provide components required for anchorage. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as framing members.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 2 of 5 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS 07 2610

A. Seam Tape: 3” DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape as manufactured by DuPont. B. Fasteners: 1. DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners or 1- inch minimum plastic cap staple with a 7/8” minimum staple length. C. Sealants: 1. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. D. Adhesives: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 2. Products: a. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primers: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. F. Flashing: 1. DuPont™ FlexWrap™: Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. 2. DuPont™ StraightFlash™: Straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. 3. DuPont™ StraightFlash™ VF: Dual-sided flashing membrane materials for brick mold and non-flanged windows and doors. 4. Preformed Inside and Outside Corners and End Dams as manufactured by DuPont: Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction with DuPont™ Thru-Wall Flashing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. E. Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 3 of 5 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS 07 2610

G. Overlap weather barrier: 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. H. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommend fasteners, space 6 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally.

3.3 SEAMING A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams . B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving components for smooth operation without binding. B. Adjust locks to provide smooth and secure operation.

3.5 OPENING PREPARATION A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.6 SEAMING A. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start StraightFlash™ at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window installation. H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193. I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ StraightFlash™ over the 45-degree seams. J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

3.7 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT WINDOW HEAD

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 4 of 5 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS 07 2610

A. Cut flap in weather barrier at window head. B. Prime exposed sheathing. C. Install lintel as required. Verify end dams extend 4 inches minimum beyond opening. D. Install end dams bedded in sealant. E. Adhere 2 inches minimum thru-wall flashing to wall sheathing. Overlap lintel with thru-wall flashing and extend ¼ inch minimum beyond outside edge of lintel to form drip edge. F. Apply sealant along thru-wall flashing edges. G. Fold weather barrier flap back into place and tape bottom edge to thru-wall flashing. H. Tape diagonal cuts of weather barrier. I. Secure weather barrier flap with fasteners.

3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 5 of 5 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection. C. Soffit and ridge vents D. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D3161/D3161M - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Steep Slope Roofing Products (Fan-Induced Method); 2016a. B. ASTM D3462/D3462M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2016. C. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011. D. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual; 2018. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. F. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern; for color selection. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products are Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL (DIR) listed and labeled. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45 degrees F. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Furnish One unbroken bundle of Asphalt Shingles that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Asphalt Shingles: 1. Owens Corning Corp; ____: www.owenscorning.com/#sle. 2.02 ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462. 1. Fire Resistance: Class A, complying with ASTM E108. 2. Wind Resistance: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113

3. Weight: ____ lb/100 sq ft. 4. Self-sealing type. 5. Style: Square. 6. Color: As selected by Architect. 2.03 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-milthick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Available Products: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc. b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield. c. Henry Company; Perma-Seal PE. d. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock M. 2.04 VENTS A. Ridge Vent: Manufacturers standard UV stabilized, externally baffled ridge vent 1. WIDTH: 11 ¼” MIN. 2. NET FREE AREA: 12 ½” / LIN. FT. A. Soffit Vent: Continuious PVC vent 1. WIDTH: 2" MIN. 2. LENGTH: 96" MIN. 3. NET FREE AREA: 9 SQ. IN. PER FT. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Staples: Standard wire shingle type, of hot dipped zinc coated steel, 16 wire gage, 0.0508 inch diameter, 15/16 inch crown width, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. 2.06 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal dormer flashing, siffit vents, and other flashing indicated. 1. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 2. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. B. Steel Sheet Metal: Prefinished and galvanized steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.0179 inch minimum thickness, G90/Z275 hot-dipped galvanized; PVC coated, _____ color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that roof deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch as recommended by shingle manufacturer. B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113

C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection. D. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards, weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement, and secure flange with nails spaced ____ inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (RM) applicable requirements. 3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT A. At Roof Slopes Less Than 4:12 : Install Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment over entire roof area, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. B. At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12 : Install Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection. C. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement any items projecting through or mounted on roof. 3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION A. Install valley protection in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. B. Secure in place with nails at ____ inches on center, and conceal fastenings. C. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (RM) applicable requirements. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code or manufacturer, whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code or manufacturer, whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area, and provide double course of shingles at eaves. C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. E. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten, extend shingles a minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley, and concealing valley protection. F. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counterflashings. G. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 FIBER-CEMENT 07 4646

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiber-cement siding. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding. C. Section 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles D. Section - Joint Sealers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including fastener patterns. C. Shop Drawings: Indicating panel layout, fastening, support and edge treatment details. D. Samples fo Verification: Submit one samples minimum 4-inches by 6-inches of each color and finish specified. E. Test Report: Applicable model code authority evaluation report (e.g. ICC-ES). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface. B. Plastic should be removed if material is to be stored for a long period of time. C. Storage area should be well ventilated. D. Condensation on sheets under shrink wrap should be avoided. E. Care is to be taken to protect the edges of material from damage on construction site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. Panel Siding: Horizontally-oriented panels made of cement and fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for screw attachment. 1. Product: Eter Color by Euro Panel: Foundry Service & Supplies, Inc. www.foundryservice.com 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 4. Finish: Factory applied sealant. Field applied on cut edges. 5. Color 1: As selected from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Color 2: As selected from manufacturer's standard range. 7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable. B. Soffit Panels: Panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Length: 96 inches, nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 4646

4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 5. Finish: Factory applied color. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of available colors. 7. Manufacturer: a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc - ColorPlus Technology: www.jameshardie.com . 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners, sealants, extrusions, furring strips, and rubber gasket fillet material to be in accordance with manufactures written rules for installing and fastening exterior fiber cement cladding. B. Furring Strips: As indicated in drawings. C. Trim: Same material and texture as siding and soffit. D. Fasteners: Screws and Astro rivets to be stainless steel as specified in manufacturers written rules; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch. E. Exterior Soffit Vents: One piece, perforated, ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T5 temper, aluminum, with edge suitable for direct application to gypsum board and manufactured especially for soffit application, and provide continuous vent. F. Joint Sealer: 3-1/2-inch EDPM rubber strips. G. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. All framing must be straight, plumb, true, and provide a firm support for the panels. B. Refer to the manufacturer’s recommendations for spacing of wood furring for the type of fiber cement board specified and its intended use. C. Examine substrate, clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation. D. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. E. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. F. Install sheet metal flashing as indicated on drawings. G. If substrate preparation is responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Read warranty and comply with terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of project. 3. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 4. Touch up and or seal all field cut edges per manufacturer's written instructions before installing. 5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage. B. Over weather barrier: Install furring strips as indicated on drawings. Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind soffit; at bottom install insect screen over opening by wrapping a strip of screen over bottom ends of vertical furring channels. C. Allow space between both ends of siding panels (as indicated in drawings) that butt against trim for thermal movement; seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant. D. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive courses of vertical siding as indicated in drawings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 4646

E. Exterior Soffit Vents: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated on drawings, and provide vent area specified. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts. B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage, (0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 alloy, soft temper, 28 gage, (0.0156 inch) thick; smooth No. 4 - Brushed finish. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. 2.03 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA (ASMM), Rectangular profile. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. D. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where permitted.. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with concealed fasteners. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 FIRESTOPPING 07 8400

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2015. B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a. C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. D. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition. E. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Firestopping Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products; _____: www.3m.com/firestop/#sle. 2. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; _____: www.adfire.com/#sle. 3. Hilti, Inc; _____: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 4. Nelson FireStop Products; _____: www.nelsonfirestop.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use system that is listed by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), or UL (FRD) and tested in accordance with ASTM E814, ASTM E119, or UL 1479 with F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance with other specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 FIRESTOPPING 07 8400

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to prevent liquid material from leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 JOINT SEALERS 07 9005

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Hollow gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section 01 4000. B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content as specified in Section 01 6116. B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Acrylic, solvent release curing; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Product: Dow Corning 795______. 3. Applications: (refer to manufacturer): a. Joints between metal and other materials. b. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: ASTM D2628, hollow neoprene (polychloroprene) compression gasket. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior wall expansion joints. D. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 JOINT SEALERS 07 9005

E. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: White. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. F. Type ___ - Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; ______manufactured by ______. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. H. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type ____; colors as shown on drawings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 JOINT SEALERS 07 9005

B. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls: Type ____. C. In STC-Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and Adjacent Construction: Type ____. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113

PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 MANUFACTURERS 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 1.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Type ___, Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated. 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 1 - Standard-duty. b. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum. 2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. B. Type ___, Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 1 - Standard-duty. b. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR). b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 1.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. Exterior Door Frames: Knock-down type. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 1.05 ACCESSORIES A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions. B. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire-rated, non-rated, acoustical, special function, and ______. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND PANELS A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. 2. Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at each location. 2. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish as indicated on drawings. 2.02 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated. B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. C. Sound-Rated Doors: Equivalent to type, with particleboard core (PC) construction as required to achieve STC rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above. 2.03 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade as specified above, rift cut or quarter sawn, random veneer match______. 2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Finish wood doors at factory. 2. Transparent Finish: a. Grade: Premium and Custom. b. Finish: AWI System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer c. Stain: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. d. Effect: Open-grain finish e. Sheen: Satin. B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Install door louvers plumb and level. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this section. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 3100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling access door and frame units. B. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations. 1. Provide access doors at all locations where access to valves, dampers and other concealed items is needed. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall and Ceiling Access Doors: 1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 1. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED UNITS A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel. 1. Door/Panel Size: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Hardware: a. Hinge: 175 degree steel piano hinge with pin. b. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 3. Fire rating to match the wall or ceiling construction in which the access door is located. 2.04 VALVE ACCESS PANELS A. Door and Frame Units: Fully-enclosed, formed stainless steel. 1. Frames and flanges: 16 gauge stainless steel. 2. Size: 24-inches x 24-inches x 4-inches deep. 3. Hardware: a. Hinge: 175 degree concealed stainless steel piano hinge. b. Lock: Cylinder lock with latch, two keys for each unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 3100

B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4313

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision and spandrel glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.s.2/A440 for Air leakage of sliding or swinging door assemblies part of the building envelope. B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012. D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014. G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013. I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). J. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). L. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors M. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4313

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Front-set. 2. Finish: Class II natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 3. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 4. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 7. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 8. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf. 3. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly. 4. Door sizes shown are nominal; provide standard clearances to meet maximum air leakage rate of 0.3 cubic foot/minute per square foot of fenestration area. Maximum air leakage rate is 1.00 cfm/SF of door area per Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing Stops: Flush.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4313

B. Infill Panels: Insulated, aluminum sheet face and back, with edges formed to fit glazing channel and sealed. 1. Exterior Finish: High performance organic coatings. C. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.04 FINISHES 2.05 HARDWARE A. Other Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished chrome. 2. For each door, include butt hinges, pivots, push handle, pull handle, exit device, narrow stile handle latch, and closer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4313

3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4 VINYL WINDOWS 08 5313

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl-framed, factory-glazed windows. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. B. Section 07 2610 - Weather Resistive Barriers 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. B. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors C. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence D. ASTM E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and Skylights; 2007 (Reapproved 2016). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements, and _____. C. Samples: Submit two ______, ___ by ___ inch in size, illustrating window frame section. D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All windows shall be marked with AAMA and NFRC certification labels in accordance with the requirements of the applicable referenced standard. B. Insulated glass to conform to ASTM Class A standards 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Windows: 1. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc: www.milgard.com 2. Cascade Windows, Inc: www.cascadewindows.com 3. Marlin Windows: www.marlinwindows.com 2.02 DESCRIPTION A. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded, hollow, ultra-violet-resistant, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory-installed glazing, hardware, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 VINYL WINDOWS 08 5313

a. Product Type: FW - Fixed window in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2. Color: to match existing. 3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly providing necessary space for perimeter seals. 4. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to exterior side by means of weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation within glazing channel, or other migrating moisture within system. 6. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of rigid PVC, fitting tightly into frame assembly. 2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Overall Thermal Transmittance (U-value):.28, maximum, including glazing, measured on window sizes required for this project. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Insulated double pane, annealed glass, clear, low-E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions and acoustic rating indicated. B. Sealants for Setting Window Sill Pan Flashing: Provide butyl tape, non-hardening butyl, polyurethane, or silicone sealant; in compliance with ASTM E2112 installation practices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install window unit assemblies in accordance with manufacturers instructions and applicable building codes. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities as necessary. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist, and maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. E. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer and appropriate for application indicated. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Door hardware for swinging and sliding doors. B. Related Sections 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout": Review of key control system. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" 3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit product data for each item of door hardware. B. Submit five copies of the final hardware schedule. C. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors and frames within two weeks after acceptance of final hardware schedule by Architect. D. Submit 3 copies of the keying schedule prior to ordering locks and cylinders. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplier: Hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier who has serviced construction in the project area for at least five years. Supplier's organization shall include an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available to respond to Owner, Architect, or Contractor questions. Supplier shall have a factory direct status with all manufacturers specified. B. Installer: Hardware shall be installed by experienced tradesmen. C. All hardware shall comply with the International Building Code requirements. Fire rated assemblies shall comply with code and with required Underwriters Laboratory tests. 1.5 KEYING A. All keying shall be furnished per the requirements of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hardware numbers are from catalogues of the following companies: B. Cylinders = Manufacturer: Schlage- Owner Standard. C. Butts = Manufacturer: Ives, substitutes: Hager, Stanley, Bommer. D. Locksets = Manufacturer: Schlage- Owner Standard. E. Access Control = Manufacturer: Schlage Electronics- Owner Standard. F. Stops and Holders = Manufacturer: Ives, substitutes: Trimco, Hager. G. Surface Closers & Door Operators = Manufacturer: LCN- Owner Standard. H. Exit Devices = Manufacturer: Von Duprin- Owner Standard. I. Thresholds, Gaskets, Weatherstrip = Manufacturer: National Guard, Substitutes: Reese, Steelcraft, Pemko. J. Door Bottoms = Manufacturer: National Guard, Substitutes: Reese, Pemko. K. Overhead Stops and Holder = Manufacturer: Glynn Johnson, substitutes: Rixson. L. Silencers = Manufacturer: Ives, substitutes: Trimco. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hand of Door 1. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as indicated on floor plan Drawings. B. Butts: 1. Furnish butts with non-removable pins at out swing doors with locks.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100

C. Door Silencers: 1. Furnish three silencers for single doors and four silencers for pairs of swing doors. 2. Do not furnish silencers for doors with smoke seal. 2.3 HARDWARE ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Furnish fasteners that are compatible with both the unit fastened and the substrate. B. Keying: 1. Key into existing Schlage Everest D master key system. Meet with Owner to determine specific keying requirements. Furnish a written keying schedule for owner approval within 10 days of meeting. When so directed, remove construction key system and install final cores. All permanent keys shall be delivered in person to Owner or by Registered Mail. 2. Furnish (10) construction keys. 3. Furnish (6) master keys & (2) change keys per cylinder. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Hardware Finishes 1. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish hardware in the following BHMA finishes. a. Exterior Butt Hinges: 630 b. Interior Butt Hinges: 652 c. Latchsets & Locksets: 626 d. Surface door closers: 689 e. Door stops and holders: 626 f. Exit Devices: 626 g. Push & Pull Plates: 630 h. Metal Kick Plates: 630 i. Thresholds: 628 j. Overhead Stops and Holders: 630 k. Door Bottom: 628 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANC E A. Installation of Mortised Door Hardware 1. Install mortised hardware and then remove and store in original boxes in a secure place during application of door and frame finish. 2. After completion of the frame finish reinstall all hardware. B. Installation of Surface Mounted Door Hardware: 1. Install kickplates with oval head full thread screws spaced uniformly at a maximum of 5 inches on center along kick plate perimeter. 2. Install thresholds with expansion shield and anchor bolts. 3. Set thresholds inpolyisobutylene rubber caulking, CK-4. 4. Mount surface closers on room side of corridor doors, interior side of exterior doors and vestibule side of vestibule doors. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Check and adjust operating hardware at each door to ensure smooth operation 2. Where hardware installation is made more that one month prior to occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of door hardware and doors. 3. Clean exposed hardware surfaces not more than 7 days prior to substantial completion

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100

3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Required Door Hardware: 1. Furnish the following hardware groups for each door as indicated on the Door Schedule, and as required to complete the project. 2. Include items listed and required for a complete project regardless of omissions or conflicts in Contract Documents.

HW SET: 01 EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD35A-NL-OP 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057T 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061T 626 SCH 2 EA FINAL CORE 23-030-EVEREST D 626 SCH 1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190-18-O 630 IVE 1 EA CLOSER W/STOP 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR MANUFACTURER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896V AL NGP

HW SET: 02 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND50PD TLR 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

HW SET: 03 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S TLR 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

HW SET: 04 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY W/INDICATOR L9496L 03A L583-363 626 SCH 1 EA COIN TURN 09-900 XL12-196 1 3/8" 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

HW SET: 05 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND50PD TLR 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4 DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100

HW SET: 06 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD TLR 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 2 SET SOUND SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

HW SET: 07 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD TLR 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 SET SOUND SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4 GLAZING 08 8000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Plastic films. C. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011. C. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. E. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. F. ASTM E 2188 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Performance G. ASTM E 2189 - Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulated Glass H. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. I. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two 12" samples of glazing film. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES 2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN - INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, low-E. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Total Thickness: 1inch 3. Total Assembly U-Value:.28, maximum. 4. Total Solar Heat Gain Coefficient:.27, maximum. 5. Total Visible Light Transmittance: 62 percent, minimum. 6. Basis of Design: Guardian Industries Corp.: www.guardian.com. 7. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Coating: Guardian SNX 62/27 on # 2 surface, no coating on #3 surface. 8. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick. 9. Total Thickness: 1 inch.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4 GLAZING 08 8000

2.03 GLAZING UNITS A. Type IG-2 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Spandrel glazing. 1. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. 2. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick. 3. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 4. #2-743 Solex B. Type S-3 - Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated. 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all requirements of IBC, including requirements to provide safety glazing in hazardous locations. Contractor shall be responsible to review contract documents to determine locations where IBC requirements apply. b. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. c. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions. d. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. e. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2.04 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Main Building, within 8 feet of building corners: 21 PSF B. Main Building, more than 8 feet from building corners: 18 psf C. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures 21 PSF within 8 feet of building corners and 18 psf more than 8 feet from building corners. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. D. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. 2.05 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com/#sle. 2. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgglazing.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Clear Float Glass : Clear, fully tempered. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). D. Insulating Glass Fabricators: 1. Hartung Glass: www.hartung-glass.com 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com 3. Northwestern Industries: www.nwiglass.com

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4 GLAZING 08 8000

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 5. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer whose equipment, process, and production location is certified by coated-glass manufacturer. 2.06 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.07 PLASTIC FILMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Decorative Films, LLC: www.decorativefilm.com. a. SOLYX Decorative Privacy glass films b. Pattern: Clear Sand Blast c. Number: SX-1002 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.08 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound ; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; 1/8" inch size; black color. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I; ______color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, ____ inch below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4 GLAZING 08 8000

F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with ______type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of ______type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.04 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4 LOUVERS 08 9100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012. C. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and connection failures of louver components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511. 1. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 2. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304, soft temper, smooth surface, No. 4 brushed finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 INTERIOR FINISH PRODUCTS 09 0000

Designation Specification Notes / Location 06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework Plastic Laminate PL-2 NEVAMAR Upper and lower Color: Vous Fawn casework Product #: VS2001T PL-3 NEVAMAR Counters Color: Solare Piazza Product #: PZ4001T 09 6500 Resilient Flooring Linoleum L-1 FORBO Real Color: Shell #3075 Width: 79” Thickness: 2.5mm Welding Rod: R3075 MC L-4 FORBO Real Color: Rust #2767 Width: 79” Thickness: 2.5mm Welding Rod: R767 MC Rubber Base RB-1 JOHNSONITE At concrete floors Color: 129 Silk Height: 4” Coved RB-2 JOHNSONITE General Base: Color: 45 • Straight base Height: 4” at carpet • Coved base at hard surface. 09 6813 Tile Carpeting Carpet Tile CP-1 PATCRAFT Pattern: Serene I0244 Color: Awaken 00808 Content: Solution Q Extreme Nylon Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed Nylon Face Weight: 22 oz Protective Treatment: Shaw Soil Protection (SSP) Backing: Non-Woven Synthetic Secondary Backing: EcoWorx Size: 24” x 24” Tile Installation: Ashlar CP-2 MASLAND Pattern: Runway T301 Color: Modiste #30104 Content: Antron Lumena Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed Face Weight: 22 oz Backing: Non-Woven Secondary Backing: Vinyl

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 1 of 3

INTERIOR FINISH PRODUCTS 09 0000

Designation Specification Notes / Location Size: 24” x 24” Tile Installation: Quarter Turn CP-4 J&J/INVISION Pattern: Tumbled Stone #7955M Color: Jadeite #339 Content: Soloutia Ultron Color Nylon Dye Method: Face Weight: Backing: Secondary Backing: Nexus Modular Size: 24” x 24” Tile Installation: Monolithic 09 7260 Tackable Wall Covering Tack Board TB-1 DESIGNTEX Pattern: Appleseed #2682 Color: 802 Graphite Content: 100% Post-Industrial Recycled Polyester Finish: Nano-Tex Width: 55” Code: Class A fire rated with ASTM E84 (un-adhered) 09 9000 Paintings and Coatings Interior Paint P-1 ICI/GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL General wall color Color: Currier Creme Epoxy Paint to be used 40YY 83/107 in toilet room Order #A0076 P-6 BENJAMIN MOORE Accent Georgian Brick HC-50 10 2123 Cubicle Curtains Privacy Curtains CC-1 ARCHITEX Cubicle Curtain Pattern: RX 8013 Track: Color: Daintree On the Right Track Content: 63% Trevira CS, 37% Polyester Width: 72” Repeat: 45” V, 16 ½” H Railroaded Code: Passes NFPA 701, ASTM E 84-07 (unadhered), CAL 19 10 2601 Wall and Corner Guards Corner Guards CG-1 INPRO CORPORATION Location: Corner Color: Antique White #0104 guards per architectural Height: Floor to Ceiling U.N.O. plans. 10 2623 Protective Wall Covering Rigid Sheet Panels WP-1 INPRO CORPORATION Color: Antique White #0104Joint and cap trim: Vinyl to match field color 12 5250 Upholstered Seat Cushions UP-1 ARC COM

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 2 of 3

INTERIOR FINISH PRODUCTS 09 0000

Designation Specification Notes / Location Pattern: Intaglio AC-69418 Color: Truffle #19 Content: 100% Polyrethane Face, 100% Polyester Knit Back Finish: Wipe Out Stain Protection, Aegis Microbe Shield Width: 54” Repeat: None Codes: ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, UL #723, UBC #8-1, Cal #117, NFPA 260A

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 3 of 3

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing for interior partitions. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Gypsum wallboard. F. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015. B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014. C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014. H. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014. J. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. K. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. L. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum __ years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf. 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754. a. Acceptable Products: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; UltraSteel (tm): www.dietrichindustries.com. 2) Clark Western Building Systems; UltraSteel (tm): www.clarkwestern.com. 2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 6. Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double leg configuration; 1/2 inch channel depth. B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. C. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as indicated on drawings. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Regular Type: a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. c. Edges: Tapered. 2. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated. a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X. b. Application: Where required for fire-rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated. c. Thickness: 5/8 inch. d. Edges: Tapered. C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch, as indicated. 4. Edges: Tapered. 2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 1/2 inch. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116

E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant. F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. G. Blocking: Install blocking for support of: 1. Wall mounted cabinets. 2. Plumbing fixtures (capable of sustaining a concentrated load of 250 lbs). 3. Toilet partitions. 4. Toilet accessories (grab bars capable of sustaining a concentrated load of 250 lbs). 5. Wall mounted door hardware. H. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116

1. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 4. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4 TILING 09 3000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic Tile. B. Porcelain Tile. C. Glass Tile. D. Metal Trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2017. 1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014. 2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised). 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 10. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). 11. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010). B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. C. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2016a. D. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples for Verification: Provide minimum of three units of each size and color of tile to be provided. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 TILING 09 3000

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Each tile type is specified in Division 9 "Section "FInish Specifications". Provide only the named product. B. TRIM AND ACCESSORIES 1. Tile Trim: Matching bullnose, cove base and cove shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. a. Applications: 1) Open edges of wall tile. 2) Edges of floor tile that are adjacent to floor finishes other than tile. b. Manufacturers: 1) Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle. C. ADHESIVE MATERIALS 1. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com 2. Color: Manufacturer's standard color. a. White adhesive at glass tile applications. D. GROUTS 1. Manufacturers: E. SEALER 1. Manufacturers: a. Stone Tech Professional: www.stonetechpro.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Natural Look Sealer: Penetrating, water-based stone sealer for stain resistance without altering natural appearance. a. Product: Stone Tech Professional Sealer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture Emission Rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours, test in accordance with ASTM F1869. 2. Alkalinity (pH): Verify pH range of 5 to 9, test in accordance with ASTM F710. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 TILING 09 3000

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. J. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonsanded grout at the following tile products, when specified: a. Glass tile applications 2. Use epoxy grout at the following locations, when part of the work: a. Toilet rooms, including walls and floors b. Lobby floors K. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. L. Sealant: Apply sealant to all tile areas according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 GROUTING A. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.06 SEALING A. Apply specified sealer according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system for ACT. B. Acoustical units. C. Supplementary acoustical insulation above ceiling. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2017. B. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. C. Delegated Design: Calculations and details, stamped by a qualified Professional Engineer, for seismic anchorage of suspended ceiling systems, as required by the local authority having jurisdiction. D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that ceiling system complies with specified seismic performance requirements, including but not limited to ICC Evaluations and engineering calculations by a licensed structural engineer. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide one full carton of each type of acoustical unit for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. C. Acoustical Tile Type 1: Painted mineral fiber, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 15/16 inches. 3. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 37 min., determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 4. Edge: Beveled tegular. 5. Surface Color: White. 6. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 7. Products: a. Cortega Second Look. D. Acoustical Tile Type 2: Painted mineral fiber, with to the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 15/16 inches. 3. Edge: Angled Tegular. 4. Surface Color: White. 5. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured with molded center rabbet to simulate 24 by 24-inch panels. 6. Fine Fissured 7. Product: Second Look II by Armstrong.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. D. Seismic Performance: Provide suspension system that has been evaluated by an independent party and found to be complaint with applicable Building Code seismic category requirements, including but not limited to ICC Evaluation Services Acceptance Criteria AC156 (as evidenced by ICC Evaluation Report ESR-1308). 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100. 1. Thickness: 2 inch min. 2. Size: To fit acoustical suspension system. D. Gasket For Perimeter Moldings: Closed cell rubber sponge tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan unless noted otherwise.. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100

3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plans and floor patterns. C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, ___ by ___ inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. D. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard color palette for selection of edge strips. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 100 sq ft of flooring, 20____ lineal feet of base, and 5 percent of installed stair materials of each type and color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring - Type ____: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern through wear layer thickness. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2034, Type corresponding to type specified. 2. Backing: Jute fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.100 inch, minimum, excluding backing. 2.02 STAIR COVERING 2.03 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base - Type ____: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove. 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Finish: Satin. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide only products meeting VOC Restrictions indicated in Section 01 6116. B. Concrete Slab Crack and Joint Filler: Cementitious-based compounds, pre-mixed or jobsite mixed. C. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof, low VOC-types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. At patient and exam rooms, provide two-part hard-setting epoxy adhesive. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Forbo Linoleum #660 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Edge and Transition Strips: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product from one of the following manufacturers a. Flexco b. Johnsonite c. Roppe E. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500

F. Sealer or Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Pre-ventilation: Pre-ventilate carpet by unrolling in a well-ventilated and unoccupied space for a minimum of four hours. B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. C. Clean and fill concrete slab cracks and control joints as recommended by flooring manufacturers. D. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide transition strips at the following transitions, when they occur on the project: 1. Resilient flooring to carpet. 2. Resilient flooring to unfinished floor. 3. At transitions not otherwise noted on the Drawings. 3.05 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns at seams. E. Finish seams in rubber flooring by heat welding. F. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap strip. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.06 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500

C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern. F. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Before installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.07 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. C. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.08 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGS A. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread. B. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean, seal and/or wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 TILE CARPETING 09 6813

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. C. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard color palette for selection of edge strips. 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 1 carton of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Each carpet tile type is specified in Division 9 Section "Finish Specification". Name of product is provided. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, _____ color. C. Edge and Transition Strips: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product from one of the following manufacturers a. Flexco b. Johnsonite c. Roppe PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Pre-ventilation: Pre-ventilate carpet by unrolling in a well-ventilated and unoccupied space for a minimum of four hours. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. D. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 TILE CARPETING 09 6813

E. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. F. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. G. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. H. Provide smooth transition between carpets of different thicknesses by feathering substrate with feathering compound. I. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. J. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. C. 1.Use a HEPA-filtration vacuum equipment. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. E. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2014. C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on cardstock, minimum 8x8 inch in size. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Basis-of-Design Products: Paint manufacturers listed in Division 9 Section "Finish Specification" are for color reference only. Provide paint from manufacturer(s) as specified below. C. Paints: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com/#sle. 2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com 4. Miller Paint Company: www.millerpaint.com D. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. 1. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 2. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically: 1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum. 2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum. 3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum. 4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum. c. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint WE-TR-S - Wood,Transparent, Sealer, Optional Stain: 1. One coat of clear sealer; . B. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; . C. Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint: 1. White: One coat, with reflective particles; . 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Interior Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. One coat sealer. 2. Satin: One coat of varnish; .

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000

B. Door frames, handrails, other pre-primed metals: 1. Touch-up with alkyd primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; . C. New Gypsum Board/Plaster: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. H. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning). I. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. J. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4 PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000

K. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. D. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. F. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 3.05 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior Ceilings and Bulkheads: GI-OP-3L, flat. 2. Interior Walls: GI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. B. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; MI-OP-2A. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4 CUBICLE CURTAINS 10 2123

GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cubicle curtain tracks and carriers. 2. Cubicle curtains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product Data including durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics for each type of curtain fabric specified. 2. Samples for verification of the following products, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. 3. Cubicle Curtain Fabrics: 12-inch- square swatch from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material. 4. Maintenance data for cubicle tracks, curtains and hardware to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify that tracks and curtains may be installed to comply with the original design and referenced standard. B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install tracks and curtains until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and work above ceilings is complete. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Clinic Exam Room Cubicle Curtains: Provide six additional curtains. 2. Other Cubicle Curtains: Furnish one complete extra set of each size specified. 3. Carriers: Provide at least 5% of the total number of carriers provided for the project. 4. Operating Wands: Provide two additional wands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each fabric type is based on the product named in Division 9 Section "Finish Specifications". Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by another manufacturer. 2.02 CUBICLE TRACK A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cubicles that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ADC Hospital Equipment. 2. General Cubicle Co. 3. Kirsch Co. B. Track: Anodized, extruded aluminum. 1. Curved Track: Factory fabricated, not less than 12-inch- radius bends. C. Track Mounting: Ceiling mounted; mechanically fastened to suspended ceiling grid. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 CUBICLE CURTAINS 10 2123

2. Concealed Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized. 3. Concealed Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Track Accessories: Provide end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling sleeves, wall brackets, and other accessories as required for secure and operational installation. Provide a quantity of carriers for 6-inch spacing the full length of the curtain plus 1 additional carrier. 1. Carriers: Nylon rollers and axle with chrome-plated steel hook. 2.03 CUBICLE CURTAINS A. Fabric: Provide cubicle curtain fabrics as specified in the Interior Finish Schedule. B. Curtain Top: Not less than 20-inch- wide nylon mesh with 1/2-inch- holes. Overlap seams and double-lock stitch to body of curtain. C. Provide curtains fabricated to comply with the following requirements: 1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent, but not less than 12 inches. 2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height minus 18 inches from finished ceiling at top and 12 inches above finished floor. 3. Top Hem: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 1-1/2 inches wide, triple thickness, reinforced with integral web, and double stitched. a. Grommets: 2-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass and spaced not more than 6 inches o.c. 4. Bottom and Side Hems: Not less than 1 inch wide, reinforced, triple thickness, and single stitched. 5. Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch wide, double turned and double stitched. D. Curtain Drop: Beaded chain with aluminum hook. E. Curtain Tieback: At each termination. F. Operating Wand: Fiberglass baton, not less than 30 inches long. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine ceilings for suitable conditions where cubicle track is to be installed. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cubicle curtain track level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and original design. B. Install ceiling-mounted tracks at intervals of not less than 24 inches. C. Center fastener in track to insure unencumbered carrier operation. D. Do not install cubicle curtain tracks over light fixtures or mechanical grilles. When a location conflict occurs between the drawings and field conditions, notify the Architect immediately. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING 10 2600

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Wall Covering 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 0000 - Finish Products: B. Section 10 2601 - Wall and Corner Guards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product data and detailed specifications for each system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate. C. Shop drawings showing locations, extent and installation details of wall covering products. D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture, pattern and thickness: 1. Sample of each product specified. E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of each component with requirements indicated. F. Maintenance data for wall protection system components for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project. B. Manufacturer’s qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the production of specified products and a record of successful in-service performance. C. Code compliance: Assemblies should conform to all applicable codes including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA, Life Safety and CA 01350. D. Fire performance characteristics: Provide engineered PETG wall protection system components with UL label indicating that they are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for Class A/1 characteristics listed below: 1. Flame spread: 25 or less 2. Smoke developed: 450 or less E. Impact strength: Provide wall protection components that have been tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F476. F. Chemical and stain resistance: Provide wall protection system components with chemical and stain resistance in accordance with ASTM D543. G. Color match: Provide wall protection components that are color matched in accordance with the following: 1. Delta Ecmc of no greater than 1.0 using CIELab color space. (Specifier note: Construction Specialties’ colors are matched under cool white fluorescent lighting and computer controlled within manufacturing tolerances. Color may vary if alternate lighting sources are present.) H. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall protection system manufactured by the same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture and physical properties. I. Delivery, Storage and Handling 1. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to show manufacturer. 2. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging in a clean, dry place out of direct sunlight and exposure to the elements. A minimum room temperature of 40ºF (4ºC) and a maximum of 100ºF (38ºC) should be maintained.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING 10 2600

3. Materials must be stored flat. J. Project Conditions 1. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65-75ºF (18-24ºC) for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation. 2. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. See Section 09 0000: Finish Products. 1. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Materials 1. Engineered PETG: Rigid sheet should be high-impact Acrovyn 4000 with standard Suede texture, nominal .060" (1.52mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D543 standards as established by the manufacturer. Colors to be indicated in the finish schedule from one of manufacturer’s available colors and patterns. 2. Compact Laminate 3. Fiber Reinforced Panel 4. Aluminum: Optional aluminum trims to be alloy 6063 T5 with clear anodized finish; minimum strength and durability properties as specified in ASTM B221. C. Wall Covering 1. Engineered PETG rigid sheet to be CS Acrovyn: Nominal .060" (1.52mm) thick rigid sheet supplied in 4' x 8' or 10' (1.2m x 2.4m or 3.0m) sheet sizes in standard Suede texture. Select from one of Acrovyn solid colors or Chameleon™ simulated patterns. Specify color-matched caulk, clear caulk, Acrovyn trims or aluminum trims as needed for joints/transitions. [Specifier note: refer to the Acrovyn Cradle to Cradle Product Summary at www.acrovyn.com/c2c to determine which colors and patterns are Cradle to Cradle Certified™ Gold or Silver (exceptions: adhesive, primer and caulk). Cradle to Cradle Certified™ is a certification mark licensed by the Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute.] D. Fabrication 1. General: Fabricate wall covering to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and sizes. E. Finishes 1. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applications and designations of finishes. F. Accessories 1. Adhesive: Acrovyn wall covering shall be furnished as a complete packaged system, including appropriate standard adhesive. 2. Primer, caulk and trims available for purchase. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Preparation 1. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Installation

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING 10 2600

1. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations using approved adhesive. 2. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 65-75ºF (18-24ºC) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation to allow for proper adhesive set-up. 3. Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. 4. Do not expose wall covering to direct sunlight during or after installation. This will cause the surface temperature to rise, which in turn will cause bubbles and delamination. D. Cleaning 1. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method. 2. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work. E. Protection 1. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS 10 2601

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall and Corner Guards: 1. InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: High impact vinyl with extruded aluminum full height retainer and integral impact absorbing device. 1. Size: 2 inches. 2. Corner: Square. 3. Color: As indicated in 09 0000 Finish Specification. 4. Length: One piece. 5. Height: 4- foot. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies (for anchoring/ blocking load requirements) 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015a. B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011. D. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013). E. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010). F. GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration; 1996. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories: 1. Bobrick: www.bobrick.com. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Keys: Provide ______keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316. E. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800

2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, semi-recessed, stainless steel unit with pivot hinge, tumbler lock. B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, semi-recessed, with viewing slots on sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock. 1. Capacity: 300 C-fold minimum. C. Waste Receptacle: Stainless steel, freestanding style with swing top. 1. Liner: Removable seamless stainless steel receptacle. 2. Minimum capacity: 10 gallons. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036. 1. Size: 18"X36". 2. Frame: 0.05 inchangle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; satin finish. 3. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. E. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. 1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers. 2.05 OTHER ACCESSORIES A. Long Coat Hook: B-6777 manufactured by Bobrick (to be located in all exam rooms and offices). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. The following items are Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions. C. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Water Mist-Type Fire Extinguishers (for MRI locations): Non-ferrous tank, pressurized, including hose and nozzle. 1. Certification: MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) Conditional 3-Tesla, certified by ANSI and UL. C. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge. 1. Class: A:B:C type. 2. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color. 3. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to ___ degrees F. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. 1. Size to accommodate accessories. B. Door: 0.036 inch metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon catch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. C. Door Glazing: Float glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick, and set in resilient channel glazing gasket. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in openings, mounted at the following heights: 1. For cabinets scheduled to receive extinguishers of 40 pounds or less, mount cabinet with extinguisher no more than 60-inches above finished floor. 2. For cabinets scheduled to receive extinguishers of more than 40 pounds, mount cabinet with extinguisher no more than 42 inches above finished floor. C. Place extinguishers in cabinets. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 LOCKERS 10 5100

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lockers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code. D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 x 3 inches in size, of each color selected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Lockers: 1. Penco Products, Inc; ____: www.pencoproducts.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS A. Staff Lockers: Three tier metal lockers, wall mounted with matching closed base. 1. Width: 12 inches. 2. Depth: 18 inches. 3. Height: 72 inches. 4. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner. 5. Provide sloped top. 2.03 METAL LOCKERS A. Lockers: Factory assembled, made of formed sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; metal edges finished smooth without burrs; baked enamel finished inside and out. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect; allow for contrasting colors for locker bodies and doors. B. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded. 1. Body and Shelves: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch. 2. Metal Base Height: 4 inch. C. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets and latching for quiet operation. 1. Door Frame: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum. D. Doors: Hollow double pan, sandwich construction, 1-3/16 inch thick; welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and finish edges smooth. 1. Door Outer Face: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum. 2. Door Inner Face: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch, minimum. 3. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. 4. Provide standard louvers in door face. E. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high; weld securely to locker body and door. 1. Hinge Thickness: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 LOCKERS 10 5100

F. Sloped Top: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch, with closed ends. G. Number Plates: Provide oval shaped brass plates. Form numbers ____ inch high of block font style with ADA designation, in contrasting color. H. Locking device supplied by Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square. C. Place and secure on prepared base. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 EQUIPMENT COORDINATION 11 0500

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Coordination and Installation of Owner-Furnished-Contractor-Installed (OFCI) equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for Contractor responsibilities related to coordination of project related activities. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations and the work of subcontractors to assure efficient and orderly installation of OFCI equipment. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation of this equipment. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Contractor to provide and install all electrical boxes, conduits and backing for OFCI and OFOI items. 1.04 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Owner will provide the following equipment to be incorporated into the work. Provide installation, including electrical and/or plumbing services as indicated on drawings. B. The Owner will provide the following equipment to be incorporated into the work. The installation of this equipment will be performed by the Vendor. Coordinate with vendor. Provide rough-in mechanical and electrical items and blocking for this equipment as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 EQUIPMENT COORDINATION 11 0500

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 WINDOW SHADE SYSTEMS 12 4960

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually-operated window shades and accessories for sun/glare/heat control and room darkening. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, product descriptions, installation instructions, detail sheets, and specifications for each type system specified. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and interface with other products. 1. Room schedule including field-verified dimensions of each opening to receive window shade systems. 2. Indicate System Series, operator, fabric selection, and mounting type. 3. Indicate control type. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Approved by manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original cartons. B. Individually package and mark shades with room number and opening number. C. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. D. Store and handle shades to prevent damage to fabrics, finishes, and operators prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Shade Techniques, Inc; P.O. Box 608, 4191 E. Gregory Road, Eaton, IN 47338; ASD. Tel: (765) 396-9903, Fax: (765) 396-9904. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; 42-03 35th Street, Long Island City, NY 11101. ASD. Tel: (718) 729-2020. Fax: (718) 729-2941. C. Provide all window shade systems from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manually-operated Shades: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; Product "Mecho/5". 1. Shadecloth: a. As specified in Section 09000 Interior Finish Specifications. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Mounting Brackets: Stamped steel, custom fabricated as required for ceiling mounting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install window shade systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. B. Assume responsibility for all field dimensions and mounting surfaces. C. Adjust window shade systems for proper operation. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 UPHOLSTERED SEAT CUSHIONS 12 5250

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Seat Cushions.. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 4100: Architectural Wood Casework B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and General Requirements specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 01600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: 1. Fabric: Submit minimum 12 inch long length of each type of fabric, from same bolt/dye lot as fabric proposed for the work. 2. Cushions: One half scale seat cushion, fully assembled. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Foam: Urethane; densities as specified. B. Fabric: As Scheduled, see Section 090000. C. Hook and loop strips: Velcro; 1 inch width. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cushions to the shapes indicated: 1. Seat Cushion: 3 inch thick 2.7# density ILD (Indent Load Deflection). 43 foam core with 1 inch thick 1.8# density ILD 35 foam topping for 4 inch overall cushion thickness. 2. Seat Back: 1.8 - 2.0# density; ILD 24-28, or approved; 3 inch thickness. B. Wrap foam cushions fully in 1/2 oz. Dacron meeting fire regulations. C. Fabricate for tight fit between cushions and adjacent construction. D. Sew cushion fabric covers with bull nose finish; no welts; non reversible design unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Provide heat resistant zipper along length of cushion at back side. E. Sew loop portions of woven nylon hook and loop ("Velcro") fastener section to align with hook sections mounted to substrate. F. Install covers to cushions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Adhere hook portion of hook and loop fastener sections to substrates.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 UPHOLSTERED SEAT CUSHIONS 12 5250

B. Tightly and evenly fit cushions in position, secure hook and loop fasteners. END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1300

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the plumbing work specified in this Division.

B. The requirements of this section apply to the fire suppression system.

C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown in these Specifications, including all design, labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. Provide all labor and material and perform such other services necessary and reasonably incidental to the design and installation of an automatic sprinkler and standpipe system for all areas indicated on the Drawings and as required by the Governing Agency.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Established fire protection contractor regularly engaged in the design and installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems. 2. Employ workers experienced and skilled in this trade.

B. Governing Agency: All work in accordance with and accepted by the following hereafter referred to Governing Agencies: 1. Fire Marshal State of Oregon. 2. City Fire Marshall.

C. Design Requirements: 1. Comply with the latest issue of NFPA Standard 13. 2. Design, lay out and install a hydraulically calculated wet and/or dry pipe system utilizing code approved automatic devices designed particularly for use in this type of system. Extend existing system and modify existing as required. 3. Provide hydraulic calculation methods design data information in accordance with Chapter 8, NFPA 13. Include a 10 percent margin of safety for available water pressure and flow rate. Include all friction losses from point of flow test to remote sprinkler area. 4. Fire Sprinkler Coverage: As required by the Governing Agency and including fire protection of all areas. 5. Seismic Restraint: Include load calculations for seismic restraints on drawings. 6. Revisions to the Contractor's design required by the Governing Agency shall be at the Contractor's expense.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: All sprinkler specialty material Grinnell/Gem, Central, Reliable, Globe, Star, Viking, Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America with UL or FM approval for use in automatic sprinkler systems. All materials and equipment suitable for 175 psi working pressure.

E. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment’s UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 5

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1300

1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification.

1.04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions.

B. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Working Drawings: 1. Prepare fire protection system working drawing showing locations and types of heads or outlets, alarm valves and devices, pipe sizes and cutting lengths, test tees and valves, drain valves, and other related items. Plans shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 8, 1999 NFPA 13, irregardless of the edition adopted by the Governing Agencies and used for design. Plans shall be stamped and signed by the responsible engineer. Plans shall be completed using CAD. 2. Provide 3 sets of drawings showing sprinkler head locations and layout coordinated with architectural ceiling details to the Architect for review prior to submitting details to the Governing Agencies. 3. Provide 6 sets of drawings to the Architect to be provided to Insurance Underwriter for approval. 4. Provide 6 sets of drawings to designated representatives of the Fire Marshal for approval. 5. Then provide 6 sets of approved Drawings to the Architect for final review.

B. Submittals: 1. Sprinkler Heads: Product Data for each type of head. 2. Alarm flow or pressure switches. 3. Fire department connection. 4. Backflow prevention valve assembly. 5. System control valves. 6. Piping materials. 7. Alarm bell. 8. Air compressor and air maintenance device. 9. Miscellaneous Equipment.

C. Test Reports: Submit certificates of completion of tests and inspections.

1.06 EXTRA STOCK

A. Additional Heads: Provide number, type and temperature rating installed as required to meet NFPA 13 requirements.

B. Storage Cabinet: Provide as required to receive reserve sprinkler heads and special installation tools required.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 5

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1300

C. Index Label: Provide for each head indicating manufacturer, model, orifice, size or K-factor, and temperature rating. Also provide inside cabinet a list of heads stored within and brief description of where installed.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice.

B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Miscellaneous Sprinkler Specialties: Complete system including all items required by the Governing Agency including but not limited to: 1. Electric alarm switch and indoor and outdoor 120 V alarm bell or water motor gong. 2. Valve monitoring switches with two outputs (one to fire alarm & one to sprinkler {alarm} bell). 3. Fire department hose connections. 4. Wiring from the alarm switches to the point of connection in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Coordinate with the Electrical Work specified in Division 28. 5. Provide communication equipment with local fire department when required by Governing Agency. 6. Dry pipe air compressor sized and arranged in accordance with the requirements of NFPA No. 13. Include an automatic air pressure maintenance device.

B. Water Service Connection Backflow Preventer: Connect to primary water service with code approved double check valve assembly made up of two brass, internally spring loaded check valves, OS&Y shut-off valves and test cocks.

C. Sprinkler Heads: Approved heads with temperature ratings required for service indicated. 1. Unfinished Areas: Upright, pendant or sidewall spray type, plain bronze. 2. Finished Areas: Chrome plated recessed and sidewall heads in finished ceilings, and where piping is exposed use chrome plated upright heads. 3. Dry Pipe Systems: Especially designed and approved for dry pipe systems except where piping is routed through heated areas, standard heads may be utilized as approved by the Governing Agency. 4. Dry pendant or dry sidewall heads for small areas subject to freezing. Chrome plated at interior finished locations and plain bronze in unfinished areas and exterior locations. 5. On-Off Heads: Especially designed and approved. Where shown on the Drawings.

D. Escutcheons: Provide polished chrome escutcheons on pipe extending through finished walls and ceilings. Provide oversized escutcheon to comply with current code.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 5

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1300

E. Above Ground Water Piping: Use standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe ASTM A53, A135, or A795, and cast iron screwed or mechanical joint fittings especially adapted and approved for sprinkler work. Use reducing fittings where changes in pipe size occur. Bushings are prohibited.

F. At Contractor's option, Schedule 10 black steel pipe ASTM A135 or ASTM A795, and mechanical joint fittings specifically approved for sprinkler use, may be substituted for the black steel pipe specified above. Pipe shall be UL listed and FM approved for 300 psi working pressure. Pipe must have a CRR of 1.00 or greater.

G. At Contractor’s option, thin wall threadable steel pipe, ASTM A135 or A795, and cast iron or malleable iron screwed fittings 1½” and smaller, approved for sprinkler work.

H. Valves: UL and/or FM listed for fire protection service. 1. Iron body OS&Y pattern, bronze mounted double disc, parallel seat. 2. Iron body butterfly style with EPDM liner, bronze disc with lever or indicating type gear operator. 3. Bronze body ball valve, three-piece design, with approved operator. 4. Where required by Governing Agency, provide wall or post style indicating valves. 5. Standpipe Valves: Angle or straight pattern rough brass gate valve with cap and retaining chain.

I. Guards: Standard manufacture.

J. Fire Department Connection: Flush wall mounted cast brass construction with clappers on each inlet and threads matching the fire district equipment. Number of inlets and sizes as indicated on the Drawings and approved by the fire district. Standard, Allenco, Seco, Potter-Roemer, or acceptable substitute.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Connect to water supply source as shown on Drawings, check adequacy, and call any deficiency to attention of Architect. Coordinate with work in Division 22 and 33.

B. Install all piping in a true and even manner with lines pitched for drainage and system arranged so that it can be entirely emptied of water. Install hangers at all branch line connections to cross mains and at all other points as required in hereinbefore specified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and NFPA standards.

C. Support all pipe work from building construction with mild steel hangers spaced not more than 12 feet on centers. Support mains independently of branches, and in no case shall branch hangers assume any portion of the weight of mains. Provide seismic restraints and flexible connections in accordance with building code requirements.

D. Locate sprinkler heads in repeating, modular pattern, centered and accurately coordinated with ceiling grid as indicated. Conceal all piping unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate design with lighting and exposed HVAC duct layout in areas without ceilings.

E. Locate and install the required fire sprinkler alarm, flow, and test and drain valves where required by the Governing Agency.

F. Where sprinkler lines penetrate fire rated partitions, provide fire stopping system in accordance with Section 22 0500.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 5

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1300

3.02 TEST

A. Test all pipes to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi and maintain for four hours minimum. Perform other tests as directed by Governing Agency.

3.03 PAINT

A. Paint all exposed piping and hangers in accordance with Section 09 9100. Do not paint heads.

3.04 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION

A. Obtain and deliver to Owner a certificate, in duplicate, stating that system as installed has been inspected and accepted by authorities and/or agencies having jurisdiction, and that all regulations affecting work have been satisfied. Submit an acceptable certificate to the Owner before final payment is requested.

B. Certificate: Minimum NFPA Figure 16-1 information per NFPA 13.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 5

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the plumbing work specified in this Division.

B. The requirements of this Section apply to the plumbing systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 22 sections.

C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes.

D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Water, sanitary sewer, and storm sewer service complete per serving utility company requirements. 2. Service and distribution piping including valves, supports, insulation, etc. 3. Complete plumbing systems, including fixtures, trim, equipment, etc. 4. Rough-in and final connection of plumbing equipment and fixtures furnished under other Divisions of this Specification. 5. Piping to and connection of equipment or fixtures furnished outside of these Specifications and Contract but described on the Drawings. 6. Special systems as specified herein.

E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the label of a recognized testing laboratory such as UL or CSA.

B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Federal Specifications (FS) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Factory Mutual (FM) 7. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments 8. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local Amendments 9. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 12. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

13. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) 14. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 15. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 16. American Gas Association (AGA)

D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner.

E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed.

F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both.

G. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions.

H. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment’s UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered.

1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification.

1.04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions.

B. HVAC piping systems, fuel piping systems, fire suppression piping systems, and control devices and control wiring relating to the heating and air conditioning systems are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid.

D. All sections of Division 22 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 22. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (SUBMITTALS)

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section.

B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period.

C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used.

D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method.

E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified.

F. Include field wiring diagrams and connection diagrams for all control and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans.

G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to provide quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor’s responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data.

H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time.

1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION

A. Materials other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted.

1.07 CHANGE ORDERS

A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Project Record (As-Installed) Drawings: 1. Maintain a set of record drawings on the job site as directed in Division 1 . 2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping and all cleanouts, whether concealed or exposed, dimensioned from permanent building features. b. Locations of all valves with assigned tag numbers. c. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information. d. Locations of tracer wire terminal points. e. Model numbers of installed equipment. 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the form of reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Computer-aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project record drawings. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor’s expense.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit five (5) sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions, including manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams, and parts lists and vendors for all serviceable items of equipment, valve charts, balancing data, final control diagrams showing final set points, and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three- ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose-leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab markers for each classification of equipment or data.

C. Instruction Manual: Submit separate Instruction Manual 30 days prior to scheduling the required Instruction Period. Include the following: 1. Description of each system and operational sequences. 2. Seasonal system adjustments. 3. Description and normal settings for time clocks, thermostats, fan and other motor switches, etc. 4. Normal valve settings. 5. Emergency measures upon system failure. 6. Cross reference information furnished by manufacturer in the Operating and Maintenance Manual above.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice.

B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5% to plus 10% as approved in each case.

B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel-burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project.

C. Efficiency: Service (Domestic) Water Heating Equipment shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2001 and the State Energy code. Where equipment efficiencies are indicated, the use of alternate or substitute manufacturer’s equipment with lower efficiencies is not permitted.

D. Storage and Handling: 1. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Handling: Avoid damage. 3. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.

2.02 MOTORS

A. General: Motors shall conform to UL, CSA, and NEMA MG-1 and bear a permanently attached nameplate indicating compliance and motor characteristics. Provide motors meeting UL 507 standard where applicable.

B. Manufacturers: General Electric, Lincoln, Baldor, Wagner, Westinghouse or accepted substitute. Where selection of motor manufacturer is within Contractor's control (independent of equipment selection), provide motors produced by a single manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

C. Temperature Rating: Class B insulation, except where otherwise indicated or required for service indicated.

D. Starting Capability: As required for service indicated, but not less than 5 starts per hour.

E. Phases and Current: 1/3 horsepower and smaller capacitor-start, capacitor-run single-phase; 1/2 horsepower and larger, squirrel-cage induction polyphase. Coordinate with actual current characteristics; specified in Division 16 and use no 230/460 voltage motors on 208 voltage power or vice versa.

F. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase; 1.25 for single-phase.

G. Construction: General purpose, continuous duty; NEMA design "B", except "C" for high starting torque applications.

H. Frames: For single phase motor sizes NEMA No. 48, except 56 for heavy-duty applications. NEMA "T" frames for 1 horsepower and larger polyphase motors. Special frame types as required for close coupled pumps and similar applications.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

I. Bearings: Ball or roller, and design for thrust where applicable; double shielded and regreasable, except provide permanently sealed where not accessible for greasing. Sleeve-type bearings permitted only where indicated for fractional (1/6 hp or less) horsepower motors with direct drive loads. Minimum L-10 bearing life of 40,000 hours when used with minimum pitch sheaves per NEMA Table 14-1.

J. Enclosure Type: Unless otherwise indicated, open drip-proof for normal concealed indoor use, guarded where exposed to employees or occupants. Type II for outdoor use, except weather- protected Type I where adequately housed. Totally enclosed where explosion-proof motors are required.

K. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal with internal sensing device for stopping motor, and for signaling where indicated on single phase motors.

L. Speed: Not faster than synchronous speeds of 1800 RPM except on some pumps as approved in each case.

M. Efficiency: The manufacturer's highest (premium) efficiency motors tested under procedures recommended by NEMA MG-1 (IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B). Intermittent duty motors, operating less than 6 hours per day, shall comply with EPAct standards. Submit manufacturer's data if motor nameplate does not indicate minimum efficiency. Nominal full load efficiencies for 460 volt, 1800 rpm motors: HP Efficiency % 1-1/2 87.5 2 87.5 3 88.5 5 89.5 7-1/2 91.5 10 91.5 15 93.0 20 93.5 25 and larger 94.0

N. Inverter Duty Motors: Where motors are controlled by an adjustable frequency drive, provide motors labeled “Inverter Duty,” complying with NEMA MG1-31, and meeting the requirements of the adjustable frequency drive manufacturer.

2.03 STARTERS AND SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: General Electric, ITE, Allen Bradley, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, Cerus Industrial or accepted substitute. Provide starters by same manufacturer throughout project.

B. General: Provide each motor with starter or switch as approved and recommended by manufacturer of motor or equipment of which motor is a part.

C. Starter Characteristics: Type I general purpose enclosure with padlock ears and supports for mounting as indicated. Starter type and size as recommended by motor manufacturer. Use no starter smaller than NEMA Size 1.

D. Manual Switches: Provide on motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller except where automatic control or interlock is indicated. Include pilot light. Provide overload protection where not protected by internal motor overload protection.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

E. Magnetic Starters: Provide for 1/2 horsepower and larger motors, and for smaller motors on automatic control or with interlock switch. Full voltage, across the line, single speed, non- reversing except where otherwise required. Include power on and running pilot lights, on-off- auto selector switch, external reset button, overload relay on each phase, and devices for coordination with control system (including fused transformer for control circuit). Provide automatic ambient temperature compensation for starter heaters.

2.04 GUARDS

A. Provide guards in accordance with State Safety Code and OSHA requirements over all rotating equipment including belts, shafts and couplings. Drive guards over belts and sheaves shall include 2-1/2" diameter access opening at shaft ends for speed counter.

2.05 ACCESS PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Inryco/Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. Inryco/Milcor Style DW, K, or M panels as required by construction.

B. Construction: Flush style, fire rated in fire rated partitions and ceilings. Screwdriver latches on all access panels.

2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS

A. Flexible Expansion/Seismic Loop: Factory fabricated assembly consisting of two 90 degree elbows, two lengths of flexible hose, and a 180 degree return bend to allow free movement in 3 axis. Return bend shall include attachment point for support and a drain/vent fitting. Hose shall be corrugated metal style with metal overbraid. Connections to match piping system except connection 2” and larger shall be flanged style. Copper or bronze construction for potable water systems. Metraflex “Metraloop.”

2.07 METERS AND GAUGES

A. General: Install meters and gauges where shown on the plans or specified elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Pressure-Temperature Test Plugs: 1. ¼” or ½” NPT fitting of solid brass capable of receiving either an 1/8” OD pressure or temperature probe and rated for zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig. Neoprene valve core for temperatures to 200 deg. F., Nordel to 350 deg. F. 2. Provide for each test plug a pressure gauge adapter with 1/16” or 1/8” OD pressure probe. 3. Furnish a test kit containing one 2-1/2” dial pressure test gauge of suitable range, one gauge adapter with 1/16” or 1/8” OD probe and two 5” stem pocket test thermometers – one 0 to 220 degrees F and one 50 to 550 degrees F. Turn the kit over to the Architect. 4. Cisco “P/T Plugs,” Peterson “Pete’s Plug” or approved substitute.

C. Thermometers: Liquid-in-glass, adjustable stem, separable sockets, plus 40 to 240 degrees F range (unless indicated otherwise). Weiss numbers are listed. Equivalent Taylor, Trerice, Weksler or approved substitute. 1. Wide case (9”) in equipment rooms and all major equipment items. Weiss “9VS” series. 2. Narrow case (7”) in all other locations. Weiss “7VS” series.

D. Pressure Gauges: Install on discharge of all pumps and where shown on Drawings 4-1/2” dial, 0-100 psig graduation pressure gauges with Ashcroft No. 1106 pulsation dampers and stop cocks. Weiss UGE-1 or equivalent Ashcroft, Marsh, Trerice, Weksler.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

2.08 VALVES

A. General: Provide factory fabricated valves of the type, body material, temperature and pressure class, and service indicated. Bronze gate, globe and check valves shall comply with MSS-SP- 80. Ball valves shall comply with MSS-SP-110. Iron gate and globe valves shall comply with MSS-SP-70. Iron check valves shall comply with MSS-SP-71. Butterfly valves shall comply with MSS-SP-67. Valve size same as connecting pipe size.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milwaukee, Crane, Grinnell, Nibco, Hammond, Stockham, Legend, Watts, and Walworth. Grooved end valves Victaulic, Tyco-Grinnell, Gruvlock, or accepted substitute. NIBCO numbers are given except as noted. Where possible, provide valves from a single manufacturer.

C. Valve styles: Domestic hot and cold water. 1. Valves 2” and Smaller: a. Ball: Two-piece, bronze body, full port, 600 psi WOG, Fig. T/S-585-70. b. Check: Bronze body, swing check, 200 psi WOG, T/S-413B (bronze disc) or T/S- 413Y (Teflon disc). c. Globe (shutoff): Bronze body, Teflon disc, 200 psi WOG, T/S-211Y. d. Globe (throttling): Bronze body, full stainless steel plug disc, 600 psi WOG, T-276AP. 2. Valves 2” through 12”: a. Ball: Three-piece, bronze body, full port, 600 psi WOG, T/S-595Y. b. Butterfly: Ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 200 psi WOG, Lugged body – LD- 2000, Wafer body – WD-2000, Grooved body – GD-4765. c. Gate (to 3”): Bronze body, non-rising stem, 200 psi WOG, T/S-133. d. Gate (4” to 12”): Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, solid wedge, bolted bonnet, 200 psi WOG, F-619. e. Check (2 ½” and larger): Iron body, bronze trim, Class 125, F-918-B (swing type).

D. Butterfly Valve Operators: Locking lever for shut-off service; “Memory Stop” for lever handle with 10 position throttling plate for throttling service; gear operator with babbitt sprocket rim for chain-operated valves and gear operators on all 8” or larger valves.

E. Butterfly Valve Style: Lug-type with cap screws for all valves utilized for equipment isolation for servicing. Lug and grooved style valves shall be capable for use as isolation valves and recommended by manufacturer for dead-end service at full system pressure.

F. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation.

G. Mechanical Actuators: Provide mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, where valves 4" and larger are mounted more than 7' above the floor, and where manual operation is difficult because of valve size, pressure differential or other operating conditions. Drop chains to 6'-6" above the floor.

H. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Select and install valves with ends matching the types of pipe/tube connections.

2.09 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, inserts, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size. The Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry Practice SP-58 and SP-69 are referenced in this section.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

B. Manufacturers: B-Line, Carpenter & Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Tolco, Erico, or accepted substitute. Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturers as noted).

C. Corrosion Protection: Provide materials which are zinc plated or factory painted to prevent corrosion. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, plastic coated, or by other recognized industry methods.

D. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613. Design restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems," Second Edition, 1998, SMACNA, or “A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint” ASHRAE RP-812, 1999.

E. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260). 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97), fabricated from steel. 3. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4 (Fig. 212, 216). 5. Double-Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. 6. Adjustable Saddle-Support: MSS Type 36 (Fig. 258) and MSS Type 37 (Fig. 259), including saddle, pipe and reducer. Fabricate base-support from steel pipe and include cast-iron flange or welded-steel plate. 7. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems, single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut" channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Super Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut.

F. Vertical Pipe Clamps: 1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8 (Fig. 261). 2. Four-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt-holes.

G. Hanger Attachment: 1. Hanger Rod: Rolled threads, zinc plated. Right hand threaded. 2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13 (Fig. 230). 3. Weldless Eye-Nut: MSS Type 17 (Fig. 290). 4. Malleable Eye-Socket: MSS Type 16 (Fig. 110R). 5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299).

H. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 (Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power-Strut PS349 continuous channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut, Super Strut. 2. Clamps: MSS Type 19 (Fig. 285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig. 225, 226, 131), Type 23 (Fig. 86, 87, 88), Type 25 (Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable.

2.10 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. Pipe Markers: 1. Adhesive pipe markers of width, letter size and background color conforming to ANSI A13.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 with arrow banding tape or similar Seaton, Zeston, MSI.

B. Nameplates: 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16" thick, laminated 2-ply plastic, bottom ply white, outer ply black, letters formed by exposing bottom ply. 2. Size: 2" by 4" nameplates with 1/4" high letters.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

C. Valve Tags: 1. 2" diameter, 18-gauge polished brass tags with 3/16" chain hole and 1/4" high stamped, black-filled service designation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seaton, Brady, MSI.

2.11 CONCRETE FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. Classes and Applications: Provide strength classes with the following cement content and water/cement ratios for the indicated applications and similar required applications: 1. 4000 psi Class: 565 pounds cement/yard (6.0 sacks); 0.57 water/cement ratio. Provide 4000 Class for tanks, vaults, beam-type foundations and similar structures. 2. 3000 psi Class: 500 pounds cement/yard (5.25 sacks); 0.68 water/cement ratio. Provide 3000 Class for miscellaneous underground structural concrete, reinforced encasement, block type foundations (with smallest dimension at least 0.2 times largest dimension), curbs, pads, inertia blocks (unframed type), and similar structural support work. 3. 2500 psi Class: 450 pounds cement/yard (4.75 sacks); 0.75 water/cement ratio. Provide 2500 Class for plain encasement, thrust blocks, filling steel-framed units, and similar work. 4. Rough Grouting Class: 565 pounds cement/yard (6.0 sacks): 0.75 water-cement ratio; adjust aggregate sizes to facilitate placement. Use for rough grouting, not for setting equipment bases. 5. Backfill Class (Lean Concrete): 375 pounds cement/yard (4.0 sacks); 0.87 water/cement ratio. Use for backfiring where excavations are extended below point of support for mechanical work.

2.12 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

A. Through-penetration fire stopping system tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3M, Metacaulk, SpecSeal, or approved.

B. Select system for proper application based on wall construction, type of penetrating item, wall rating, etc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION

A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work.

B. Utility Locations: The location of existing utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation.

C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast-in-Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast-in-place work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

D. Coordination: 1. The drawings are based on equipment of a certain manufacturer and may be identified as such. Where alternate manufacturers or approved substitutes are incorporated into the work, any required design changes are the responsibility of the contractor. Such changes may include changes in utility or system connection sizes, location, or orientation, service clearances, structural support or acoustic considerations. 2. Where the work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare accurate scale shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. 3. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 4. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist.

E. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work.

3.02 UTILITY COORDINATION

A. Utility Coordination: Coordinate all aspects of the incoming plumbing utility services indicated with the city engineer, serving utility, and the off-street improvements contractor. Requirements of the utility company which exceed the provisions made on the Drawings or covered by these Specifications shall take precedence. Provisions made on the Drawings or Specifications in excess of the utility company's requirements shall take precedence. No additional compensation will be allowed the contractor for connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utilities.

3.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING

A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings.

B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment.

C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system.

D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 11 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with Code requirements.

B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless indicated otherwise, conceal all piping. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings.

C. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans under all domestic hot water heaters and all above ceiling in-line pumps and cooling coils. Locate pan immediately below piping and equipment, and extend a minimum of 6" on each side and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment being protected. Fabricate pans 2" deep, of reinforced 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with watertight seams and rolled or hemmed edges. Provide 3/4" drainage piping, properly discharged to over floor drain or as shown on the Drawings. Comply with Mechanical Code for overflow protection and pipe sizing.

D. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, dielectric unions, valves and items requiring service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through.

E. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing valves, flush valves, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture.

F. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by piping, hangers, conduits, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations.

G. Concrete Work: Coordinate with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 03 for mechanical work concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, mix design, materials (use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 3 work where possible), admixtures, accessories, (including waterstops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittals and other requirements of the concrete work.

H. Housekeeping Pads: Construct minimum 3” thick with chamfered edges using 3000 psi concrete. Provide #4 reinforcing bars 8” on center in each direction and within 4” of each edge, centered in pad thickness. Provide ½” dowel with 3” embedment into floor slab for each 2 square feet of pad area. Dowels and equipment anchor bolts shall be spaced a minimum of 6” from pad edges.

3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following requirements:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 12 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and isolation of equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping, and where shown on the drawings. Install valves at low points in piping systems that must be drained for service or freeze protection. 2. Locate valves in accessible spaces (or behind access panels) and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane.

B. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation.

C. Valve Access: Provide access panels to all valves installed behind walls, in furring or otherwise inaccessible.

D. Lubricant-Seal: Select and install plug valves with lubricant-seal except where frequent usage is indicated or can be reasonably expected to occur.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods. 3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only.

B. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install specified seismic restraints to restrict excessive movement. 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed on all insulated pipe and tubing. c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 13 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields (MSS type 39) at each hanger.

C. Pipe Support: 1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height (maximum 10' as required by Code) and just below roof line. 2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: Steel Copper 1-1/4" and smaller 7' span 6' span 1-1/2" pipe 9' span 6' span 2" pipe 10' span 10' span 2-1/2" & larger 12' span 10' span 3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: a. Hubless and Compression Joint: At every other joint except when developed length exceeds 4', then at each joint. b. Additional Support: Provide at each horizontal branch and/or at concentrated loads to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 4. Polyvinyl Chloride, Polypropylene and Other Plastic Pipe: Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod diameters as follows: a. Continuous support 1/2" to 4" pipe size Fee & Mason No. 109 channels with Fee & Mason No. 108 hanger. Lay pipe directly into the channel with fittings or couplings placed in spaces between channel sections. Secure piping to the channel at intervals between hangers with a few turns of vinyl electrical tape. b. Non-Continuous Support: Maximum 4' spans or shorter if required by manufacturer for temperatures and pipe schedule. c. Arrange supports to allow free movement, but restrict upward movement of lateral runs so as not to create reverse grade on drainage pipe. Use double bolt clamp or band hanger with restraint (Tolco fig. 25). 5. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc. to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 6. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: Pipe and Tube Size Rod Size Inches mm Inches mm 1/2” to 4” 12.7 to 101.6 3/8” 9.5 5” to 8” 127.0 to 203.2 1/2” 12.7 10” to 12” 254.0 to 304.8 5/8” 15.9

D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations.

E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable.

F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights.

G. Installation of drilled-in concrete anchors shall comply with the manufacturers instructions for working load, depth of embedment, and spacing between anchors and from the edge of the slab. Use only wedge style anchors.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 14 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

H. Seismic Restraints: Install restraints where recommended in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual." Show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613 and reference ASCE standard. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). Acceptable Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, Mason Industries, Tolco, or approved.

3.07 PLUMBING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as shown/scheduled/specified; except vent and drainage piping. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced" signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping. Locate pipe labels in accessible areas as follows: 1. Near each valve, meter, gauge, or control device. 2. Near equipment such as pumps, heat exchangers, water heaters, etc. 3. At piping branch connections. 4. At penetrations (each side) of walls, ceilings, and floors. 5. At access panels and doors. 6. At 25 foot maximum intervals. Provide a minimum of 1 label above each room where lift out ceiling is installed. Reduce intervals in congested areas such as mechanical rooms.

B. Valve Identification: Tag all valves with brass disc and chain. Prepare valve charts indicating valve number, size, location, function and normal position. Use no duplicate numbers in Plumbing and Heating systems. Mount glazed frames containing one set of valve charts in the building mechanical room.

C. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment such as heat exchangers, pumps, etc. Identify equipment in field same as on drawings. Permanently mount in an appropriate and effective location.

D. Operation Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed to convey the message; example: "DO NOT CLOSE THIS VALVE EXCEPT WHEN THE PUMP IS OFF."

3.08 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide complete plumbing connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental piping, fittings, trim and labor necessary for a finished working installation.

B. Verify the rough-in and finish requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring plumbing connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in. Minimum branch pipe size for fixtures shall be 1/2".

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final completion, thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean-up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 15 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

3.10 PIPE PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the product’s UL listing. Below are the minimum installation requirements. 1. Install specified penetrating item(s) with required annular spacing in proper size wall or floor opening. Support penetrating item(s) adequately on both sides of construction. 2. Clean all opening and penetrating item surfaces in penetration area to remove loose debris, dirt, oil, wax, grease, old caulking, etc. 3. If needed or required for gypsum or concrete block walls, install specified galvanized steel wire mesh or sleeve recessed and centered inside wall around penetrating item(s) so that it is snug against perimeter of opening. 4. When required, install specified type and depth of backing material in annular space, recessed to required fill depth of fire stopping caulking. 5. Gun, trowel, and/or pump fire stopping sealant to specified depth in annular space around penetrating item(s). Trowel sealant surfaces flush with wall or floor surfaces to a smooth, defect-free finish. Where required, apply specified size caulking bead around penetrating item(s) at zero annular contact areas and tool smooth.

3.11 MECHANICAL PAINTING

A. Minimum Requirements: All mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc., exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other locations except mechanical equipment rooms will be painted.

B. Painting Materials: Materials shall be compatible with the material to be painted.

C. Uninsulated Piping: Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping located buried in ground, in concrete or masonry one (1) coat acid-resisting black paint. Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping in moist equipment rooms, crawl spaces without vapor barriers, or exposed to weather one (1) coat black asphaltum varnish.

D. Iron Work: Paint hangers, rods, anchors, guides, threads of galvanized pipe, bases, supports, uncoated sheet metal and other iron work without factory finish, exposed to weather, located in moist concealed spaces and moist equipment rooms, one coat acid-resisting black paint. Apply one (1) coat Dixon's Aluminum Graphite No. 209 paint over the (1) coat primer as recommended by paint manufacturer to all hot metal surfaces.

E. Piping in Mechanical Room: All insulated and uninsulated piping exposed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be painted. Painting is not required for cast iron, plastic, or glass waste piping, or for stainless steel piping, PEX tubing and soft copper tubing. Contractor shall submit proposed colors for approval. In lieu of painting, insulated piping may be covered with colored PVC insulation jacketing as specified in Section 22 0700, Plumbing Insulation.

F. Insulated Piping and Other Insulated Surfaces: Paint insulated piping in half-round, split tile, or other inaccessible locations, one (1) coat asphalt emulsion.

3.12 PLUMBING WORK CLOSEOUT

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of leaks, obstructions, or contamination.

B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings required in Section 01300, Submittals, or as previously specified in this Section.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 16 of 17

COMMON PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0500

C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work.

D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of plumbing equipment and systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 17 of 17

PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of plumbing systems specified elsewhere in these specifications.

B. The requirements of Section 22 0500, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Minimum Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13 provisions of the State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code.

B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50.

C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 22 0500, the following apply: 1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory- fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic. 2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Insulation Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certain Teed, Armstrong, Pabco, Imcoa or Nomaco. Johns Manville products are listed unless indicated otherwise.

B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Foster, 3M, Insul-Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong.

2.02 PIPING INSULATION

A. Interior and Exterior Piping Systems 32 to 180 Deg. F: Glass fiber preformed pipe insulation with a minimum K-value of 0.23 at 75 deg. F, a minimum density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot within all-service vapor barrier jacket, vinyl or pre-sized finish and pressure sensitive seal. Johns Manville "Micro-Lok."

B. Exterior Installations: Same as for interior installations except 0.016" stainless steel.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4

PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700

C. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre-slit, self-sealing elastomeric pipe insulation up to 2-1/8" ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/hr. sq. ft./in. at 75 deg. F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms/inch. On cold surfaces, apply in thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong "Armaflex 2000" or, in concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved.

2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Equipment Temperatures Below 70 Deg. F: Flexible, closed cell, elastomeric sheet insulation of 5.5 #/cubic feet density and 0.27 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Armstrong "Armaflex."

B. Equipment Temperatures From 70 to 450 Deg. F: Glass fiber 3 pound density insulation with a 0.23 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Johns Manville "814 Spin-Glas" with "FSK" jacket or finished as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Equipment Temperatures From 350 to 1200 Deg. F: Molded high temperature calcium silicate minimum 12.5 pound density and 0.4 thermal conductivity at 200 deg. F mean temperature. Glass cloth finish, Claremont Diplag or finished as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Exterior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Same as interior insulation with weatherproof metal or finished as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, staples, bands, tapes, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers, welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for the insulation and conditions specified. No staples allowed on cold water piping systems.

B. Interior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Finished metal jacket or as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation material specified.

C. PVC Protective Jacketing and Valve and Pipe Fitting Covers: Johns Manville Zeston 2000, Proto LoSmoke, or Ceel-Co Ceel-Tite 100 Series with precut fitting fiberglass insulation or approved.

D. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster Drion 85-75 contact cement or approved substitute.

E. Saddles and Shields: Install to prevent crushing of insulation at support points. 1. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39. 2. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40. 3. Preinsulated Pipe Supports: Calcium silicate load bearing metal jacketed inserts. Pipe Shields Inc. or accepted substitute. a. Pipe supported on rods - Models A1000, A2000, A3000, A4000. b. Pipe supported on flat surfaces - Models A1000, A2000, A3000, A4000. c. Pipe supported on pipe rolls - Models A3000, A4000, A5000. d. Vertical riser clamp – Models E1000, E1100, E1200.

F. Removable/Reusable Insulation Covers: 1. Insulation Filler: Install 2-1/4# - 4#/cu. ft. glass fiber, 6# - 8#/ cu. ft. mineral wool or glass fiber/type E felted (9#/cu. ft.) flexible blankets and pads for large, irregular shaped equipment such as pump casings, bolting flanges, etc. For small common shapes such as valves, elbows, flanges, etc., install preformed flexible glass fiber pipe wrap, preformed glass fiber pipe covering or glass fiber/type E felted (9#/cu. ft.) insulation.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4

PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700

2. Hot Encasement: Glass fiber cloth plain or silicon coated on both sides, knitted stainless steel mesh, glass fiber cloth laminate with aluminum, or stainless steel foil or hex wire mesh. 3. Cold Encasement: Glass fiber cloth silicon coated both sides, knitted stainless steel mesh, glass fiber cloth laminate with aluminum or stainless steel foil or glass fiber cloth with nickel wire insertion, silicon coated both sides. 4. Stitching: Glass fiber thread/PVC coated, staples - galvanized or stainless steel, galvanized or stainless steel hog rings, 0.010" - 0.15" dia/dead soft stainless steel wire. 5. Attachments and Securements: a. Quilting: Stainless 2-hole washers, both sides with twisted 0.035" - 0.051" wire loops, 12 ga. stainless spindle/washer/ speed clip assembly or stainless 0.035" - 0.051" wire loops. b. Lacing and Hooks: Stainless 2-hole 12 gage bent wire lacing hooks, stainless 2-hole dished washer assembly with twisted 0.035" - 0.051" wire loops, 12 gage stainless spindle washer with built-in hook and speed clip or stainless 1-hole dished and flat washer riveted through the cloth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING INSULATION

A. General: Do not insulate underground piping except at joints and fittings on preinsulated piping unless indicated otherwise. At contractor’s option and in accordance with Part 2 of this section, elastomeric insulation may be installed on domestic water piping in thicknesses equivalent to the glass fiber insulation. Installation shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendation with joints and seams completely sealed.

B. Domestic Water Piping: 1. Insulate with glass fiber pipe covering, 1” thick for cold water piping and for 1" and smaller hot water piping; 1-1/2" for 1-1/4" and larger hot water piping. 2. Insulate hot water return piping same as cold water piping. 3. Insulate all water piping exposed to outside weather and freezing temperatures with 1” thickness of glass fiber pipe covering with weather-proof metal jacket. Apply insulation after heat cable is installed.

C. Interior Rain Drains: 1. Concealed: Insulate with 1" thick one pound density glass fiber blanket and continuous vapor barrier jacket. 2. Exposed: Insulate with 3.5 pound density glass fiber insulation with continuous vapor barrier jacket. 3. Cold climates: Insulate over heat tape where indicated.

D. Waste Lines: Insulate all pipe exposed to outside temperatures with 3/4" thick glass fiber pipe insulation with a vapor barrier jacket.

E. Pipe Fittings: 1. Insulate and finish all fittings including valve bodies, bonnets, unions, flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent insulation jacket for continuous vapor barrier covering over all fittings. 2. Use 1/2" thick Armaflex or Aerotube foamed plastic at flexible pipe connections on chilled and/or cold water lines. No insulation on other flexible pipe connections. 3. Provide removable/reusable insulation covers on 4" and larger valves, unions, flanges, pump casings, strainers and similar fittings or equipment requiring periodic service.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4

PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700

F. Protective Covering: Install continuous protective PVC or metal covering on all piping and fittings in mechanical rooms, accessible tunnels, attic spaces, accessible ceilings, etc., where insulation may be subject to damage. Install with rivets or cement seams and joints.

G. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and without staples on cold water lines. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall or apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide pipe, pipe fittings, piping specialties, pumps and related items required for complete piping system.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 22 0500, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: ASTM, and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable.

B. Labeling: All piping shall be continuously and legibly labeled on each length as required by codes and standards and including as a minimum, country of origin, manufacturer’s identification marking, wall thickness designation, and applicable standards and approvals. Fittings shall be labeled as required by the referenced standard. Tubular fixture traps shall be stamped with manufacturer’s mark and material thickness.

C. Potable Water Valves: Potable water piping materials not limited to faucets, mixing valves, or pressure reducing valves. Valves shall meet NSF Standard 61, Section 9, for drinking water faucets and shall be brass construction. Brass components which contact water within the faucet shall be from brass which contains no more than 3 percent lead by dry weight.

D. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building unless approved by Code or Governing Authorities.

E. Definitions: Where piping fluid is not indicated in the following paragraphs, provide similar piping materials for similar fluids (i.e., "make-up water" = "domestic water"; "wet stand pipe" = "fire sprinkler pipe"; "drainage piping" = "sanitary/storm sewer piping").

F. Plumbing System Disinfection shall be performed by an experienced, qualified, chemical treatment agency. Mt. Hood Chemical, Chemcoa, or approved alternate.

1.03 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data for each product specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: a. Domestic water

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

b. Priming lines 2. Pipe: ASTM B88. a. Above Ground Domestic Water: Type L hard temper copper with soldered joints. b. Underground Domestic Water and Priming Lines: Type L soft annealed with no joints or type K hard tempered copper with silver soldered joints. 3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder-joint fittings, ANSI B16.22.

B. Cast Iron DWV Pipe: 1. Application: 1-1/2”" and larger. a. Sanitary waste b. Plumbing vent c. Rain drain 2. Pipe: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, CISPI 301-05/ASTM A 888-05. 3. Fittings: Hubless cast iron fittings: CISPI 301-05/ASTM A 888-05. 4. Couplings: a. Light Duty: Standard couplings meeting CISPI 310. b. Medium Duty: No-hub couplings meeting CISPI 310 and incorporating ASTM C 564 gasket, type 304 SS corrugated shield and type 304 SS clamping bands. Two clamping bands on 1-1/2” thru 4” pipe and four bands on 6” thru 10” pipe. c. Heavy Duty: No-hub couplings meeting ASTM C 1540, and FM 1680. ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket, type 304 SS corrugated shield and type 304 SS clamping bands. Four bands on 1-1/2” thru 4” pipe and 6 bands on 5” thru 10” pipe. d. Couplings to Dissimilar Pipe in Concealed Locations: Fernco "LowFlex" or approved substitute. 5. Manufacturers: Cast iron pipe and fittings – AB&I, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or approved. All pipe shall be labeled by the manufacturer.

C. Plastic Pipe – Drain, Waste, Vent (DWV): 1. Application: Three-story or less structures and where allowed by Code only. a. Sanitary waste (below grade only) b. Plumbing vent c. Rain drain (below grade only) 2. Pipe: a. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) (ASTM D3965) plastic drain, waste and vent piping (ASTM F628) and fittings (ASTM D2661) (DWV). b. Poly(vinyl chloride) (ASTM D1784) (PVC) plastic drain, waste and vent pipe (ASTM D2665 and D1785) and fittings (ASTM D2665) (DWV). 3. Fittings: Provide fittings of the type indicated, matching piping manufacture. Where not otherwise indicated, provide socket style, solvent weld fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by the piping manufacturer.

D. Cast Iron Pressure Pipe: 1. Application: 4" and larger. a. Water b. Pressure sewer 2. Pipe: Ductile iron coated outside with bitumastic enamel, ANSI A21.51. 3. Fittings: Gray or ductile iron bolted stuffing box mechanical joint or rubber ring joints, ANSI A21.1. Rubber gaskets, lubricants, bolts, and nuts, ANSI A21.11.

E. Plastic Pipe: 1. Application: Below ground water, 4" and larger, 5' outside the building line. 2. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings, Class 200, AWWA C900. 3. Fittings: Provide fittings of the type indicated, matching piping manufacturer. Where not otherwise indicated, provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by the piping manufacturer.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

F. Plastic Pipe: 1. Application: Where approved by Code. a. Cooling coil condensate drain 2. Pipe: a. Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe for Water Service: SDR-PR pipe, ASTM D2241; Schedules 40, 80 and 120, ASTM D1785. 3. Fittings: Provide fittings of the type indicated, matching piping manufacturer. Where not otherwise indicated, provide socket style, solvent weld fittings produced and recommended by the piping manufacturer for the service indicated.

G. Plastic Pipe: 1. Application: Where approved by Code. a. Domestic water b. Distilled and deionized water 2. Pipe: a. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX-a) tubing for Water Service: ASTM F877; SDR 9. NSF-pw and NSF 61. 3. Fittings: Cold expansion (ASTM F1960) style fittings of the type indicated, matching piping manufacturer. Where not otherwise indicated, provide fittings produced and recommended by the piping manufacturer for the service indicated.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS

A. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Provide standard products recommended by the manufacturer for use in the service indicated, and which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and reduce corrosion. Victaulic "Clear Flow."

B. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. 2. Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris "Bridgit" approved. 3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS. 4. Flux: Water soluble paste flux. 5. Brazing filler rod: BCuP rod to suit conditions.

C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges. Pressure and temperature rating required for the service indicated.

D. Sleeve Seal: Rubber-link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link-Seal. For fire rated wall, floor or ceiling penetrations, 3-M "CP-25" caulk, "No. 303" putty and/or "PSS 7904" sealing system.

E. Strainers: "Y-pattern," iron or bronze body rated for pressures indicated with blow-off connection and 20 mesh stainless steel screen.

F. Tracer Wire: 14 gauge, single strand, copper wire with blue insulation for water, green for sanitary and storm sewers, and yellow for gas. 3M "DBY" direct bury splice kit required at all splices.

2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, Watts, Josam, Mifab, or approved substitute. 2. Types: a. Tile Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4053-U with square heavy-duty nickel bronze top, bronze plug, and vandalproof screws. Adjustable top where cast into floor slab.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

b. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023-U-X with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top, bronze plug, carpet clamping device, and vandalproof screws. Adjustable top where cast into floor slab. c. Concrete Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023 with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top. Adjustable top where cast into floor slab. d. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4472-U, bronze ferrule with raised head bronze plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws. e. Outside Area Walks and Drives: Smith 4253-U-G with galvanized cast iron body, top secured with vandalproof screws, and bronze plug. Install in 18” x 18” x 6” deep concrete pad flush with grade.

B. Drains: 1. Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Josam, Watts, Wade and Mifab. Numbers scheduled on drawings represent minimum acceptable standard for locations involved. 2. Cast iron construction with acid resistant coating, anchor flange, and other options as indicated by model number. PVC drains where specifically noted. 3. Install 4 pound sheet lead flashing, extending not less than 10" from and clamped to all drains not completely cast-in-place in a homogeneous material.

C. Flashing: Minimum 4# sheet lead; to extend horizontally 10” from edge of vent penetrations or rain drain body and vertically 12” minimum up from roof turned over and down into hub of vent or finished with bronze cap providing counterflashing for screwed pipe.

D. Shock Arrester: Precharged bellows or sealed piston type manufactured to meet PDI WH-201 and ASSE 1010 Standards. Size in accordance with PDI procedures. J. R. Smith, PPP, Sioux Chief, Wade, Zurn, Watts, Josam, or approved substitute.

E. Priming Valves: Smith 2699, Josam 88250, Wade W8800T, Zurn Z1022, Watts MS810 or equivalent Precision Plumbing, Mifab. Locate in closets, under counters or in walls behind access panels as specified in Section 22 0500. Use copper specified previously for all underground priming lines.

F. Traps: Except chrome plated fixture traps. Recessed drainage pattern for threaded pipe and same grade as pipe for cast iron and plastic pipe; with cleanout plugs in trap body in all above grade locations.

G. Pressure Reducing Valve: Single seat type with renewable stainless steel seat and valve. Size and capacity as shown on Drawings. Bronze bodies with screwed connections on valves 2-1/2” and smaller and flanged steel bodies on valves 3” and larger. Install each PRV with strainer on inlet or internal strainer. Leslie, Watts, Cash-Acme, Zurn-Wilkins, or approved substitute.

H. Backflow Preventer: Where indicated on the Drawings, install a reduced pressure backflow preventer complete with strainer on inlet, shutoff valves, two separate check valves, differential relief valve, and test cocks. USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control, State Health Officials, and serving utility approved. Bronze bodies on units 2” and smaller, and cast iron bodies with bronze trim on units 2-1/2” and larger.

I. Backflow Preventer: Where indicated on the Drawings, install a double check backflow preventer complete with strainer on inlet, shutoff valves, two separate check valves, and test cocks. USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control, State Health Officials, and serving utility approved. Bronze bodies on units 2” and smaller, and cast iron bodies with bronze trim on units 2-1/2” and larger.

K. Domestic Water Balancing Valve: Griswold domestic constant flow regulator.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

L. Building Shut Off Valve Box: 10” round concrete enclosure with cast iron traffic weight cover. Brooks 3RT or approved substitute.

M. Downspout boot: DB-1: Neenah R-4926 cast iron downspout boot. Provide cleanout at boot.

2.04 PUMPS

A. Domestic Hot Water Circulator: Bronze body, bronze fitted, in-line circulator with sleeve bearing. Bell & Gossett or equivalent Grundfos, Thrush, Taco, or Armstrong.

2.05 BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Subbase Materials: A graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag.

B. Finely-Graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve.

C. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to the required densities, and complying with AASHTO designation M145, Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5. or A-3.

D. Drain Field Fill Material: Washed and uniformly graded gravel crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing a 1-1/2" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.

E. Stabilization Fabric: Nonwoven stabilization and drainage fabric. Mirafi 140S or 140M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices and plumbing code standards. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings.

B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. Install piping plumb and level except where pitched for drainage. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid (concrete or CMU) partitions.

C. Piping: Install for services as specified in Part 2. The following are special requirements: 1. Underground Drainage Pipe: Install cast iron soil pipe for the following conditions. When specified in Part 2 of this Section and where allowed by Code, plastic piping may be installed in lieu of cast iron piping. a. Under the building to 5' outside the building structure. b. 5' each way from a potable water line crossing. c. First section (minimum 5') from any connection to underground structures such as catch basins, manholes, disposal well or tank, etc. d. Through all fill areas where pipe cannot be rested on undisturbed earth. e. Where the top of the pipe is less than 12 inches below finish grade. f. At contractor's option in lieu of concrete or clay sewer pipe.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

2. Acid Waste Piping: Install acid resisting piping and corresponding fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use acid resisting fittings in connecting to standard waste lines. Install acid vent-thru-roof separately per Code. Install steel sleeves at all fire-rated wall penetrations as approved. 3. Demineralized, Deionized and/or Distilled Water Piping: GSR polypropylene piping with "Fuseal" joints or Nalgene polyethylene piping with "polyfusion" joints. Piping and joints installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install steel sleeves at all fire rated wall penetrations as approved. 4. Existing Domestic Water Piping: Copper piping as specified in Part 2 except where existing domestic water piping to be connected to is galvanized steel, new galvanized steel piping for short branches and rough-ins may be installed.

D. Tracer Wire: Install tracer wire as close to underground non-metallic water, sanitary and storm sewers and gas pipe in the trench as possible. Tracer wire shall be accessible at grade via all services, valve and meter boxes, curb cocks, cleanouts at the building, manholes (inside the cover near the top), etc. Locate all points on the record as-installed drawings. Splice into utility tracer system where available. Comply with code requirements.

3.02 PIPING JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material.

B. Cast Iron "No-Hub": All joints in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) Designation No. 310-97 "Installation Procedures for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings For Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications.” Horizontal runs of 5” and greater shall be braced as indicated in Figure 4 for “rodding” restraints. Application of couplings as follows: 1. Light Duty Couplings: All vent piping and all drainage and waste piping above grade and serving the uppermost floor of the structure. 2. Medium Duty Couplings: All aboveground waste and drainage piping unless indicated otherwise. 3. Heavy Duty Couplings: a. All underground installations. b. All rain drain leader joints located more than 20 feet below the roof drain. c. Above all patient critical care areas, operating rooms, delivery rooms, nurseries, and food storage, preparation, and serving areas in health care facilities.

C. Ferrous Threaded Piping: Thread pipe in accordance with ASME B1.20.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave no more than three threads exposed.

D. Solder Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: In accordance ANSI B 828 with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. "T-Drill" field formed tees may be utilized where the main is at least two pipe sizes larger than the branch.

E. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gasket.

G. Concrete Sewer Pipe Joints: Comply with applicable provisions of "Concrete Pipe Field Manual" by the American Concrete Pipe Assoc.

H. Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with applicable industry standards: 1. Heat Joining of Thermoplastic Pipe: ASTM D-2657. 2. Making Solvent-Cemented Joints: ASTM D-2865 and ASTM F-402.

I. Glass Pipe Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

J. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Visually inspect the assembled joint to ensure proper gasket seating.

K. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing unions or fittings. Install in a manner which will prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion where the "joining of ferrous and non-ferrous piping" is indicated.

L. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces.

M. Line Grades: 1. Drainage Lines: Run at maximum possible grade and in no case less than 1/4" per foot within building. 2. Vents: Pitch for drainage 1/4" per 10'. 3. Water: Pitch to low points and install hose bib drains. 3' minimum depth of ground cover for all lines outside building unless otherwise noted.

N. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good installation practice.

O. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment.

3.03 CLEANOUTS

A. Where required by code, at each change of sewer direction 45 degrees or greater and more than 10’ long, at end of each branch or main and spaced not greater than 100’ apart, as required by code and/or as shown on Drawings.

3.04 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT

A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces.

B. Strainers: Install in a manner to permit access for cleaning and screen removal and with blow- off valve.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

C. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Use steel pipe sleeves through beams, footings, girders or columns and for all penetrations of walls or floors below grade. Where floor finish is ceramic tile, terrazzo, or similar material extend standard steel pipe sleeves 1-1/2" above finished floor. Fabricate sleeves 1" diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non-structural penetrations only.

D. Sleeve Caulking: Caulk below grade pipe with rubber link seal. Grout above grade pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Utilize rubber sealing links in lieu of caulking. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and/or system at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors and ceiling.

E. Shock Arrestors: Install at end of mains, in a battery of three or more flush valve-operated fixtures water header, ahead of quick closing and solenoid operated valves. Size per PDI recommendations where size is not indicated. Provide access panels.

F. Trap Priming: Traps serving floor drains, floor sinks, catch basins, and similar fixtures shall be primed in accordance with Code requirements.

3.05 EXCAVATING

A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, to minimize the total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling. Comply with all applicable Federal and state safety regulations and local erosion control requirements.

B. Width: Excavate for piping with 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of pipe, except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other work. Excavate for other work to provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances.

C. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand-excavate the bottom cut to accurate elevations. Support the following work on undisturbed soil at the bottom of the excavations: 1. Piping of 5" and less pipe/tube size. 2. Cast-in-place concrete.

D. Depth for Subbase Support: For large piping (6" pipe size and larger), tanks and where indicated for other mechanical work, excavate for installation of subbase material in the depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, 6" below bottom of work to be supported.

E. Depth for Exterior Piping: Excavate for exterior water-bearing piping (water and drainage) so that the top of piping will not be less than 3' vertical distance below finished grade.

F. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where unsatisfactory soil condition at the bottom of excavation exists, excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil-bearing condition. Backfill with subbase material, compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth.

G. Rock and Boulder Removal: Refer to Division 1 for procedure on additional work, including additional excavating and backfilling, rock removal, etc.

H. Protection of Trees: Excavate near large trees (within the drip line) by hand, and protect the root system from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1" diameter and larger with asphaltic tree paint.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

I. Excavated Materials: Store excavated material (temporarily) near the excavation, in a manner which will not interfere with or damage the excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within the drip line). Retain excavated material which complies with the requirements for backfill material. Dispose of excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material.

3.06 BASE PREPARATION

A. Subbase Installation: Where indicated, install subbase material to receive mechanical work, and compact by tamping to form a firm base for the work. For 4" and larger piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks and similar work, shape the subbase to fit the bottom 90 degrees of the cylinder, for uniform continuous support. Provide finely-graded subbase material for wrapped, coated and plastic pipe and tank. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavation with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged connections, valves and similar enlargements in the piping systems and set bottom of trench at proper pitch and correct elevations with subbase material.

B. Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 2'-6" below surface of roadway, provide 4" base slab of concrete to support piping. After piping is installed and tested, provide 4" thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before backfilling. Provide Class 2500 concrete for encasement and slab.

C. Previous Excavations: Where piping crosses over an area more than 5' wide which has been previously excavated to a greater depth than required for the piping installation, provide suitable subsidence-proof support for the piping. Comply with the details shown, or where not otherwise shown, provide the following support system: 1. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in a width equal to the pipe diameter plus 2'. Install 8" courses of subbase material, each compacted to 95% of maximum density, as required to fill excavation and support piping.

3.07 BACKFILLING

A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted wherever testing is indicated. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to a uniform firm density. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6" above wrapped, coated and plastic piping and tanks, and to center line of other tanks (where recommended by tank manufacturer, use "pea gravel" backfill). Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. Do not backfill with frozen materials.

3.08 CLEANING

A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary.

B Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping System: 1. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete and clean. 2. Open all drains and fixtures valves in the building starting with the valve nearest the water service line and permit the water to run clear for 10 minutes to eliminate grease, cuttings, flux, and foreign matter. 3. Inject disinfectant at beginning of water system to be disinfected. Introduce free chlorine in liquid form, throughout system to obtain concentration required by local Public Health Department regulations or 50 to 80 mg/L residual. 5. Bleed water from all potable water outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. 6. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. 7. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

8. Flush disinfectant from system until residual is equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. 9. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. If any sample fails the analysis, repeat the procedure. 10. Include a copy of the bacteriological analysis in the Operating and Maintenance manuals.

C. Sanitary and Storm Drainage System: 1. Remove construction debris from cleanouts, drains, strainers, baskets, traps, etc., and leave same accessible and operable. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted piping at the end of the day or whenever work stops. 2. Before final acceptance of completed sewer system, flush and clean the entire system with water. Trap and remove solid material obtained from flushing and cleaning from the new system. Do not allow debris to enter the existing sewer system.

D. Deionized Water Piping: Remove all foreign material from piping and flush with clean water. Sanitize and clean in accordance with procedure recommended by deionized water equipment manufacturer. After system is ready to be operated, test water purity and certify that water quality is within allowable limits.

3.09 TEST

A. General: 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

B. Repair: 1. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop-leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

C. Sewer: Furnish all facilities and personnel for conducting the test. Test in accordance with the requirements of the State Plumbing Inspector and local authorities.

D. Plumbing Waste and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by filling to highest point, but not less than 10' water column on major horizontal portion.

E. Water Piping: Hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig without loss for four hours.

F. Tanks and Equipment: Hydrostatic pressure to 1.5 times operating pressure but do not exceed maximum rated pressure.

G. Deionized (PVDF) Piping: 1. Test Medium: Water only. No compressed air or gases. 2. Initial Low Pressure Test: Maximum 50 psig for four hours with no loss.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 11

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 22 1000

3. High Pressure Test: Maximum of 150 percent of the system operating pressure or the piping/fitting pressure ratings, whichever is lower. Test a minimum of 12 hours at the above pressure. Observe safety precautions indicated by the manufacturer. 4. Repair of Leaks: Re-fuse leaky joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Replace defective sections of piping.

3.10 SUPERVISION AND START-UP

A. Adjust flush valves, pressure reducing valves, mixing valves, water heater thermostats, and similar equipment.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 11 of 11

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 3000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the plumbing equipment.

B. Provide plumbing equipment specified and shown on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 22 0500, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Code: Comply with requirements of the Oregon State Plumbing Specialty Code.

B. All equipment and component parts shall conform to governing codes. Gas-fired equipment shall be design certified by AGA.

C. Labeling: All equipment shall have permanent labels affixed by the manufacturer listing model number, capacity, efficiency, approvals, and similar characteristics of the product.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING

A. Piping, fittings, pumps, and related items are specified in Section 22 1000.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 UTILITY SERVICE

A. Plumbing Utility Connections: Complete installation. Verify rough in dimensions of equipment prior to installing piping.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

A. All equipment shall be installed plumb and level unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Arrange piping connections to equipment to allow removal and replacement of the equipment without disassembly of connecting piping. Provide valves, unions, flanges, etc. at connection points.

C. Arrange equipment for adequate service access as recommended by the manufacturer and as required by code.

D. Anchor equipment to resist displacement due to seismic events as detailed on the drawings, recommended by the manufacturer, and as required by code and as specified in other sections of these specifications. Provide seismic straps as specified above for tank type water heaters.

E. Install drain pans under all water heaters as specified in Section 22 0500.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 3000

3.03 EQUIPMENT CLEANING

A. Remove construction and shipping protection and thoroughly clean all plumbing equipment just prior to building acceptance.

3.04 SUPERVISION AND START-UP

A. Do not place equipment onto operation until required work of other trades is complete, e.g. venting systems, combustion air ducts, etc.

B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for start-up and adjustment of equipment.

C. The installation, start-up, and adjustment of the water heater shall be performed by an authorized agent of the manufacturer. The manufacturer's agent shall check out and approve the installation and shall also approve and be responsible for adjusting the operating and control system and instructing the Owner's representatives on the system operation.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the plumbing system.

B. Provide fixtures specified and shown on the Drawings.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Code: Comply with requirements of the Oregon State Plumbing Specialty Code.

B. Fixture Color: White unless indicated otherwise.

C. Utility Connections: Make utility and equipment connections and install distribution piping as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Verify size, location, depth, elevation and arrangement of connection points before bidding or starting work.

D. In addition, meet the following: 1. Comply with lead free (less than or equal to 0.25 percent) products in drinking water systems. 2. NSF 61 Appendix 'G' Compliant. 3. ISO 9001 Certified. 4. IAPMO Low Lead Certification 5. California Standard AB 1953

E. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 22 0500.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 22 00 00 and Division 1, General Requirements. B. In addition, provide: 1. Faucets: Provide five year extended warranty. 2. Flush Valves: Provide three year extended warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING

A. Piping, fittings, supports and related items as specified in related Sections 22 0500, 22 1000, and 22 0700.

2.02 SITE WORK MATERIALS

A. Precast concrete vaults of size required and indicated on the Drawings complete with access suitable for the installation and with suitable inspection plates.

2.03 INTERIOR PLUMBING MATERIALS

A. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, Ancon, or accepted substitute. 2. Types:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 5

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000

a. Tile Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4053-U with square heavy-duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronze plug, and vandalproof screws. b. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023-U-X with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronze plug, carpet clamping device and vandalproof screws. c. Concrete Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023 with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top. d. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4472-U, bronze ferrule with raised head bronze plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws. e. Outside Area Walks and Drives: Smith 4253-U-G with galvanized cast iron body, top secured with vandalproof screws, taper thread and bronze plug. Install in 18" x 18" x 6" deep concrete pad flush with grade.

B. Flashing: Minimum 4# sheet lead; to extend horizontally 10" from edge of vent penetrations or rain drain body and vertically 12" minimum up from roof turned over and down into hub of vent or finished with bronze cap providing counterflashing for screwed pipe.

C. Air Chambers and Shock Arrester: Precharged bellows or sealed piston type manufactured to meet PDI WH-201 and ASSE 1010 Standards. Size in accordance with PDI procedures. Jay R. Smith, PPP, Wade, Zurn, Ancon, or accepted substitute.

D. Priming Valves: Smith 2699, Wade W8800T, Zurn Z1022, Ancon MS810 or equivalent Precision Plumbing. Locate in closets, under counters or in walls behind Milcor or access panels as specified in Section 22 0500. Use copper specified in Section 22 1000, Pipe & Pipe Fittings, for all underground priming lines.

E. Traps: Except chrome plated fixture traps. Recessed drainage pattern for threaded pipe and same grade as pipe for cast iron pipe; with cleanout plugs in trap body in all above grade locations.

F. Domestic Hot Water Circulator: Bronze body, bronze fitted, in-line circulator with sleeve bearing. Bell and Gossett or equivalent Grundfos, Thrush, Taco or Armstrong.

G. Single Fixture Tempering Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve. Watts MMV. ASSE 1016 listed. Bronze/brass construction with stainless steel disc and springs, copper thermostat.

H. Pressure Reducing Valve: Single seat type with renewable stainless steel seat and valve. Size and capacity as shown on Drawings. Bronze bodies with screwed connections on valves 2-1/2" and smaller and flanged steel bodies on valves 3" and larger. Install each PRV with strainer on inlet or internal strainer. Leslie, Spence, Fisher, Watts, Foster, Cash-Acme, or accepted substitute.

I. Backflow Preventer: Where indicated on the Drawings, install a reduced pressure backflow preventer complete with shutoff valves, two separate check valves, differential relief valve and test cocks. USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control, State Health Officials and serving utilities approved. Bronze bodies on units 2" and smaller, and cast iron bodies with bronze trim on units 2-1/2" and larger.

K. Domestic Water Balancing Valve: Balancing fitting with differential pressure taps, brass or bronze body and trim. B&G "Circuit Setter" or equivalent Taco, Armstrong, Thrush, Wheatley, Flow Design or accepted substitute.

L. Thermometers: Mercury-in-glass, adjustable stem, separable sockets, plus 40 to 240 degrees F range (unless indicated otherwise) thermometers. Weiss numbers are listed. Equivalent Marshalltown, Taylor, Trerice, Wekler or accepted substitute. 1. Wide case (9") in equipment rooms and all major equipment items. Weiss "9VS" series. 2. Narrow case (7") in all other locations. Weiss "7VS" series.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 5

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000

2.04 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Fixture Trim

1. Stops: Furnish stop valves for all fixtures. Loose key style, in wall, angle or straight through pattern to fit installation. Kohler, Speedway, Chicago, Eastman, Brasskraft, or accepted substitute.

2. Lavatory Grid Strainer: McGuire 155A.

3. Sink Grid Strainer: McQuire 152N.

4. Trim barrier-free wrap for p-traps and supplies by McGuire, Pro-Wrap, Brocar or True-bro.

B. Fixture Traps: Exposed fixture tailpieces, traps, and wastes shall be chrome plated 17 gauge seamless brass tube with cast brass nuts and deep or box style escutcheons as required to conceal rough piping. Products to be stamped with manufacturer’s name and material gauge. McGuire, Keeney, Zurn, or approved.

1. Sink: McGuire 8912-C-DF. 2. Lavatory: McGuire 890-2-C-DF.

C. Provide compliant fixture piping protector kit on all exposed accessible fixture traps and water supplies. White anti-microbial molded PVC. IPS Truebro “Lav Guard 2”, McGuire “ProWrap”, Plumberex “Pro-extreme”, or approved substitute.

D. Lavatory, Vitreous China: 1. Faucet: Chrome plated brass body with ADA Single Handle operation, unless otherwise noted, vandal resistant 0.5 gpm low flow, lead free aerator Omni A-400 with grid strainer waste. Chicago 2200-4ABCP, or approved Delta Commercial or American Standard. 2. “LV-1”: Wall Hung, 22" x 18" Size, 4 “centers, ADA approved: Kohler K2035 or approve American Standard. Provide with concealed arm hangers and wall backing plate (J.R. Smith 700, or Zurn Z-1231).

E. Water Closet: 1.28 Gallon per Flush Water Closet, Vitreous China. Kohler K4405 or American Standard 3461.128, floor set, top spud, 1.28 GPF flush valve, bolt caps. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 111-1.28-SG. 1. Install each listed water closet with the following: a. Seat: Solid white reinforced plastic, heavy duty commercial grade, seat with molded in bumpers; open front less cover for elongated bowl with check and self-sustaining hinge. Bemis 2155SSC-000.

2. Floor Mount bottom outlet, elongated bowl . Provide with neoprene gasket at connection from fixture to carrier inlet. a. For back-to-back toilet installations: Use only a 45° double wye fitting.

F. Stainless Steel Sinks: Type 302 18 gauge with "U" channel mounting systems, self-rimming stainless steel sink (unless noted otherwise), top mount, fully undercoated, drawn bowl with satin finish. Just numbers are listed; Elkay or Kohler is approved. Install with stainless steel crumb cup strainer outlet or grid strainer (as noted), flange tail piece, and 1-1/2” trap. For faucets, besides the listed model, Moen, American Standard are allowed. Sinks shall be punched for faucet specified. Coordinate number of holes required. Cock hole covers are not allowed. Provide with tail piece as required for dishwasher or AC condensate drain per drawings.

MARK LOCATION DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 5

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000

S-1 EXAM SINGLE, 17X16 3 HOLE PUNCH SL-1617-A- ADA /NSF GR COMPLIANT FAUCET, SINGLE CHICAGO 2200-4ABCP LEVEL 4" WITH OMNI CENTERS, 1.5 A-400 OULET GPM, FIXED STRAINER. S-2 DENTAL SAME AS S-1 HANDWASH FAUCET: SEE S-1 S-3 LOUNGE, STAFF EXISTING RELOCATE BREAK

S-4 DENTAL UNIT BY OTHERS

H. Drains: 1. Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Wade and Ancon. Numbers scheduled on drawings represent minimum acceptable standard for locations involved. 2. Install 4 pound sheet lead flashing, extending not less than 10" from and clamped to all drains not completely cast-in-place in a homogeneous material.

3. Finished Area Floor Drain: Zurn series Z/S-415-6B-P-IC(NH), or JR Smith 2005-Y-A06-NB- P six (6)-inch diameter stainless steel strainer top, trap primer. 4. Unfinished Area or Mechanical Room Floor Drain, Zurn series Z-520-DG-P-Y-IC(NH), or JR Smith 3220-M-P-B nine (9)-inch diameter adjustable ductile iron grate with sediment bucket,trap primer.

I. Fixtures Furnished by Owner (and/or Under Another Section): Some fixtures will be furnished by the Owner (and/or under another specification section). Include under this section the required rough-ins, 3/8" chrome plated supplies with stops, 1-1/2" chrome plated cast brass "P" trap (or, on kitchen sinks, 2" cast iron "P" traps) for each sink compartment, and make final connection. Verify all rough-ins and connection requirements before commencing work.

K. Emergency Eyewash, "EW-1": Barrier-Free, deck mounted, auto-flow, with 90 degrees swing- down eye-wash for installation behind sink. Chrome plated brass supply arm, eyewash heads with dust covers, internal pressure compensating stream flow-controller internal filter, in-line strainer and emergency fixture sign. For ADA compliance unit must be installed with 27” knee clearance under counter and a maximum height of 34 inches. Guardian GBF1849, Haws, Bradley, Chicago, Speakman, Encon, and Stingray approved.

L. Anti-Contamination Interior Hose Bibb: Arrowhead, brass, Series 251 BFP: Zurn Series Z-1320- PB, encased, non-freeze, anti-siphon, automatic draining; stainless steel box (bronze finish).

M. WH-1 (Non Freeze) Anti-Contamination Wall Hydrant: Zurn Z1320-4, exposed, non-freeze,anti- siphon, automatic draining; chrome (bronze finish).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING

A. Install in accordance with Section 22 0500, 22 1000, 22 0700, and 22 3000.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 5

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000

B. Shock Arrestors and Air Chambers: Install at end of mains, in a battery of three or more flush valve-operated fixtures water header, ahead of quick closing and solenoid operated valves. Size per PDI recommendations where size is not indicated. Provide access panels.

C. Trap Priming: Traps serving floor drains, floor sinks, catch basins, and similar fixtures shall be primed in accordance with Code requirements.

3.02 CLEANOUTS

A. Where required by code, at each change of sewer direction 45 degrees or greater and more than 10' long, at end of each branch or main and spaced not greater than 100' apart, as required by code and/or as shown on Drawings.

3.03 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

A. All exposed fixture connections and piping shall be plated with polished chrome. Where chair carriers or special carrier design are not indicated, provide 3/16" thick by 6" wide steel to waste or vent piping and to available building construction.

B. All fixtures in contact with finished walls shall be caulked with waterproof, white, non-hardening sealant which will not crack, shrink or change color with age.

C. All fixtures and component parts shall conform to governing codes.

3.04 FIXTURE CLEANING

A. Remove construction protection, tags and labels and thoroughly clean all plumbing equipment and trim and scour all fixtures just prior to building acceptance.

3.05 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

A. Analyze the water condition and determine chemicals required for treatment. Provide sufficient chemicals for the initial fill and provide a list of the chemicals required for the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified. The list shall include probable quantities of each chemical required for one year, availability of each chemical and the name and address of the supplier.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 5

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the HVAC work specified in this Division.

B. The requirements of this Section apply to the HVAC systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 23 sections.

C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes.

D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Central heating and cooling equipment. 2. Complete piping systems including insulation, valves, supports, etc. 3. Air handling equipment including packaged equipment and exhaust fans. 4. Air distribution systems including ductwork, terminal units, dampers, insulation, and air inlets and outlets. 5. HVAC control system. 6. Special systems as specified herein.

E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the label of a recognized testing laboratory such as UL or CSA.

B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Federal Specifications (FS) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Factory Mutual (FM) 7. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments 8. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local Amendments 9. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 12. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments 13. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) 14. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

15. American Gas Association (AGA) 16. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner.

E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed.

F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both.

G. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions.

H. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment’s UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered.

1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification.

1.04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions.

B. Plumbing piping systems and fixtures and fire suppression piping systems are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid.

D. All sections of Division 23 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 23. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (SUBMITTALS)

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section.

B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period.

C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used.

D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method.

E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified.

F. Include field wiring diagrams and connection diagrams for all control and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans.

G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to provide quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor’s responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data.

H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time.

1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION

A. Materials other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted.

1.07 CHANGE ORDERS

A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Project Record (As-Installed) Drawings: 1. Maintain a set of record drawings on the job site as directed in Division 1 . 2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping dimensioned from permanent building features. b. Locations of all valves with assigned tag numbers. c. Locations of all fire dampers and other airflow control devices. d. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information. e. Model numbers of installed equipment. 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the form of reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Computer-aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project record drawings. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda, and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor’s expense.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: The mechanical contractor shall submit five (5) sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions to the building owner. The information shall be bound in three-ring, vinyl or canvas covered; loose-leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab markers for each classification of equipment or data. Comply with provisions of Division one where applicable to the mechanical work. Provide CD with all documents in electronic format. The manual shall include the following: 1. Equipment capacity (input and output) and required maintenance actions. 2. HVAC system control maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams, schematics, and control sequence descriptions. The desired or field-determined set points shall be permanently recorded on control drawings, at control devices or, for digital control systems, in programing comments. 3. Manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams, and parts lists and vendors for all serviceable items of equipment. Provide any performance curves, data, and model numbers from submittals. 4. Valve charts. 5. Balancing data; duct and piping pressure test reports. 6. Equipment startup records, and any additional equipment added by change order. 7. A complete written narrative of how each system is intended to operate.

C. Instruction Manual: Submit separate Instruction Manual 30 days prior to scheduling the required Instruction Period. Include the following: 1. Description of each system and operational sequences. 2. Seasonal system adjustments. 3. Description and normal settings for time clocks, thermostats, fan and other motor switches, etc. 4. Normal valve settings. 5. Emergency measures upon system failure. 6. Cross reference information furnished by manufacturer in the Operating and Maintenance Manual above.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice.

B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5% to plus 10% as approved in each case.

B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel-burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project.

C. Efficiency: Heating and cooling equipment shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2001 and the State Energy Code. Where equipment efficiencies are indicated, the use of alternate or substitute manufacturer’s equipment with lower efficiencies is not permitted.

D. Storage and Handling: 1. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Handling: Avoid damage. 3. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.

2.02 MOTORS

A. General: Motors shall conform to UL, CSA, and NEMA MG-1 and bear a permanently attached nameplate indicating compliance and motor characteristics. Provide motors meeting UL 507 standard where applicable.

B. Manufacturers: General Electric, Lincoln, Baldor, Wagner, Westinghouse or accepted substitute. Where selection of motor manufacturer is within Contractor's control (independent of equipment selection), provide motors produced by a single manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

C. Temperature Rating: Class B insulation, except where otherwise indicated or required for service indicated.

D. Starting Capability: As required for service indicated, but not less than 5 starts per hour.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

E. Phases and Current: 1/3 horsepower and smaller capacitor-start, capacitor-run single-phase; 1/2 horsepower and larger, squirrel-cage induction polyphase. Coordinate with actual current characteristics; specified in Division 16 and use no 230/460 voltage motors on 208 voltage power or vice versa.

F. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase; 1.25 for single-phase.

G. Construction: General purpose, continuous duty; NEMA design "B," except "C" for high starting torque applications.

H. Frames: For single phase motor sizes NEMA No. 48, except 56 for heavy-duty applications. NEMA "T" frames for 1 horsepower and larger polyphase motors. Special frame types as required for close coupled pumps and similar applications.

I. Bearings: Ball or roller, and design for thrust where applicable; double shielded and regreasable, except provide permanently sealed where not accessible for greasing. Sleeve-type bearings permitted only where indicated for fractional (1/6 hp or less) horsepower motors with direct drive loads. Minimum L-10 bearing life of 40,000 hours when used with minimum pitch sheaves per NEMA Table 14-1.

J. Enclosure Type: Unless otherwise indicated, open drip-proof for normal concealed indoor use, guarded where exposed to employees or occupants. Type II for outdoor use, except weather- protected Type I where adequately housed.

K. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal with internal sensing device for stopping motor, and for signaling where indicated on single phase motors.

L. Speed: Not faster than synchronous speeds of 1,800 RPM except on some pumps as approved in each case.

M. Efficiency: The manufacturer's highest (premium) efficiency motors tested under procedures recommended by NEMA MG-1 (IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B). Intermittent duty motors, operating less than 6 hours per day, shall comply with EPAct standards. Submit manufacturer's data if motor nameplate does not indicate minimum efficiency. Nominal full load efficiencies for 460 volt, 1,800 rpm motors: HP Efficiency % 1-1/2 87.5 2 87.5 3 88.5 5 89.5 7-1/2 91.5 10 91.5 15 93.0 20 93.5 25 and larger 94.0

N. Inverter Duty Motors: Where motors are controlled by an adjustable frequency drive, provide motors labeled “Inverter Duty,” complying with NEMA MG1-31, and meeting the requirements of the adjustable frequency drive manufacturer.

2.03 STARTERS AND SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: General Electric, ITE, Allen Bradley, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, Cerus Industrial or accepted substitute. Provide starters by same manufacturer throughout project.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

B. General: Provide each motor with starter or switch as approved and recommended by manufacturer of motor or equipment of which motor is a part.

C. Starter Characteristics: Type I general purpose enclosure with padlock ears and supports for mounting as indicated. Starter type and size as recommended by motor manufacturer. Use no starter smaller than NEMA Size 1.

D. Manual Switches: Provide on motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller except where automatic control or interlock is indicated. Include pilot light. Provide overload protection where not protected by internal motor overload protection.

E. Magnetic Starters: Provide for 1/2 horsepower and larger motors, and for smaller motors on automatic control or with interlock switch. Full voltage, across the line, single speed, non- reversing except where otherwise required. Include power on and running pilot lights, on-off- auto selector switch, external reset button, overload relay on each phase, and devices for coordination with control system (including fused transformer for control circuit). Provide automatic ambient temperature compensation for starter heaters.

2.04 GUARDS

A. Provide guards in accordance with State Safety Code and OSHA requirements over all rotating equipment including belts, shafts and couplings. Drive guards over belts and sheaves shall include 2-1/2" diameter access opening at shaft ends for speed counter.

2.05 DRIVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dayton, Gates, Browning.

B. General: "V" section belt drives, multiple as required, sized on 1.5 times installed motor horsepower. Provide variable pitch motor sheaves on all one or two belt drives and standard slide rails or approved means of adjustment for each motor with belt drive. Use standard section belts and no sheave smaller than cataloged industry standard; provide countersunk center on shaft ends to receive speed counter tip.

2.06 SOLID-STATE, VARIABLE-SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. General: Controllers listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of a standard NEMA Design B 3-phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency of controller. Designed and rated by the manufacturer for the type of load (e.g., fans, blowers, and pumps) used and also approved by the manufacturer for the type of connection used between the motor and load (direct connection or power transmission connection).

B. Input Line Reactors: 3% for reduction of harmonics.

C. Output Line Reactors: Specially designed and constructed for IGBT controllers and designed to protect motor from voltage spikes over 150% of the bus voltage. Required where controller to motor cable length exceeds 50 feet. Provide dV/dT filters for 460 volt motors with extreme cable lengths.

D. In lieu of providing line reactors, the drive manufacturers may submit a power system analysis demonstrating compliance with IEEE 519.

E. Ratings: 1. Output Ratings: 3-phase, 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout the voltage range. 2. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque, or as indicated.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

3. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Ambient Temperature: 0° C to 40° C. 5. Efficiency: 95 percent minimum features shall at full load, 60 Hz.

F. Isolated Control Interface: Allow the controller to follow one of the following over an 11:1 speed range: 1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 milliamperes at 24 V. 2. Pneumatic Signal: 3 to 15 psig.

G. Internal Adjustability: Provide the following internal adjustment capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum RPM. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum RPM. 3. Acceleration: 2 to 22 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 2 to 22 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 50 to 110 percent of maximum rating.

H. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. 2. Snubber networks to protect against malfunction due to system voltage transients. 3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA class 10 performance. 4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination. 5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip. 6. Loss of Phase Protection. 7. Reverse Phase Protection. 8. Under- and Over-Voltage Trips. 9. Overtemperature Trip. 10. Short Circuit Protection.

I. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after controller fault or on return of power to the system following an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Provide for restarting during deceleration without damage to the controller, motor, or load.

J. Operation and Maintenance Features: Include: 1. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators to indicate power on, run, overvoltage, line fault, overcurrent, and external fault. 2. Elapsed Time Meter. 3. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer. 4. Current-Voltage-Frequency Indicating Devices: Mount meters or digital readout device and selector switch flush in controller door and connect to indicate controller output. 5. Auxiliary Motor Contactors: Electrically interlocked. One contactor connected between the controller output and the motor, controlled by the controller regulator, and one between the bypass power line and the motor, providing across-the-line starting capability in the bypass mode. Provide motor overload protection under both modes of operation with control logic that allows common start-stop capability in either mode.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc. 2. Allen-Bradley Co. 3. Furnas Electric Co. 4. General Electric Co. 5. Graham 6. Reliance Electric Co.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

7. Square D Co. 8. Westinghouse Electric Corp. 9. Cerus Industrial

2.07 ACCESS PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Inryco/Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. Inryco/Milcor Style DW, K, or M panels as required by construction.

B. Construction: Flush style, fire rated in fire rated partitions and ceilings. Screwdriver latches on all access panels.

2.08 EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS

A. Flexible Expansion/Seismic Loop: Factory fabricated assembly consisting of two 90 degree elbows, two lengths of flexible hose, and a 180 degree return bend to allow free movement in three axis. Return bend shall include attachment point for support and a drain/vent fitting. Hose shall be corrugated metal style with metal overbraid. Connections to match piping system except connection 2” and larger shall be flanged style. Metraflex “Metraloop.”

2.09 METERS AND GAUGES

A. General: Install meters and gauges where shown on the plans or specified elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Pressure-Temperature Test Plugs: 1. ¼” or ½” NPT fitting of solid brass capable of receiving either an 1/8” OD pressure or temperature probe and rated for zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig. Neoprene valve core for temperatures to 200 deg. F., Nordel to 350 deg. F. 2. Provide for each test plug a pressure gauge adapter with 1/16” or 1/8” OD pressure probe. 3. Furnish a test kit containing one 2-1/2” dial pressure test gauge of suitable range, one gauge adapter with 1/16” or 1/8” OD probe and two 5” stem pocket test thermometers – one 0 to 220 degrees F and one 50 to 550 degrees F. Turn the kit over to the Architect. 4. Cisco “P/T Plugs,” Peterson “Pete’s Plug” or approved substitute.

C. Thermometers: Liquid-in-glass, adjustable stem, separable sockets, plus 40 to 240 degrees F range (unless indicated otherwise). Weiss numbers are listed. Equivalent Taylor, Trerice, Weksler or approved substitute. 1. Wide case (9”) in equipment rooms and all major equipment items. Weiss “9VS” series. 2. Narrow case (7”) in all other locations. Weiss “7VS” series.

D. Pressure Gauges: Install on suction and discharge of all pumps and where shown on Drawings. Provide +/- 0.5% accuracy ASME B40.100 grade 2A non-filled, 4-1/2” dial, 0-100 psig graduation pressure gauges , acrylic window, with Ashcroft No. 1106 pulsation dampers and stop cocks. Weiss UGE-1 or equivalent Ashcroft, Marsh, Trerice, Weksler.

2.10 VALVES

A. General: Provide factory fabricated valves of the type, body material, temperature and pressure class, and service indicated. Bronze gate, globe and check valves shall comply with MSS-SP- 80. Ball valves shall comply with MSS-SP-110. Iron gate and globe valves shall comply with MSS-SP-70. Iron check valves shall comply with MSS-SP-71. Butterfly valves shall comply with MSS-SP-67. Valve size same as connecting pipe size.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milwaukee, Crane, Grinnell, Nibco, Hammond, Stockham, Legend, Watts, and Walworth. Grooved end valves Victaulic, Tyco-Grinnell, Gruvlock, or accepted substitute. NIBCO numbers are given except as noted. Where possible, provide valves from a single manufacturer.

C. Valve Styles: See individual Division 23 sections for valve styles.

D. Butterfly Valve Operators: Locking lever for shut-off service; “Memory Stop” for lever handle with 10-position throttling plate for throttling service; gear operator with babbitt sprocket rim for chain-operated valves and gear operators on all 8” or larger valves.

E. Butterfly Valve Style: Lug-type with cap screws for all valves utilized for equipment isolation for servicing. Lug and grooved style valves shall be capable for use as isolation valves and recommended by manufacturer for dead-end service at full system pressure.

F. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation.

G. Mechanical Actuators: Provide mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, where valves 4" and larger are mounted more than 7' above the floor, and where manual operation is difficult because of valve size, pressure differential or other operating conditions. Drop chains to 6'-6" above the floor.

H. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Select and install valves with ends matching the types of pipe/tube connections.

2.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, inserts, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size. The Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry Practice SP-58 and SP-69 are referenced in this section.

B. Manufacturers: B-Line, Carpenter & Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Tolco, Erico, or accepted substitute. Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturers as noted).

C. Corrosion Protection: Provide materials which are zinc plated or factory painted to prevent corrosion. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, plastic coated, or by other recognized industry methods.

D. Seismic and Wind Requirements: 1. Provide seismic restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613 and ASCE 7.05 Chapter 13. Provide wind restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1609 and ASCE 7 Chapter 26 to 30.

E. Design restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems," Second Edition, 1998, SMACNA, or “A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint” ASHRAE RP-812, 1999. 1. Site Class: D 2. Building Category or Risk Category: IV 3. Component Importance Factor: 1.0 4. Component Amplification Factor (Ap): Per ASCE 7-10 5. Component Response Modification Factor (Rp): Per ASCE 7-10

F. Wind-Restraint Loading:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

1. Basic Wind Speed: 115 mph, Exposure C. 2. Wind Importance Factor, I=1.15 3. Building Classification Category: IV. 4. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

G. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260). 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97), fabricated from steel. 3. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4 (Fig. 212, 216). 5. Double-Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. 6. Adjustable Saddle-Support: MSS Type 36 (Fig. 258) and MSS Type 37 (Fig. 259), including saddle, pipe and reducer. Fabricate base-support from steel pipe and include cast-iron flange or welded-steel plate. 7. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems, single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut" channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Super Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut.

H. Vertical Pipe Clamps: 1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8 (Fig. 261). 2. Four-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt-holes.

I. Hanger Attachment: 1. Hanger Rod: Rolled threads, zinc plated. Right hand threaded. 2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13 (Fig. 230). 3. Weldless Eye-Nut: MSS Type 17 (Fig. 290). 4. Malleable Eye-Socket: MSS Type 16 (Fig. 110R). 5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299).

J. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 (Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power-Strut PS349 continuous channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut, Super Strut. 2. Clamps: MSS Type 19 (Fig. 285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig. 225, 226, 131), Type 23 (Fig. 86, 87, 88), Type 25 (Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable.

2.12 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. Pipe Markers: 1. Adhesive pipe markers of width, letter size and background color conforming to ANSI A13.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 with arrow banding tape or similar Seaton, Zeston, MSI.

B. Duct Markers: 1. Adhesive duct markers 2¼”x14” with black text indicating contents on white background with directional flow arrow. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 or similar Seaton, Zeston, MSI.

C. Nameplates: 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16" thick, laminated 2-ply plastic, bottom ply white, outer ply black, letters formed by exposing bottom ply. 2. Size: 2" by 4" nameplates with 1/4" high letters.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 11 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

D. Valve Tags: 1. 2" diameter, 18-gauge polished brass tags with 3/16" chain hole and 1/4" high stamped, black-filled service designation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seaton, Brady, MSI.

2.13 CONCRETE FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. Classes and Applications: Provide strength classes with the following cement content and water/cement ratios for the indicated applications and similar required applications: 1. 4000 psi Class: 565 pounds cement/yard (6.0 sacks); 0.57 water/cement ratio. Provide 4000 Class for tanks, vaults, beam-type foundations and similar structures. 2. 3000 psi Class: 500 pounds cement/yard (5.25 sacks); 0.68 water/cement ratio. Provide 3000 Class for miscellaneous underground structural concrete, reinforced encasement, block type foundations (with smallest dimension at least 0.2 times largest dimension), curbs, pads, inertia blocks (unframed type), and similar structural support work. 3. 2500 psi Class: 450 pounds cement/yard (4.75 sacks); 0.75 water/cement ratio. Provide 2500 Class for plain encasement, thrust blocks, filling steel-framed units, and similar work. 4. Rough Grouting Class: 565 pounds cement/yard (6.0 sacks): 0.75 water-cement ratio; adjust aggregate sizes to facilitate placement. Use for rough grouting, not for setting equipment bases. 5. Backfill Class (Lean Concrete): 375 pounds cement/yard (4.0 sacks); 0.87 water/cement ratio. Use for backfiring where excavations are extended below point of support for mechanical work.

2.14 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

A. Through-penetration fire stopping system tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3M, Metacaulk, SpecSeal, or approved.

B. Select system for proper application based on wall construction, type of penetrating item, wall rating, etc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION

A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work.

B. Utility Locations: The location of existing utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation.

C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast-in-Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast-in-place work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule.

D. Coordination: 1. The drawings are based on equipment of a certain manufacturer and may be identified as such. Where alternate manufacturers or approved substitutes are incorporated into the work, any required design changes are the responsibility of the contractor. Such changes may include changes in utility or system connection sizes, location, or orientation, service clearances, structural support or acoustic considerations.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 12 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

2. Where the work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare accurate scale shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. 3. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 4. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist.

E. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work.

3.02 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING

A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings.

B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment.

C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system.

D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others.

3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with Code requirements.

B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless indicated otherwise, conceal all piping. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings.

C. Drip Pans: Locate pan immediately below piping and equipment, and extend a minimum of 6" on each side and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment being protected. Fabricate pans 2" deep, of reinforced 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with watertight seams and rolled or hemmed edges. Provide 3/4" drainage piping, properly discharged to over floor drain or as shown on the Drawings. Comply with Mechanical Code for overflow protection and pipe sizing.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 13 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

D. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, dielectric unions, valves and items requiring service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through.

E. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, temperature controls, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture.

F. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by piping, hangers, conduits, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations.

G. Concrete Work: Coordinate with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories. Comply with applicable provisions for mechanical work concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, mix design, materials (use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 3 work where possible), admixtures, accessories, (including waterstops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittals and other requirements of the concrete work.

H. Housekeeping Pads: Construct minimum 3” thick with chamfered edges using 3000 psi concrete. Provide #4 reinforcing bars 8” on center in each direction and within 4” of each edge, centered in pad thickness. Provide ½” dowel with 3” embedment into floor slab for each 2 square feet of pad area. Dowels and equipment anchor bolts shall be spaced a minimum of 6” from pad edges.

3.04 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and isolation of equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping, and where shown on the drawings. Install valves at low points in piping systems that must be drained for service or freeze protection. 2. Locate valves in accessible spaces (or behind access panels) and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane.

B. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation.

C. Valve Access: Provide access panels to all valves installed behind walls, in furring or otherwise inaccessible.

D. Lubricant-Seal: Select and install plug valves with lubricant-seal except where frequent usage is indicated or can be reasonably expected to occur.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 14 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods. 3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only.

B. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install specified seismic restraints to restrict excessive movement. 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed on all insulated pipe and tubing. c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type. e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields (MSS type 39) at each hanger.

C. Pipe Support: Piping shall be supported at distances specified in this section or in accordance with MSS SP-69.

D. See Section 23 1000 “Facility Fuel Gas System” section for gas piping support spacing requirements. 1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height (maximum 10' as required by Code) and just below roof line. 2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: Steel Copper 1" and smaller 7' span 6' span 1-1/2" and smaller pipe 9' span 8’ span 2" pipe 10' span 8’ span 2-1/2" pipe 11’ span 9’ span 3” & larger 12’ span 10’span 3. Polyvinyl Chloride, Polypropylene and Other Plastic Pipe: Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod diameters as follows: a. Continuous support 1/2" to 4" pipe size Fee & Mason No. 109 channels with Fee & Mason No. 108 hanger. Lay pipe directly into the channel with fittings or couplings placed in spaces between channel sections. Secure piping to the channel at intervals between hangers with a few turns of vinyl electrical tape.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 15 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

b. Non-Continuous Support: Provide maximum hanger spacing as listed herein or shorter if required by manufacturer for temperatures and pipe schedule. 1) PVC; PP & CPVC (1-1/4 inch and larger): 4 foot span. 2) PP & CPVC (1 inch and smaller): 32 inches span. 3) PB pipe or tubing: 32 inches span and 4 foot vertical spacing support c. Arrange supports to allow free movement, but restrict upward movement of lateral runs so as not to create reverse grade on drainage pipe. Use double bolt clamp or band hanger with restraint (Tolco fig. 25). 4. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc. to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 5. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: Pipe and Tube Size Rod Size Inches mm Inches mm 1/2” to 3” 12.7 to 76.2 3/8” 9.5 4” to 6” 101.6-152.4 1/2” 12.7 8” 203.2 5/8” 15.9

E. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations.

F. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable.

G. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights.

H. Installation of drilled-in concrete anchors shall comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for working load, depth of embedment, and spacing between anchors and from the edge of the slab. Use only wedge-style anchors.

I. Seismic Restraints: Install restraints where recommended in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual" and as required by code. Show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613 and reference ASCE standard. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). Acceptable Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, Mason Industries, Tolco, or approved.

3.06 HVAC SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as shown/scheduled/specified. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced" signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping. Locate pipe labels in accessible areas as follows: 1. Near each valve, meter, gauge, or control device. 2. Near equipment such as pumps, heat exchangers, water heaters, etc. 3. At piping branch connections. 4. At penetrations (each side) of walls, ceilings, and floors. 5. At access panels and doors. 6. At 25 foot maximum intervals. Provide a minimum of one label above each room where lift- out ceiling is installed. Reduce intervals in congested areas such as mechanical rooms.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 16 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

B. Valve Identification: Tag all valves with brass disc and chain. Prepare valve charts indicating valve number, size, location, function and normal position. Use no duplicate numbers in Plumbing and Heating systems. Mount glazed frames containing one set of valve charts in the building mechanical room.

C. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment such as heat exchangers, pumps, etc. Identify equipment in field same as on drawings. Permanently mount in an appropriate and effective location.

D. Operation Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed to convey the message; example: "DO NOT CLOSE THIS VALVE EXCEPT WHEN THE PUMP IS OFF."

3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide complete connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental piping, fittings, trim and labor necessary for a finished working installation.

B. Verify the rough-in and finish requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring HVAC piping or duct connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final completion, thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean-up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade.

3.09 PIPE PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the product’s UL listing. Below are the minimum installation requirements. 1. Install specified penetrating item(s) with required annular spacing in proper size wall or floor opening. Support penetrating item(s) adequately on both sides of construction. 2. Clean all opening and penetrating item surfaces in penetration area to remove loose debris, dirt, oil, wax, grease, old caulking, etc. 3. If needed or required for gypsum or concrete block walls, install specified galvanized steel wire mesh or sleeve recessed and centered inside wall around penetrating item(s) so that it is snug against perimeter of opening. 4. When required, install specified type and depth of backing material in annular space, recessed to required fill depth of fire stopping caulking. 5. Gun, trowel, and/or pump fire stopping sealant to specified depth in annular space around penetrating item(s). Trowel sealant surfaces flush with wall or floor surfaces to a smooth, defect-free finish. Where required, apply specified size caulking bead around penetrating item(s) at zero annular contact areas and tool smooth.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 17 of 18

COMMON HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500

3.10 MECHANICAL PAINTING

A. Minimum Requirements: All mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc., exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other locations except mechanical equipment rooms will be painted under Section 09 9000.

B. Painting Materials: Materials shall comply with Section 09 9000, Painting and shall be compatible with the material to be painted.

C. Uninsulated Piping: Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping located buried in ground, in concrete or masonry one (1) coat acid-resisting black paint. Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping exposed to weather one (1) coat black asphaltum varnish.

D. Iron Work: Paint hangers, rods, anchors, guides, threads of galvanized pipe, bases, supports, uncoated sheet metal and other iron work without factory finish, exposed to weather, one coat acid-resisting black paint. Apply one (1) coat Dixon's Aluminum Graphite No. 209 paint over the (1) coat primer as recommended by paint manufacturer to all hot metal surfaces.

E. Piping in Mechanical Room: All insulated and uninsulated piping exposed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be painted. Painting is not required for cast iron, plastic, or glass waste piping, or for stainless steel piping, PEX tubing and soft copper tubing. Contractor shall submit proposed colors for approval. In lieu of painting, insulated piping may be covered with colored PVC insulation jacketing as specified in Section 23 0700, HVAC Insulation.

F. Insulated Piping and Other Insulated Surfaces: Paint insulated piping in half-round, split tile, or other inaccessible locations, one (1) coat asphalt emulsion.

3.11 HVAC WORK CLOSEOUT

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of leaks, obstructions, or contamination.

B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings as previously specified in this Section.

C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work.

D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of the HVAC equipment and systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 18 of 18

MECHANICAL SOUND & VIBRATION CONTROL 23 0548

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the vibration isolation for mechanical equipment specified elsewhere.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Isolator Engineering: Selected and furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Select isolators for 98% efficiency unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Manufacturer: Provide field installed isolation required from a single manufacturer where possible.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data sheets on all vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

B. Provide itemized list showing the items of equipment or piping to be isolated, isolator type and model number selected, isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specified drawings showing frame and construction.

C. Provide manufacturer's drawings showing equipment frame construction for each item including dimensions, structural member sizes and support locations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, Mason Industries, Vibrex, Vibro-Acoustics.

B. Manufacturer Model Numbers: Amber/Booth figure numbers are listed unless indicated otherwise.

2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Types of Isolators: 1. Open Spring: Series S. 2. Housed Spring: Type CT. 3. Hanger with Spring and Rubber Stop: Type BSR. 4. Rubber-in-Shear: Types RV and RVD. 5. Seismic Restraints: Mason Z-1011.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 4

MECHANICAL SOUND & VIBRATION CONTROL 23 0548

6. Hanger with Spring and Rubber Stop: Combination neoprene element and spring hangers – Hangers shall consist of a steel frame containing a neoprene isolation element at the top and a coil steel spring seated in a neoprene cup on the bottom. Both the element and the cup shall be molded with a neoprene bushing that passes through the steel frame. The neoprene element shall be capable of an average deflection of 0.35”. The steel springs shall be capable of a minimum static deflection of 0.75” with a minimum additional travel to solid of ½”. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the box and short circuiting the spring. Hangers shall be factory precompressed 60% of the total deflection determined by the assigned load per hanger. Hangers shall be manufactured with provision for bolting or attaching to ceiling flat iron straps, rods or steel runners. Hangers shall be of a fail-safe design. Amber / Booth BSRA. 7. Neoprene Pads: Neoprene pads shall be of waffle or ribbed design, 1/4” – 3/8” thick. They shall be installed as a single layer or in multiple layers with 16 gauge steel shims cemented between so that the combination of stiffness and total neoprene thickness achieves the static deflection listed in the vibration isolation schedule in conjunction with a distributed load area that will maintain 10-50 psi. If the equipment support location does not completely cover the pads or does not consist of flat steel footing, an additional full coverage, load distribution plate of minimum 3/8 steel shall be placed between the pad and attached to the equipment support. There shall be no rigid structure between top and bottom of mount. Amber / Booth Type NR Ampad.

B. Spring Selection: Free standing, stable type with a one-to-one ratio on springs with deflections in excess of one inch. Provide with rails where indicated.

C. Noise and Vibration Barrier Hanger: For ductwork and piping where indicated. Target Enterprises Inc. "ARH-1" or accepted substitute.

D. Seismic and Start-Up Restraints: Select all isolators to withstand seismic loads equivalent two times the isolator load rating applied from any direction. Mason Industries type Z-1011 on all isolated equipment not utilizing isolators with integral restraints.

E. Flexible Pipe Connectors - Type SS: All stainless steel hose and braid with carbon steel connections. Male thread ends on flexible connectors 2" and smaller, and flanged connections on 1-1/2" and larger connectors.

F. Ductwork Flexible Connections: 1. Typical connections shall be made of 30 ounce woven glass fiber, coated with neoprene, sewn together at the edges and joints. 2. The flexible connections shall be approximately 6” long and held in place with 1” wide bands of 12 gauge galvanized steel bolted to duct and to outlets and inlets of the units and fans with 1/8” stove bolts, 5” o.c. 3. It is the intent that these flexible connections shall withstand the operating air pressure, shall not permit air leakage and shall not transmit vibration.

G. Neoprene Mounts: Neoprene mounts shall be one piece, neoprene molded assemblies with a minimum loaded static deflection of 0.25”. The mount shall incorporate both rubber-in-shear and compression load characteristics. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered. The mount shall have friction pads both top and bottom. Bolt holes shall also be provided for both surfaces. The top bolt hole shall be threaded. There shall be no rigid structure between top and bottom supports. Amber / Booth Type RV.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 4

MECHANICAL SOUND & VIBRATION CONTROL 23 0548

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install vibration isolators and flexible connectors as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Duct Flexible Connections: Install flexible duct connections on all externally spring isolated air handling units including roof mounted units down through roof curbs (and/or to unit side duct connections). Fan connections, both at inlet and discharge, shall be made with flexible materials so as to prevent the transfer of vibration from fans to ductwork connected thereto.

C. Flexible Pipe Connections: 1. Provide flexible connections on all piping to spring isolated equipment, where indicated on Drawings and for all coils mounted in spring isolated air handling units or plenums. Coils in rigid units and plenums do not require flexible connectors. Provide a flexible connection in both the supply and return connections to the coil as near the coil as possible. 2. Install connectors in a straight line as recommended by the manufacturer without offsets or twists and support pipe without any load on flexible connectors. Minimum live length shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Minimum Live Length 1" through 1-1/2" 8" 2" through 2-1/2" 10" 3" through 4" 12" Over 4" 18"

D. Anchorage: Anchor all isolators to the floor, wall or ceiling structure and anchor points reinforced where necessary. Anchor bolts, cap screws, etc., shall not be continuous through the isolator such that vibrations are transmitted to the structure.

E. Adjustment: Adjustable during and after installation, to ensure sufficient clearance between vibration isolation element and rigid restraining device. Do not install isolators until they have been loaded and adjusted to achieve the specified static deflection and clearances.

F. Housekeeping Pads: Construct minimum 3” thick with chamfered edges using 3000 psi concrete. Provide #4 reinforcing bars 8” on center in each direction and within 4” of each edge, centered in pad thickness. Provide ½” dowel with 3” embedment into floor slab for each 2 square feet of pad area. Dowels and equipment anchor bolts shall be spaced a minimum of 6” from pad edges.

3.02 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINTS

A. All equipment, duct and piping supports and restraints shall meet the requirements of the Washington Building Code based on the site specific Seismic Design Criteria listed on the Structural Code sheet and M6.01.

B. All equipment shall be anchored to resist displacement including sliding, swinging, and overturning due to seismic forces. Friction due to equipment weight shall not be considered as anchorage.

B. Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing seismic restraint design for all required equipment weighing 400 lbs. Design shall show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with the Washington Building Code.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 4

MECHANICAL SOUND & VIBRATION CONTROL 23 0548

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 4

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: After completion of the work of installation, owner is responsible for procuring an air balancing and testing agency to test and regulate all components of the new heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems to verify air volumes and heating-cooling flow rates indicated on the Drawings. Provide TAB report to T.I. mechanical engineer for review. This specification section is provided for reference only.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

C. Balancing Organization: 1. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Performed by a firm providing this service established in the State of Oregon. 2. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services. 3. Balancing Organization: Subject to compliance with these specifications, the following organizations may submit qualifications for approval Precision Test & Balance, Inc., Northwest Engineering Services, Air Balancing Specialties, Neudorfer Engineers, Air Introduction & Regulation, Accurate Balancing Agency or approved.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Agency shall be a current member of NEBB or AABC specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified with a minimum of 10 years documented experience.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed under direct field supervision of a Certified NEBB Supervisor or a Certified AABC Supervisor.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Balancing Data: Include the following minimum information in the Operation and Maintenance Data, as specified in Section 23 0500.

B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

1. Submit under provisions of Section 230500. 2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or other certifying agency prior to commencing system balance.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

6. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, NEBB forms, or forms containing information indicated in Schedules. 7. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. b. Address of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. c. Telephone number of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect and Owner. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project altitude. j. Report date.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting.

E. Provide a list of equipment, air supply, return and exhaust, heating water, and chilled water systems not in compliance with tolerances subsequently specified.

1.04 SEQUENCING

A. Prebalancing meeting shall be conducted 30 days prior to start of balancing.

B. Begin testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems after Construction Check/Start-up Plans are certified by the Commissioning Authority.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Test Instruments: Furnished by Contractor.

B. Plugs: Provide plastic plugs in test holes drilled in ductwork. Provide UV resistant plugs for equipment located outdoors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Pumps are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and +/- 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within +/- 10 percent of design.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within +/- 10 percent of design.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

3.4 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust noise distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.02” (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries.

M. For variable air volume system powered units, set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections are properly made and confirm proper operating for automatic variable air volume temperature control. Adjust drives to maximum airflow for highest static condition (maximum amps of motor). Allow VFD to regulate airflow per specification.

N. Space pressure Control, Return Fan Speed Endpoints AHU-1 to 3 & 5. For variable air volume system with terminal unit zoning, attain return fan speed control endpoints based on the following values for the given operating mode. Coordinate with the HVAC control contractor for system setup and provide values when determined.

Return Fan Speed Endpoint Values Supply Fan Desired Space Economizer Return Fan Mode Speed Hi/Lo Pressure Position Speed Reset Limits (InH2O) Full Heating (All TBD – Noted Ideal - 0.02 Min-Min (25% terminal units are Minimum during the full Acceptable of the minimum operating at Return Fan heating Test Range: ventilation heating flow Speed-TBD condition 0.01 – 0.03 requirement) setpoints) Min-Max Full Cooling (All TBD – Noted Ideal - 0.02 (100% of the Maximum terminal units are during the full Acceptable minimum Return Fan operating at cooling cooling Test Range: ventilation Speed-TBD flow setpoints) condition 0.01 – 0.03 requirement)

O. CO2 controller set points – minimum CO2 setpoint (ppm), maximum CO2 setpoint (ppm)(setting for min OSA at full occupancy).

P. Outside air intake damper settings at minimum CO2 and maximum CO 2 setpoint.

3.5 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. This includes domestic HVAC systems.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

G. Where automatic flow control valves are installed (Dynamic devices, not circuit setters) record listed flow rate of device based on field verification. Testing is not required.

H. Balancing contractor shall be trained on balancing procedures by certified representative of differential pressure control valves.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:

1. Plumbing pumps 2. HVAC pumps 3. Forced air furnaces 4. Air cooled water chillers 5. Packaged rooftop heating/cooling units 6. Air coils 7. Air handling units 8. Fans 9. Air filters 10. Air terminal units 11. Air inlets and outlets

B. Report:

1. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 2. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date

C. Electric Motors:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

1. Manufacturer 2. Model/frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave make/size/model

D. V-Belt Drives:

1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter, and RPM 4. Belt, size, and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and tested

E. Pumps:

1. Identification/number 2. Manufacturer 3. Size/model 4. Impeller 5. Service 6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 8. Discharge pressure 9. Suction pressure 10. Total operating head pressure 11. Shut off, discharge, and suction pressure 12. Shut off, total head pressure

F. Refrigerant Cooling Coils:

1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and tested 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and tested 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and tested 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and tested 10. Air pressure drop, design and tested 11. Saturated suction temperature, design and tested

G. Heating & Chilled Water Coils:

1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and tested 6. Water flow, design and tested

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

7. Water pressure drop, design and tested 8. Entering water temperature, design and tested 9. Leaving water temperature, design and tested 10. Entering air temperature, design and tested 11. Leaving air temperature, design and tested 12. Air pressure drop, design and tested

H. Air Moving Equipment:

1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and tested 7. Return air flow, specified and tested 8. Outside air flow, specified and tested 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and tested 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. Sheave make/size/bore 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM

I. Return Air/Outside Air:

1. Identification/location 2. Supply air flow, design and tested 3. Return air flow, design and tested 4. Outside air flow, design and tested 5. Return air temperature 6. Outside air temperature 7. Mixed air temperature, design and tested

J. Exhaust Fans:

1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and tested 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and tested 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM

K. Duct Traverses:

1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 8

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0590

7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor

L. Terminal Unit Data:

1. Manufacturer 2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct 3. Identification/number 4. Location 5. Model number 6. Size 7. Minimum static pressure 8. Minimum air flow, design and tested 9. Maximum air flow, design and tested 10. Inlet static pressure, design and tested

M. Air Distribution Tests:

1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test (final) velocity 9. Test (final) air flow 10. Percent of design air flow

3.7 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

A. Adjusting and Balancing:

1. Adjust and balance all portions of the mechanical systems to produce indicated results within limits of minus 5 or plus 10 percent or as subsequently directed by the Architect. 2. Balancing data may be spot checked with instruments similar to that used by the balancing firm. 3. If, in the judgment of the Architect, the discrepancies warrant additional adjustment, readjust and rebalance the systems at no additional project cost.

B. Duct Pressure Test: To be conducted and/or witnessed by balancer. .

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 8

HVAC INSULATION 23 0700

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of mechanical equipment specified elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with state energy code.

B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50 and containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant.

C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments.

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 23 0500, the following apply: 1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory- fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic. 2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Insulating Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens-Corning, Pittsburgh Corning, Pabco, Imcoa or Certain Teed. Johns Manville products are listed unless indicated otherwise.

B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Foster, 3M, Insul-Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong.

2.02 PIPING INSULATION

A. Interior and Exterior Piping Systems 50 to 850 Deg. F: Glass fiber preformed pipe insulation with a minimum K-value of 0.23 at 75 Deg. F, a minimum density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot within all-service vapor barrier jacket containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant, vinyl or pre-sized finish and pressure sensitive seal. Johns Manville "Micro-Lok."

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 6

HVAC INSULATION 23 0700

B. Exterior Installations: Same as for interior installations except 0.016" stainless steel.

C. Interior Piping Systems 32 to 50 Deg. F: Glass fiber preformed pipe insulation with a minimum K-value of 0.23 at 75 deg. F, a minimum density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot. Polymer vapor barrier jacket and containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant with pressure sensitive seal and wicking system to remove condensation from pipe surface. Owens Corning “VaporWick.”

D. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre-slit, self-sealing elastomeric pipe insulation up to 2-1/8" ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/hr. sq. ft./in. at 75 deg. F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms/inch. Apply in thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong "Armaflex 2000" or, in concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved.

E. Pipe Temperatures up to 1200 Deg. F: High temperature molded calcium silicate insulation with aluminum metal jacket. Furnish with aluminum snap straps. Apply in thickness required for a maximum surface temperature of 120 deg. F at 80 deg. F ambient and for the flow media temperatures. Johns Manville Thermo-12/Gold.

2.03 DUCT INSULATION

A. Interior Above Grade Ductwork: Glass fiber formaldehyde-free blanket with "FSK" facing containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant, k value = 0.31 at 75 deg. F, 0.2 perms, and UL 25/50 surface burning rating. Johns Manville "Microlite."

B. Exterior Above Grade Ductwork: Glass fiber board with “FSK” facing containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant, 3 pound density, k value of 0.23 at 75 deg. F and 0.2 perms. Install with 0.016" aluminum jacket. Secure with sealed fasteners on the bottom of the duct. Johns Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas.

2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Equipment Temperatures Below 70 Deg. F: Flexible, closed cell, elastomeric sheet insulation of 5.5 #/cubic feet density and 0.27 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Armstrong "Armaflex."

B. Equipment Temperatures From 70 to 450 Deg. F: Glass fiber 3 pound density insulation with a 0.23 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Johns Manville "814 Spin-Glas" with "FSK" jacket containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant, or finished as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Equipment Temperatures From 350 to 1200 Deg. F: Molded high temperature calcium silicate minimum 12.5 pound density and 0.4 thermal conductivity at 200 deg. F mean temperature. Glass cloth finish, Claremont Diplag or finished as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Exterior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Same as interior insulation with weatherproof metal or finished as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.05 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, staples, bands, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers, welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturers for the insulation and conditions specified except staples not permitted on chilled water lines.

B. Interior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Finished metal jacket or as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation material specified.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 6

HVAC INSULATION 23 0700

C. PVC Protective Jacketing and Valve and Pipe Fitting Covers: Johns Manville Zeston 2000, Proto LoSmoke, or Ceel-Co Ceel-Tite 100 Series with precut fitting fiberglass insulation or approved.

D. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster Drion 85-75 contact cement or approved substitute.

E. Saddles and Shields: Install to prevent crushing of insulation at support points. 1. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39. To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40. Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Preinsulated Pipe Supports: Calcium silicate load bearing metal jacketed inserts. Pipe Shields Inc. or accepted substitute. a. Pipe supported on rods - Models A1000, A2000, A3000, A4000. b. Pipe supported on flat surfaces - Models A1000, A2000, A3000, A4000. c. Pipe supported on pipe rolls - Models A3000, A4000, A5000. d. Vertical riser clamp – Models E1000, E1100, E1200.

4. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high- density, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

F. Removable/Reusable Insulation Covers: 1. 200 to 600 Deg. F Insulation Filler: Install 2-1/4# - 4#/cu. ft. glass fiber, 6# - 8#/ cu. ft. mineral wool or glass fiber/type E felted (9#/cu. ft.) flexible blankets and pads for large, irregular shaped equipment such as pump casings, bolting flanges, etc. For small common shapes such as valves, elbows, flanges, etc., install preformed flexible glass fiber pipe wrap, preformed glass fiber pipe covering or glass fiber/type E felted (9#/cu. ft.) insulation. 2. 600 - 1000 Deg. F Insulation Filler: Install 4# - 8#/cu. ft. refractory fiber felted, 8# - 10#/ cu. ft. mineral wool or glass fiber/type E felted (9#/cu. ft.) flexible blankets and pads. Install mineral wool pipe wrap, glass fiber/type E felted (9#/cu. ft.), laminated refractory fiber (4# - 6#/cu. ft.) with flexible glass fiber wrap or refractory (ceramic) fiber (6#/cu. ft.) preformed insulation. 3. Over 1000 Deg. F Insulation Filler: Install refractory (ceramic) fiber (6# - 8#/cu. ft.) blanket or pad insulation or 6#/cu. ft. preformed insulation. 4. Encasement, 200 to 600 Deg. F: Glass fiber cloth plain or silicon coated on both sides, knitted stainless steel mesh, glass fiber cloth laminate with aluminum, or stainless steel foil or hex wire mesh. 5. Encasement, 600 to 1000 Deg. F: Glass fiber cloth with stainless or monel wire insertion, knitted stainless steel mesh, ceramic cloth, or glass fiber cloth laminated with stainless steel foil. 6. Encasement, Over 1000 Deg. F: Refractory cloth with nickel or inconel wire insertion, knitted inconel mesh or ceramic cloth with nickel wire insertion. 7. Cold Encasement: Glass fiber cloth silicon coated both sides, knitted stainless steel mesh, glass fiber cloth laminate with aluminum or stainless steel foil or glass fiber cloth with nickel wire insertion, silicon coated both sides. 8. Stitching, 200 to 600 Deg. F: Glass fiber thread/PVC coated, staples - galvanized or stainless steel, galvanized or stainless steel hog rings, 0.010" - 0.15" dia/dead soft stainless steel wire. 9. Stitching, 600 Deg. F: Same as 200 to 600 Deg. F above except no galvanized staples or rings and PVC coated thread to 850 deg. F. 10. Attachments and Securements: a. Quilting: Stainless 2-hole washers, both sides with twisted 0.035" - 0.051" wire loops, 12 ga. stainless spindle/washer/ speed clip assembly or stainless 0.035" - 0.051" wire loops.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 6

HVAC INSULATION 23 0700

b. Lacing and Hooks: Stainless 2-hole 12 gage bent wire lacing hooks, stainless 2-hole dished washer assembly with twisted 0.035" - 0.051" wire loops, 12 gage stainless spindle washer with built-in hook and speed clip or stainless 1-hole dished and flat washer riveted through the cloth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING INSULATION

A. Heating Water Piping: Insulate with glass fiber pipe covering: Size Thickness 1/2" to 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 2" to 3" 2" 4" and larger 2-1/2"

B. Refrigerant Piping Insulation: Insulate suction piping with minimum 1/2" 1” thick foamed plastic or of thickness necessary to prevent condensation at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Where possible, slip insulation over the piping as it is installed. Seal all joint and seams. All exterior installation to be protected with aluminum protective cover.

C. Pipe Fittings: 1. Insulate and finish all fittings including valve bodies, bonnets, unions, flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent insulation jacket for continuous vapor barrier covering over all fittings. 2. Use 1/2" thick Armaflex or Aerotube foamed plastic at flexible pipe connections on chilled and/or cold water lines. No insulation on other flexible pipe connections. 3. Provide removable/reusable insulation covers on 4" and larger valves, unions, flanges, pump casings, strainers and similar fittings or equipment requiring periodic service.

D. Protective Covering: Install continuous protective PVC or metal covering on all piping and fittings in mechanical rooms, accessible tunnels, attic spaces, accessible ceilings, etc., where insulation may be subject to damage. Install with rivets or cement seams and joints.

E. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following. 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 or Type 40 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following. a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 and NPS 14 (DN200 and DN350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 and NPS 24 (DN400 and DN600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick. 4. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 6

HVAC INSULATION 23 0700

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

F. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall or apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Ductwork: Insulate the following: 1. All supply ductwork. 2. All supply and return ductwork in systems routed in unconditioned spaces or exposed to the outside conditions. 3. All outside air intake ducts. 4. All ductwork required to be insulated by code.

B. Insulation Thickness: Select board and blanket insulation of thickness required to provide the following installed R-value. 1. All heating or cooling system supply and return ducts located on the exterior of the insulated building envelope and all outside air intake ducts. a. R-8. 2. Ducts located within or below concrete slabs on grade, per code. 3. All heating and cooling system supply and return ducts located inside of building envelope, R-5 per code.

C. Fittings: Wire and duct adhesive as required. To prevent sagging on all rectangular or square ducts over 24" wide, install Gramweld or equal welding pins on the bottom. Maximum spacing 18" on center in both directions.

D. Installation: Applied with butt joints, all seams sealed with vapor seal mastic or taped with 2" wide vapor-proof, pressure-sensitive tape. Seal all penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive.

E. Internally Lined Ductwork: Where internally lined ductwork is indicated on the Drawings and/or specified, no exterior insulation is required. Select duct lining to provide the required R-value. Carefully lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of 6" past the interior insulation unless otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor barrier is required. Duct lining is specified in Section 23 30 00.

3.03 EQUIPMENT ROOM ITEMS

A. Items To Be Insulated: All equipment room items except the following: 1. Condensate receivers. 2. Cushion (expansion) tanks. 3. Breechings.

B. Materials: 1. 1-1/2" calcium silicate blocks applied with wire or bands as required. Finish with 1/2" thick smoothing coat of insulating cement and with glass cloth. 2. For equipment and piping systems operating below 350 deg. F., a 3 pound per cubic foot, 1-1/2" thick spun glass fiber blanket with organic binders and aluminum sheet metal exterior jacket may be substituted for the above insulation. 3. Install tank head finish per manufacturer's recommendations.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 6

HVAC INSULATION 23 0700

C. Manholes, Nameplates, Handholes, Cleanouts, Etc.: Do not insulate over manholes, ASME Code stamps, manufacturer's nameplates, handholes, cleanouts, etc. Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of the insulation. When surfaces are to operate below ambient saturation temperatures, provide removable sections of insulation to cover the above with vapor sealed edges. Provide appropriate tagging.

3.04 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Insulation: Insulate expansion joints on heating and/or cooling piping to match thickness of adjacent piping. Build up piping insulation adjacent to the expansion joints sufficiently to allow internal clearance within the insulation for the diameter of the expansion joint. Fasten one end of the expansion joint insulation securely and provide aluminum or sheet metal on the built-up insulation at the other end to permit movement of the insulation without damage.

B. Finish: Finish as specified for adjacent piping with fireproof covering.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 6

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. General: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 listed in index to Specifications apply to work under this Section.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

C. Requirements Include: 1. The existing Johnson Control System shall be modified to include control of the added and/or modified HVAC equipment for the new expansion clinic. 3. The new controls shall be completely integrated with the existing system to provide an Energy Management and Direct Digital Automatic Temperature Control System. 2. The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, material, equipment, programming, engineering, and services as required.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Mechanical Special Conditions, Electrical Special Conditions and Division - 1 Specification.

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. This section specifies cooperation of the Control Contractor (the combination of installer and programmer hence forth) with other trades and including balancing firm to assure proper arrangement of control items. Control valves, dampers, wiring, thermostat wells, and other control devices that are to be built into the field assembled ductwork, piping, or wiring systems shall be furnished by the Control Contractor and installed under other sections of the specification as directed by the Control Contractor and indicated in other portions of the specifications and drawings. 2. The Control Contractor shall insure that the DDC system communicates successfully with other equipment (e.g., air handling units, packaged rooftop units, heat pumps, motors, actuators, etc.). Note: the equipment supplier is responsible for the proper performance of their equipment (assuming the proper signal are sent/received from the BAS). The control Contractor is responsible for all system sensors, including those which are factory installed. 3. Electrical Wiring: All wiring required for work under this section of the specification shall be provided under this section of the specification unless otherwise specified. 4. Electrical wiring - power for control panels, control devices, and sensors a. Power for control units, control devices and sensors shall be coordinated with the air handling manufacturer for the project and/or the Owner. b. Contact locations in starter control circuits. All contacts controlling motor starters, including overload contacts, shall be located on the hot side of the coil (ungrounded control power leg). Coordinate this requirement with the air handling manufacturer for the project. c. Extend power to damper actuators. 1) Actuators will be powered at 24 VAC. 2) At each auxiliary panel location, furnish and install a 24 VAC transformer with 20 VA of capacity for each actuator installed and served from the panel. 3) Furnish and install a fused terminal in the +24 VAC lead and a disconnecting terminal in the neutral lead of the power cable to each actuator. 5. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: If necessary, The Controls Contractor shall operate the BAS to assist the TAB Contractor.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL – CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications, As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids for the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. Uniform Building Code (UBC), Oregon Structural Specialty Code 3. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 5. National Electric Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA) 6. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) 7. American Society Of Heating, Refrigeration, And Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 8. Instrument Society Of America (ISA) 9. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

B. Meet all of the local authorities and State Fire Marshal code requirements for normal operating and smoke mode functions.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide equipment from a single manufacturer where possible. Subcontract the control work to the local branch office or authorized local representative shall be the following temperature control manufacturers: a. Northwest Control Co.

B. Automatic Temperature Controls Subcontract: Contractor shall be qualified and certified by the control equipment manufacturer and shall provide all installation labor, operating software, calibration and adjustment labor, operator training, warranty and all other necessary material and labor to furnish a complete and operating system.

C. All products proposed for this contract shall have been in continuous and successful use for at least two (2) year (not including beta testing).

D. System shall use BACnet/IP on the internet side of the controller and shall use BACnet MS/TP at the building control network side. System shall utilize web based control and access.

E. Acceptable control system contractors and manufacturers: Control systems shall be BTL listed across the line of product controllers (BACnet advanced application controller B-AAC, BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) controllers and BACnet application specific controllers) B-ASC as defined by BACnet International testing standards.

F. For integrated control system option RTU manufacture representative and control contractor shall meet to coordinate control interface.

G. Do not exceed factory recommended usage/capacity of controllers.

H. Johnson Control System shall be Metasys. Graphics shall match the quality, type, and operability of the current graphics used by the building. All devices, controls, graphics, and programming shall be compatible with current OHSU standards. Metasys user interface shall be fully functional with all relationships and graphics built.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawing submittals are required for the following, in accordance with Section 23 05 00. The Contractor shall not start the project until the Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved. Shop drawings shall include: 1. All control drawings shall be provided in same format and be an extension of the existing 2015 Control Submittals provided for this building. Owner shall provide shop drawings files during submittal phase to Contractor. A standalone control document for just this chiller revision work will not be allowed. 2. All submittals should be provided on paper (with legible font type and size). 3. All drawings should be labeled TC (temperature control) rather than being referenced within the mechanical or electrical divisions. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered 4. One drawing per modified HVAC system. Drawing should include point descriptors (DI, DO, AI, AO), addressing, and point names. Each point names should be unique (within a system and between systems). For example, the point named for the mixed air temperature for AH#1, AH #2, and AH #3 should not be MAT but could be named AH #1 MAT, AH #2 MAT, and AH #3 MAT. The point names could be logical and consistent between systems and AHs. The abbreviation or short hand notation (e.g., MAT) should be clearly defined in writing by the Control Contractor. Naming standard will be decided on during meeting between Engineer, Control Contractor, and Owner. Convention shall match Phase I work. 5. Floor plans depicting revision to BAS control devices (control units, control devices, gateways, LAN interface devices, actuators, sensors, motor control centers, etc.) in relation to mechanical rooms, HVAC equipment, and building footprint. 6. DDC System Engineering diagram indicating revision to schematic location of all Control Units, workstations, LAN Interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each Control Unit. Indicate protocol, baud rate, and type of LAN (per Control Unit). 7. For each drawing, include a schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment, control devices, etc. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. Label each input and output with the appropriate range. 8. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor start, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel control point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are existing, factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. 9. Show all electric connections of the controls system to equipment furnished by others complete to terminal points identified with manufacturer’s terminal recommendations. 10. Control Contractor shall provide one complete drawing that shows the equipment (fan unit, boiler, chiller, etc.) manufacturers wiring diagram with the control Contractors wiring diagram superimposed on it. Supply hard copy. 11. Provide revision to sequence of operation based on sequence in these documents, as discussed with Engineer and Owner and as modified based on site conditions and normal programming protocol. Provide details such as levels controlled to and point designations. Simply copying the sequence from these documents is not sufficient. 12. Provide complete panel drawings for new panels or modified panels that are: a. Clearly labeled. b. Drawn to scale c. Show the internal and external component arrangement so that the operators can identify the components by their position if the labels come off d. Wiring access routes should also be identified so that Class 1 wiring is separated from Class 2 and 3 and so high voltage wiring is segregated from low voltage wiring and tubing. e. If existing panel is modified provide new drawings showing changes per above. 13. Complete identification of all control devices (manufacturer’s type, number, and function).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

14. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system’s functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for New Windows-based control software and any new controller in system, including unitary controllers. 15. A set of drawings showing the details of the valve and valve actuator installation for each valve, required for operation and maintenance manuals only. This should include: a. Action (normally open or closed) b. Manufacturer make and model c. Cv d. Close off rating e. Flow rate f. Actuator spring range g. Cavitation coefficient (where applicable) h. Special construction features 16. Damper schedule should include: a. Action (normally open or closed) b. Direct or reverse actuation c. Manufacturer make and model d. Design pressure drop at full flow e. Leakage rate f. Operating range g. Flow rate h. Actuator requirements i. Actuator spring range j. Special construction features (U.L. listed smoke damper, etc.)

B. Record Documents: 1. For any modification to the control system provide a complete set of control drawings with as-installed equipment and operating sequences on paper and in electronic format (AutoCAD). “As-built” (i.e., as-installed and debugged and after system acceptance) documentation shall include the following as minimum: a. All data specified in the shop drawings section in its final "as-built" form. b. Schematic outline of the overall control system for quick reference c. Adequate record of the work as installed, including exact location of control panels and the wiring route (using TC documents, Section 1.04 A). d. Blue prints shall include sequence of operation. e. System hardware specification data which provides a functional description of all hardware components. f. System engineering information which provides all of the information for the system set-up, definition and application. g. System database information that provides the point names and application data programmed into the system. h. All of the information, data, procedures and drawings shall be supplied in the form of manuals. 2. Provide as-installed (after system acceptance) control logic diagrams showing all points (real and virtual). 3. DDC systems that use line-based programming must reference line code number with control logic diagrams and/or with sequence of operation text. Control Contractor shall discuss final format with owner. 4. As required for new systems provide licensed electronic copies of all upgraded software for each workstation and laptop. This includes, but is not limited to: project graphic images, project database, trouble-shooting and debugging programs, project-specific application programming code and all other software required to operate and modify the programming code (including software at system level, primary control units, secondary control units, and all communication software). Any hardware devices (cables, protection devices) required to operate the software/hardware shall also be provided.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

5. The Control Contractor shall document deviations from the shop drawing submittals. Documentation should include what equipment was changed and the reason for the change. 6. Provide copy of final test reports.

C. Operating and Maintenance Materials: 1. Provide any new inserts to current O & M documents to provide information for new devices. 2. Provide Operation and maintenance data on new equipment requiring service or adjustment (prior to and after final acceptance). 3. Provide user guides and programming manuals for any new hardware and software. a. A reference manual shall be furnished and shall contain, as a minimum, an overview of the system, its organization, the concepts of networking and central site/field hardware relationships. It shall be a complete guide to operating all aspects of the software system, including activating the system, use of the mouse, description of all menus, establishing setpoints and schedules, downloading or uploading information to or from field hardware, generating or collecting trends, alarms and reports, backing up system software and data files and interface with third party software. b. Manuals for advanced programming (for each controller type and for all workstations) shall be provided. 4. Provide a Bill of Materials with each new or altered schematic drawing. List all devices/equipment and match to schematic and actual field labeling. Provide quantity, manufacturer, actual product ordering number, description, size, accuracy, operating ranges (voltage, temperature, pressure, etc.), input/output parameters, etc. 5. Field copies of wiring for new or altered Primary and Secondary Control Units. (Laminated and permanently affixed in or above controller). 6. For new equipment not manufactured by the Control Vendor, an alphabetical list of system components with the name, address and 24-hour telephone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first two years of operation shall be provided. 7. Operating and maintenance instructions for each new piece of equipment that includes: a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure. b. Start-up, operation, maintenance, disassembly and shutdown procedures. c. Maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. d. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions. e. Cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. f. Product data on each piece of equipment, including damper and valve information noted earlier. 8. Points list shall include all physical input/output and virtual points. Points list shall be provided in hard copy and shall include: a. Name b. Address c. Scanning frequency d. Engineering units e. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units f. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition g. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. h. Message and alarm reporting as specified. i. Identification of all adjustable points j. Description of all points 9. Control Logic documentation shall include: a. Drawings documenting control logic for new or revised aspects of the BAS including control units, controlled devices, sensors, etc. b. A detailed sequence of operation (see Part 6) should be submitted on separate sheets for each new or revised AH or HVAC system. The text description of the sequence of operation should include: 1) Logic control statement (i.e., describe control loop process)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

2) Setpoints and throttling ranges, deadbands, and differentials for temperature and pressure variables, gains, reset schedules, etc. 3) Limits/conditions and interlocks 4) Measured variables (e.g., mixed air temperature) 5) Variables to communicate to/from the network c. Control diagrams should identify 1) System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text) 2) All DO, DI, AO, AI points 3) Virtual points 4) All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop 5) Legend for graphical icons or symbols 6) Definition of variables or point names (e.g., OAT = outside air temperature) 7) Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off) 8) Voltage, amperage, or resistance input/output signal for all sensors and controlled devices

D. Conformance Certificates: Upon substantial completion of the work, supply and turn over all required inspection certificates from governing authorities to certify that the work as installed conforms to the rules and regulations of the governing authorities.

E. Warranty Certificates: 1. Warrant all new work as follows: a. Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of 36 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the owner. b. The Control Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during normal business hours. c. The Control Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for Emergency service during the warranty period within 4 hours. 2. Emergency service shall be available 8,760 hours per year. 3. Five (5) non-warranty emergency service calls shall be provided free of charge per year. 4. Emergency service rates for additional assistance shall be provided. a. The Contractor shall provide unlimited phone technical support to the owner during the warranty period. If the technical support location of the Contractor is outside of the toll free calling area for the customer, the Contractor shall have a toll free number or accept collect calls for the purpose of providing technical support. b. The Contractor shall provide technical support bulletin service (if available) for two years. c. During the warranty period parts for the DDC system shall arrive at the site within 24 hours of placing an order. d. At the end of the final startup, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Engineer, the Engineer shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of the specifications listed in Section 230923 (see 6.2 thru 6.3). The date of acceptance shall be the start of the warranty period. e. All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the owner has received beneficial use due to an early system startup. f. Operator workstation software, project-specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware updates which resolve known software deficiencies as identified by the Control Contractor shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period. g. Any hardware or software discovered to incorrectly process dates starting January 1, 2000 through the year 2040 shall be replaced by the Control Contractor at no cost to the owner.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

h. Control Contractor shall be available for a final check and adjustment of the DDC system before the warranty period ends. The final check will include input from the maintenance staff as well as the Engineer.

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device not factory installed. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain cartons and end caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment and pipe-end damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment and inside of pipe and tubes. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

1.07 SURGE PROTECTION

A. All equipment shall be protected from power surges and voltage transients. If failure occurs from surges and transients during the warranty period, then the contractor shall repair surge protection equipment and other equipment damaged by the failure at no cost to the Owner. 1. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients, and shall be consistent with IEEE Standards 587-1980.

1.08 DISCREPANCIES

A. Any items not included in the specification but referred to in the Appendix and/or Drawings in reference to this project and any other incidentals not referred to but required as a basic element to the overall performance and/or successful completion of the work shall be installed as part of this Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a Distributed Processing System complete with Direct Digital Control (DDC).

B. System shall be completely precalibrated with no controller setpoint adjustments or calibration required.

C. The Control System shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package of controls and instrumentation.

D. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, sensors and controls required for complete operation.

E. Provide all wiring, installation, supervision and labor, including calibration, adjustments, operator training and check-out necessary for a full operating system.

F. The new control equipment and devices software shall accessed from the existing system Host Computer.

G. The control system shall be connected to and controllable via the internet. It shall be Bacnet, Lonmark, and Modbus compatible. All hardware, software, and licenses required for owner access to the system via the internet shall be provided.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

2.02 BASIC MATERIALS, CONTROL DEVICES, SENSORS

A. Installation of some of the equipment in this section may be the responsibility of other Contractors (see 1.5).

B. All sensors and equipment related to or connected to the DDC system shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.03 WIRING, CONDUIT, AND HANGERS

A. To supply, install and connect all conduits, boxes and wires between all the different components related in this section including all line voltage to the equipment.

B. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of. Bring to the attention of the Project Manager in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered.

C. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided.

D. All wiring and fiber optic cable in the central plant, tunnels, and plenums to be supported by B- line Bridle rings or equal. All wiring and fiber optic cable in the hallways, rooms, and other public areas shall be in conduit unless noted otherwise in section H.

E. All wires in Bridle Rings or conduit shall follow building lines (i.e., wires in plenum space shall run within several inches of the wall and shall NOT run in the middle of the space). Those areas of the building with RA plenum ceilings where wire is routed above that wire shall be plenum rated or routed in conduit.

F. Wire: 1. Wire and cable of the sizes and types shown on the plans and/or hereinafter specified shall be furnished and installed by the Control Contractor. All wire and cable shall be new soft drawn copper and shall conform to all the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, IPCEA, and shall meet the specifications of the ASTM. 2. All control wiring to be copper stranded TEW-105, with appropriate gauge in accordance with the Codes. The minimum gauge used to be 16 AWG. 3. Input/Output Wiring: Wiring serving inputs and outputs from the BAS shall be cables consisting of single or multiple twisted individually shielded pairs. Each pair shall have an independent shield with drain wire. Cables installed without conduit shall be plenum rated and comply with NEC article 725. Where automation input/output wiring is run in cable tray furnish and install conductors or multi-conductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. Conductors shall be minimum #18 wire gauge. 4. Power Conductors: All feeder and branch circuit wire shall be 600 V insulated of THHN type unless shown or specified to be otherwise. No wire less than No. 12 gauge shall be used except for control circuits or low voltage wiring. Wire sizes No. 14 to No. 10 shall be solid except where otherwise indicated. Wire sizes No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All wire sizes shown are American Wire Gauge sizes. Where power conductors are run in cable tray, furnish and install conductors or multi-conductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. 5. All the conductors used for signals from the Controllers and field sensors must be shielded two wire, 18 AWG. with a drain wire. Conductor model 8760 from Belden is to be used or approved alternative by Project Manager. 6. All power wiring to be copper stranded RW 90 type, with appropriate gauge in accordance with the Codes. The following color code must be applied: line voltage to be black and/or white, ground to be green.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cable and wire shall be a standard type as manufactured by General Electric Company, National Electric Company, U. S. Rubber Company, Simplex, General Cable Company, Carol, Anaconda, Rome, Southwire, Belden, Alpha, Houston Wire and Cable, or ITT Royal.

G. Wiring Installation: 1. All wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and there shall be no unnecessary slack in the conductors. 2. All wire terminations will be identified using rail terminal strips (see 5.11) 3. All drain wires must be grounded at the source end. The other end must be protected with a dielectric material (tape). 4. All control wiring (24 V and more) must be in a separate conduit from the shielded conductors. 5. Pull-Box and Junction Box: a. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be installed where indicated on the drawings or where required to facilitate wire installation. Locate in conjunction with other trades so as to install without conflict with other materials or equipment. b. A pull-box will be located at every 50'. c. All switch, pull, junction boxes, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized, concrete tight, with interlocking ring or multiple point locking devices. Connectors shall be three piece. Indentation fittings are not acceptable. d. In suspended ceilings, all boxes must be installed on the structure. e. Boxes shall be attached by fasteners designed for the purpose and shall provide adequate mechanical strength for future maintenance. f. Junction and pull boxes not dimensioned shall be minimum 4 inch square. 6. Care shall be used to avoid proximity to heat ducts and/or steam lines. Where crossings are unavoidable, conduit shall clear covering of line by at least six inches. 7. Motor Interlock Wiring: Interlock circuit wiring shall be No. 14 solid or stranded wire. Stranded wire only shall be used where wiring is used for flexible wiring harnesses. Stranded control wire shall be provided with crimp type spade terminators. Interlock circuit wiring shall be color coded or numbered using an identical number on both ends of the conductor. Wire numbers shall be installed before conductors are pulled. Where motor interlock conductors are run in cable tray, furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. 8. All splices, taps, and terminations shall be made at outlet, junction, or pull boxes. Wire to No.6 gauge shall be spliced using Scotchlok wire nuts. No Bakelite wirenuts shall be used. Wire No. 6 and larger shall be spliced using solderness connectors as manufactured by Penn Union Company. Splices No. 6 and larger shall be insulated by taping with plastic vinyl tape as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Splices shall not be permitted in automation input and output wiring without specific written authorization from the Project Manager. If such a splice is approved, the location of the splice shall be clearly documented on the "As Built" drawings. Splices in automation wiring, if necessary, shall be made using Thomas&Betts STA-KON connectors installed per the manufacturer’s directions to maintain NEMA specified voltage drops and wire retention forces. 9. Grounding: a. The Contractor shall extend existing equipment grounding systems. The Contractor shall use only approved grounding clamps and connectors as manufactured by Penn- Union, Burndy or O-Z Mfg. Company. b. The conduit system of the 480/277 and 208Y/120 volt systems shall be continuous and shall be used as the static grounding conductor, except for circuits installed in flexible conduit. Install a green grounding conductor inside all flexible conduits and extend to the nearest outlet or junction box. Install a green grounding conductor inside all non-metallic conduits or raceways.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

10. Wiring to all devices shall be new. The intention of these specifications is to provide the owner with the maximum flexibility in scheduling of the project by forcing the installation of parallel systems for bidding purposes. Installation of the new system to limit down time and cut over time is the intension. During construction if all of the below are true the existing wiring may be reused: a. if schedule permits. b. if at the owners discretion. c. if existing wiring to devices is tested and is sound. d. if existing wiring is installed per new wiring means and methods.

H. Conduit: 1. Conduit Material: a. All wiring to be in E.M.T. type conduits unless in plenum or otherwise noted below. 1) Above accessible ceilings open cable with bridle ring support is allowed. 2) Routed in corridors or other finished spaces on top of exposed sheet metal ducts supported with open wire way devices attached to the center top of the duct is allowed. Wire shall not be visible under casual observation of the installation. 3) 12 ft. or more above the floor in mechanical rooms where supported per specifications. b. All conduits to be a minimum of 1/2". c. All flexible conduits will not exceed 48” in length and are to be used only in areas where vibrations and/or expansion joints are present. d. Flexible conduit to be used for connecting any element to its conduit. The length of this flexible conduit will not exceed 48". e. Jacketed flexible steel conduit (Sealtite) shall be used where flexible conduit connections are required outdoors and at connections to all motorized equipment and motors outdoors. f. In damp areas, the conduit and related equipment must be suitable for the application. g. Electrometalic tubing shall be installed for all exposed work and for all concealed work in applications where conduit is required. h. Conduit shall be by Allied, Triangle, Republic, Youngstown, Carlon, Rob Roy, or approved equal. i. For exposed installations where the conduit cannot be run in ceiling spaces, wall cavities or attics, surface-mounted raceway (wire mold) is acceptable. No EMT is allowed in these locations. Provide samples for size and color selection. 2. Conduit Installation: a. All wiring in mechanical rooms at heights below 12 feet must be run in conduit. Otherwise, wiring in all other open areas must have conduit (at all heights). Existing conduit runs where compliant with these specifications may be re-used. b. All conduits to be installed in a concealed manner and shall be installed parallel to the lines of the building. c. All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to the building walls or floors. d. Conduit bends shall be made with standard hickeys of proper size; radius of bends to be at least 6 times the diameter of the conduit. Runs between outlets shall not contain more than the equivalent of three quarter bends. Conduit runs shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, outlet to cabinet, etc. e. Conduits shall be installed with pitch toward outlet box wherever possible. All heavy wall conduits shall have two locknuts and a bushing at each termination outlet box, junction box, etc., except where terminated in a threaded hub. Fittings on electrometalic tubing shall be compression type. f. A bushing shall be used where conduit enters a panel box. Bushing for No. 4 AWG or larger shall be insulated type with provisions for grounding as type "BL" made by O-Z Electric Company, or approved equal.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

g. Expansion fittings shall be provided at all conduits across the building expansion joints. Fittings shall be Type "AX" or "TX" as made by O-Z Electric Company, or approved equal. Provide copper bonding jumper at each expansion fitting. h. All ½’’ conduit to be supported every 6', the supports will be located at the connector end of the conduit. i. Exposed conduit shall be securely fastened in place on maximum 5 ft. intervals for 3/4" through 2-1/2 inch nominal sizes. Supports may be one hole malleable straps or other approved devices. No perforated metal straps will be permitted. j. Any exposed conduit proposed outside mechanical rooms or mechanical spaces shall be reviewed by Project Manager and approved prior to installation.

I. Wireway: 1. Furnish and install at all control panel locations a NEMA 1 lay-in wireway system to bring cable into and out of the panel as detailed on the drawings and specified in this section. Furnish 3-way wireways at each panel location: one for Class 1 wiring, 1 for Class 2 and Class 3 wiring. Panels at units to be NEMA 3R or better. 2. Wireway systems at locations where cables are to be run without conduit or in a cable tray shall consist of a connection to the control panel with a vertical extension to 8’-0” or the pipe rack or cable tray level, whichever is higher. The vertical section shall terminate in a 90° fitting with a closure plate. The closure plate shall be provided with a conduit nipple with locknuts and bushings as a wire entry point into the square duct. The conduit nipple shall be one size smaller than the wireway it is associated with. 3. Wireway systems at locations where cables are to be run in conduit shall consist of a horizontal section of wireway with a length equal to the control panel width and located above the control panel and connected to the control panel with three conduit nipples, locknuts, and bushings; one for tubing, one for Class 1 wiring and one for Class 2 and 3 wiring. Conduits for cable runs shall terminate on the wireway. 4. The intent of the wireway configurations outlined above is to provide a method for adding input and output wiring to the control panel without having to drill directly into the electronics enclosure after the system is on-line and running and to provide sufficient area to land field conduits while maintaining appropriate circuit segregation for wire entry into the controller enclosure. The installation of wireway shall be made with this consideration in mind.

J. Hangers and Anchors: 1. Where control system tubing is run on trapezes and/or hangers used by and or installed by other trades, supports for the trapezes shall be coordinated by all trades using the trapeze to assure that the anchor system is not overloaded and is sufficient for the load imposed including a margin of safety and seismic considerations. Under no circumstances shall a trapeze or hanger system installed by the electrical trades be used to support work by any other trade, nor shall the electrical trades use the trapezes installed by any of the other trades for the support of electrical equipment, all as required by the National Electric Code. Similarly, under no circumstances shall a trapeze or hanger system installed by the sprinkler trades be used to support work by any other trade, nor shall the sprinkler trades use the trapezes installed by any of the other trades for the support of sprinkler systems or equipment, all as required by NFPA 13, Standard For The Installation Of Sprinkler Systems. 2. Anchors to be loaded in tension for use in existing concrete structure and anchors loaded in tension and not cast in place shall be epoxy resin set anchors installed per the manufacturers recommendations for technique, size, loading, embedment, etc. Where anchors are loaded in shear at these locations, suitably sized and installed wedge type anchors may be used.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 11 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

3. In all cases, anchor loading shall be based on hanger spacing, weight of the pipe to be supported when full and insulated, weight of any additional loads imposed upon the anchor, wind loading, seismic loading, quality of the material that the anchor is being installed in, etc. The Control Contractor shall verify in the field that the anchors used and the materials that they are being installed in are suitable for the load imposed and shall bring any problems to the attention of the Project Manager in writing immediately and not proceed without direction from the Project Manager. 4. Wedge type anchors shall be Hilti Kwik Bolt II. Adhesive anchors shall be Hilti HVA.

2.04 UNIT CONTROL PANELS (INSTALLATION AND FABRICATION IF REQUIRE BY NEW EQUIPMENT)

A. Enclosed cabinet type with hinged door for mounting all relays, switches, thermometers, and miscellaneous controls not requiring direct mounting on equipment such as sensing elements, valves and damper motors. Provide cabinet for each control unit adjacent to each system.

B. Each panel shall have power conditioners on electrical supply, Crucial Power Product MI Series.

C. Control panels shall be fabricated to match the approved shop drawings submitted by the control contractor. Fabrication shall be in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall facilitate repair, maintenance, and adjustment of the equipment contained therein.

D. Control panels shall be fabricated and laid out to incorporate the following features: 1. Identification of all internally and cover mounted devices. Cover mounted labels shall be engraved labels as specified in this section (5.10). Labels shall be mounted adjacent to the device they are associated with so that replacement of the device does not eliminate the label. Provide laminated control diagram at each panel. 2. Electrical wiring shall enter the panel from the top, bottom, and/or side of the left side of the panel or as required by the panel supplier to meet NEC requirements. 3. All wires entering or leaving the panel shall pass through a rail terminal strip. Where the wires are part of a current loop transmission circuit, the terminals shall be the disconnecting link type. Terminals shall be identified with a number that corresponds to the terminal number on the job wiring diagram. Rail terminal strip specifications include: a. General: Terminal rail assemblies shall be fabricated from components selected from the product line of one manufacturer. Sizes (heights, widths, and profiles) of each terminal shall be selected to be compatible with the other terminals on the rail. Terminal units located at the end of a rail or adjacent to terminals with a different profile (for example, where disconnecting terminals are located next to resistor terminals) shall be provided with end caps to completely close off the terminal unit interior components from the local environment. End stops shall be provided for on all rails to secure the terminals located on the rail in place. 4. All internal wiring and tubing shall be run inside plastic wiring/tubing duct as manufactured by Tyton. Wire duct shall be sized to hold the required number of wires and tubes without crimping the tubes and with sufficient space to allow wiring and tubing to be traced during troubleshooting operation. 5. Wires that pass from the panel interior to cover mounted devices shall be provided with a flex loop that is anchored on both sides of the hinge. Wiring running to cover mounted devices shall be bundled using cable ties. 6. Provide strain relief type cord and cable connectors for all cables that leave the panel as individual cables not in conduit. 7. All control panels shall be provided with removable sub panels to allow the panel enclosures to be installed at the job site during rough in while the panels are fabricated off- site for later installation.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 12 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

8. Provide one duplex outlet mounted inside the control panel and separately fused with a non-time delay fuse at 15 A at any panel location containing electronic or electrical control components. This receptacle may be served from the control panel 120 VAC power source. 9. Each control panel shall be provided with a control power disconnect switch located and wired so as to disconnect all control power in the panel. The leaving side of this switch shall be wired to the panel and field components through a fuse or fuses sized and applied to protect both the components of the system as well as the wire and as required for code compliance. 10. Power to the following equipment will be have a fuse rated for applicable current and voltage. Fuses will be on rail terminal strips. Equipment includes: a. Each control unit b. Control devices c. Panel light d. Receptacle loads (e.g., modems, laptops) 11. All control panels containing electrical equipment shall be NEMA rated for the location in which they are installed. Cover mounted components, tubing penetration, and conduit penetrations shall be made in a manner consistent with the NEMA rating. 12. All wiring leaving the panel shall be separated by classification; i.e., Class 1 circuits shall not be run with Class 2 circuits, etc. Segregation shall be maintained inside the panel to the fullest extent possible. Where low voltage wires carrying low level ac and dc signals cross wires containing power and high level ac signals, the wires shall cross at a 90° angle.

E. Control panels shall be shop fabricated and tested prior to installation in the field. The panels shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer at the assembly location prior to installation in the field. The Engineer shall be given the opportunity to witness the testing of the panels.

F. Panel Location: 1. Each control panel is to be located for convenient servicing. 2. Mount panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration isolation.

2.05 SENSORS

A. All sensing inputs shall be provided via industry standard signals.

B. Temperatures, humidity’s, differential pressure signals, and all other signal inputs shall be be industry standard variable voltage or amperage. 1. Wall sensors to be housed in tamperproof enclosures. Duct sensors to be electronically identical, housing suitable for the application. 2. Metal guards shall be provided as shown on Drawings.

B. Temperature, humidity, differential pressure signals, and all other signal inputs shall be industry standard variable voltage or amperage.

C. All signal inputs shall be compatible with the controllers used and with the requirement for readout of variables as specified.

D. If sensors are not linear, then software will linearize sensor output.

E. Controls and sensors for VAV boxes to be provided to VAV manufacturer for installation at the factory.

F. Minimum sensor accuracy (as compared to a test standard) and range are listed in Table. Accuracy is not the same as resolution (the ability of the DDC to measure incremental change). Resolution is specified in “Part 3. DDC Hardware.”

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 13 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

1. All accuracy values should be combined effect numbers taking into account thermal drift, interchangeability, hysteresis, etc.

Sensor Type Range Min. Accuracy

Duct/Air Handling Unit Temperature 40 – 130 °F ± 0.5 Degree F Room Temperature 50 – 85 °F ± 1 Degree F Outside Air Temperature - 20 to 120 °F ± 0.5 Degree F Humidity 0 to 100% RH ± 3% RH Duct Static Pressure 0 to 3 ″ w.c. ± 1% full scale per 50 °F Space Static Pressure - 0.25 ″ to 0.25 ″ w.c. ± 1% full scale per 50 °F High Limit Static 0-5” w.c. + 1% full scale per 50ºF Current Sensor Sized for application ± 1% full scale Power (kWh) Sized for application ± 2.5% full scale (at 0.5 PF) ± 2% full scale (at 1.0 PF) Air flow 700 to 4,000 fpm ± 2% full scale CO 2 sensors 0 to 2,000 PPM ± 3% full scale Freeze Stat 34ºF to 68ºF + 1ºF

Sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale per year

G. Smoke Detectors: 1. Dual chamber ionization type with duct sampling tubes. UL approved with adjustable sensitivity. 2. Arrange to stop associated fan on presence of smoke. Provide extra alarm contact for use by fire alarm system. 3. Wiring to fire alarm system by Division 16 contractor. 4. Provide for all fan systems 2000 CFM and above. 5. Mount as required to meet all applicable codes.

H. Flow Switches: 1. Provide McDonnell-Miller or approved equal. 2. Install in piping in such a manner so as to eliminate nuisance fluttering. 3. Provide time delay relays where required to eliminate false alarms when equipment is started.

I. Static Pressure and Velocity Controllers: 1. Static pressure controllers shall be of either the diaphragm, or rigid element bellows, electronic type. 2. Each controller shall be provided with connections, i.e., stop cock and tubing, for attaching a portable pressure gauge.

2.06 FREEZE PROTECTION THERMOSTAT

A. Length: one linear foot of sensing element per square foot of coil or duct area.

B. Low temperature cutout control, snap acting, normally closed contacts.

C. Sensing element contacts will open when any 16-inch portion of the element sensing at or lower than setpoint.

D. Auto reset with manual alarm reset.

E. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 14 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

F. Reset temperature 5 °F above setpoint.

2.07 TRANSFORMERS

A. Transformers selected and sized for appropriate VA capacity and installed and fused according to applicable Codes. Provide with reset button.

2.08 TEMPERATURE SENSORS/THERMOSTATS

A. All sensors shall be completely electronic. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire 1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD.

B. Duct/ Air Handling Unit type temperature sensor (mixed, discharge/supply, and return air): 1. The probe of the duct sensor shall be 12" in length, and be made of Stainless Steel. Applications where the smallest dimension of the duct is less than 24", the probe shall be sized to reach the center of the duct. 2. Large systems above 9 square feet may require an averaging probe if sufficient mixing of the air stream is not possible. 3. Mount the sensor far enough downstream to allow mixing of the air stream, this is most important on Hot and Cold Deck applications where the coil is placed after the fan. 4. Sensors for mounting on insulated ducts or casings are to be equipped with brackets for mounting clear of the isolation. 5. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or in positions with obstructed air flow. 6. Provide separate duct flange for each sensing element. 7. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports. 8. Securely seal ducts where elements or connections penetrate duct. 9. Mount sensor enclosures to allow for easy removal and servicing without disturbance or removal of duct insulation.

C. Room Type Temperature Sensor: 1. All thermostat locations shall be submitted for approval before installation. 2. Provide all sensors with blank , vandal-proof covers that are flush with wall. Mamac TE-205-P series are equal. 3. Coordinate sensor location with light switches, and mount 60" above the floor. Verify location before installation, so that no direct sunlight or influences from heat and cooling sources will be imposed on the sensor. 4. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, provide one discharge and one space temperature sensor for each VAV Terminal Control Unit. 5. Insulation shall be installed between the temperature sensor and open conduit to eliminate false temperature readings due to cold drafts.

D. Outside Air Sensors 1. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. 2. Sensor’s exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element. 3. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.

E. Averaging Sensors 1. For ductwork greater in any dimension that 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used. 2. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing points per 12-foot long segment.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 15 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

3. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing string.

2.09 POWER MONITORING DEVICES

A. Current Measurement (Amps) 1. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Controls. 2. Current Transformer – A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor amps. a. Operating frequency – 50 - 400 Hz. b. Insulation – 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL. c. UL recognized. d. Five amp secondary. e. Select current ration as appropriate for application. f. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries 3. Current Transducer – A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided. The current transducer shall include: a. 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes b. Manufactured to UL 1244. c. Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%. d. Minimum load resistance 30kOhm. e. `Input 0-20 Amps. f. Output 4-20 mA. g. Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC +5%). h. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries

2.10 CO 2 SENSORS

A. Sensor output shall be be 4 – 20 mA or 2 – 10 VDC proportional over the specified range.

B. The transmitter shall be capable of operating from an unregulated 18-30 VDC power supply.

C. Sensors shall be non-dispersive Infra-Red diffusion sampling with accuracy of +/- 30ppm +/- 2% of measured valve at normal temperature and pressure.

D. Self-calibrating sensors are acceptable but, sensor must easily allow field calibration with test gas. Sensors must retain accuracy for between 3 - 5 years without requiring calibration. Sensors that require annual calibration are not acceptable.

E. Provide CO 2 calibration tool with system. Turn over to owner after calibration and provide instructions on use.

F. Veris C series, Johnson Controls or approved.

G. Sensor shall be wall mounted in the space. Provide metal guard at sensor in gym.

2.11 CURRENT SWITCHES

A. The status of all non–VFD fan and pump motors and all VFD fan and pump motors less than 20 HP shall ONLY be detected using current switches.

B. The current switch shall be provided for electrical equipment status applications only.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 16 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

C. Switch should attach directly to the conductor and have a mounting bracket for installation flexibility.

D. The current switch shall be 100% solid state electronics.

E. The current switch shall be induce powered from the monitored load

2.12 POWER MONITORING DEVICES

A. Current Measurement (Amps) 1. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Controls. 2. Current Transformer – A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor amps. a. Operating frequency – 50 - 400 Hz. b. Insulation – 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL. c. UL recognized. d. Five amp secondary. e. Select current ration as appropriate for application. f. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries 3. Current Transducer – A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided. The current transducer shall include: a. 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes b. Manufactured to UL 1244. c. Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%. d. Minimum load resistance 30kOhm. e. `Input 0-20 Amps. f. Output 4-20 mA. g. Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC +5%). h. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries

2.13 TIMER SWITCH

A. Spring wound timer switch, 0-2HR, rated for control current. Use as a local override. Intermatic FF series or equal.

2.14 SURGE PROTECTION

A. All equipment shall be protected from power surges and voltage transients. If failure occurs from surges and transients during the warranty period, then the Contractor shall repair surge protection equipment and other equipment damaged by the failure at no cost to the owner.

B. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients, and shall be consistent with IEEE standards 587-1980.

2.15 AIR PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Static Pressure and Velocity Controllers: 1. Static pressure sensors shall be of either the diaphragm or rigid element bellows, electronic type, photo helic. 2. Each sensor shall be provided with connections, i.e., stop cock and tubing, for attaching a portable pressure gauge.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 17 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

3. Sensors for mounting on insulated ducts or casings are to be equipped with brackets for mounting clear of the insulation. 4. The transmitter shall be a two-wire type and provide a 4-20 mA signal which is proportional and linear over the calibrated pressure range. 5. The transmitter shall be capable of operating from an unregulated 18-30 VDC power supply. 6. The device housing shall provide 1/4" barbed brass fitting for the connection of the pressure lines. Pressure ranges shall suit the application so that normal operation will occur at mid-range of the sensor span. 7. The location of the indoor measurement shall be remote from doors and openings to the outside, away from elevator lobbies, and shielded from air velocity effects. See Drawings for location.

2.16 EMERGENCY SWITCH

A. Provide with red mushroom button with locking off position. Provide with clear plastic hinged cover. Switch shall be suitable for low voltage power disable. Label “Emergency HVAC Shut- Off”.

2.17 CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. All damper actuators shall be Belimo electric actuators.

B. Torque rating shall be based on the damper manufacturers operating torque requirements at the design flows and pressure drops or shall be based on the manufacturers required shut-off torque to achieve the design leakage rate, whichever is greater. This higher torque rating shall be doubled. An actuator with this doubled torque rating shall be installed.

C. All damper sections which operate in sequence with each other shall have identical actuators and identical linkage arrangements to assure similar performance between all sections.

D. Modulated actuator operation shall be industry standard 0-10v.

E. Two or three position operation is not acceptable for economizers, VAV dampers, multizone dampers, or any other application specifying modulated operation. OSA Dampers to be normally closed, mixed air dampers to be normally open.

F. Actuator quantities for dampers shall be based on the following criteria. 1. Actuators must be outside unit enclosure. 2. Actuators shall be installed to maximize the linearity between actuator stroke and actuated devise travel (25% actuator stroke produces approximately 25% of the desired angular rotation required; 50% stroke produces 50% angular rotation). In addition, actuators should be installed to maximize force available for useful work over the entire stroke.

G. Spring returns on damper operators are required for OSA application.

2.18 FACTORY MOUNTED DEVICES

A. Sensors as required shall be provided by Control Contractor to the manufacturer for installation. All materials and labor beyond this is the responsibility of the Control Contractor.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 18 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

PART 3 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS – HARDWARE

3.01 NETWORK CONTROLLER/SUPERVISOR FOR NEW EQUIPMENT ONLY IF REQUIRED

A. The Network Controller shall be a fully user-programmable supervisory controller. The Network Controller shall monitor and communicate the network of distributed primary, secondary, application-specific control units, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Network Controllers/Supervisors. Device shall be a Tridium JACE Network area controller.

B. Controllers shall be microprocessor-based with a maximum program scan rate of one (1) second. They shall be multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processors. Controller size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification.

C. Each Network Controller/Supervisor shall support/communicate with a minimum of 100 control units.

D. Each controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control units. In addition, if memory for historical data trending is not on primary and/or secondary control units, then sufficient memory is required on the network controller to capture and record historical trending data. Memory size shall be at least 1 gigabyte.

E. Network Controller/Supervisor speed shall be between 300 bps to 115K bps.

F. Network Controller/Supervisor shall interact with printers, pagers, and host workstations.

G. The controller shall have an integrated real-time clock.

H. Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity. (Optional. Low cost is of greater importance.)

I. The NC shall provide at least one Ethernet port 10/100 mdps, one RS-232/485 port. Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation.

J. The NC shall support standard Web browser access via the Internet. It shall support a minimum of 15 simultaneous users.

K. The NC shall provide alarm recognition, storage, routing, management and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

L. The NC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area network. 1. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to: a. Alarm, b. Return to normal, c. To default. 2. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: a. Screen message text, b. Email of complete alarm message to multiple recipients. c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message. d. Graphics with flashing alarm object(s). 3. The following shall be recorded by the NC for each alarm (at a minimum): a. Time and date

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 19 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

b. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) c. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.

M. Programming software and all controller “Setup Wizards” shall be embedded into the NC.

N. Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The network controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.

O. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Nonvolatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. 1. During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. 2. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence. 3. Should a controller memory be lost for any reason, the operator workstation shall automatically reload the program without any intervention by the system operators.

3.02 PRIMARY CONTROL UNITS FOR NEW EQUIPMENT ONLY IF REQUIRED

A. Primary control units are stand-alone units able to control HVAC equipment per the specified sequence of operation. 1. Each controller shall be capable of performing all specified control functions independently. The primary control unit shall directly control all units, fans, and control devices. All control software shall be implemented in the primary control unit. The sequence of operation precisely identifies all points of monitoring and control. 2. Shall monitor specific analog and digital inputs, process the data received, and produce analog or digital outputs to control the systems specified. 3. Systems utilizing controllers that operate in a default mode only as a stand-alone will not be acceptable. 4. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of Operation”.

B. Minimum specifications include: 1. Microprocessor-based controllers, fully equipped with power supply, input and output terminals, internal (electronic) timeclock, and self-charging battery backup. 2. Modular multi-tasking microprocessor based direct digital controller with minimum of 1MB of EEPROM and RAM memory. 3. Minimum 10 bit Analog-to-Digital (A/D) converter. 4. Minimum 12 bit Digital-to-Analog (D/A) converter. 5. Sufficient memory for storing 288 trend values for every point (real and virtual). 6. Controllers shall have unused physical points available for future add-ons. The number of spare points shall equal 20% of all physical points (20% AI, 20% AO, 20% BI, 20% BO) or at least two spare points of each type. 7. Shall include all control strategies listed in “Part 4: DDC Software.” 8. Each control loop shall be fully definable in terms of inputs and outputs that are a part of the control strategy. 9. Each control unit shall be equipped with a communication interface connection, minimum of 16 universal analog or digital inputs and outputs, and shall communicate via the LAN to the building level controller. 10. On board power supply for all sensors.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 20 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

11. On board sockets for plug-in resistors. 12. Each control units shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of between 32 °F and 110 °F and from 10% to 90% RH. 13. Control units provided for outside installation shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of 0 °F to 120 °F, and 5 to 95% RH. If such hardware is not available, locate hardware in an accessible indoor location or as approved by the Engineer or Project Manager. 14. Power Failure Protection: a. All control panels shall be provided with automatic protection from power failure for at least 168 hours. b. This protection shall, at a minimum, include continuous real-time clock operation, automatic system restart upon power return, and integrity of all volatile point data. c. Panel outputs shall, at a minimum, be configured to remain in the last commanded state and return to the required state upon restoration of power. 15. Diagnostics: Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The network controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication. 16. Power Failure: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Nonvolatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. a. During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. b. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence. c. Should a controller memory be lost for any reason, the operator workstation shall automatically reload the program without any intervention by the system operators. 17. Certification: All controllers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). a. All controllers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). b. NiCS (Compatibility Statement) shall show no restrictions to conductivity. Provide devices with station compatibility in and out and tool compatibility in and out. Having a value of “all” for each.

3.03 SECONDARY CONTROL UNITS FOR NEW EQUIPMENT IF REQUIRED

A. Secondary control units are able to control HVAC equipment per specified by the sequence of operation. 1. Each controller shall be capable of performing specified control functions. The secondary control unit shall directly control all units, fans, dampers and control devices. All control software shall be implemented in the secondary control unit. The sequence of operation precisely identifies all points of monitoring and control. 2. Each controller shall monitor specific analog and digital inputs, process the data received, and produce analog or digital outputs to control the systems specified. 3. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of Operation”.

B. Minimum specifications include: 1. Microprocessor-based controllers, fully equipped with power supply, input and output terminals. 2. Modular multi-tasking based direct digital controller with minimum of 2048 bytes of EEPROM and RAM memory. 3. Minimum 8 bit Analog-to-Digital (A/D) converter.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 21 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

4. Minimum 10 bit Digital-to-Analog (D/A) converter. 5. Controllers shall have unused physical points available for future add-ons. The number of spare points shall equal 20% (20% AI, 20% AO, 20% BI, 20% BO) of all physical points or two spare points whichever is greater. 6. Shall include all control strategies listed in “Part 4: DDC Software.” 7. Each control loop shall be fully definable in terms of inputs and outputs that are a part of the control strategy. 8. Each secondary control unit shall be equipped with a USB communication interface connection, minimum of 16 universal analog or digital inputs or outputs, and shall communicate via the LAN to the network front end. Each control units shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of between 32 °F and 110°F and from 10% to 90% RH. 9. Control units provided for outside installation shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of 0 °F to 120 °F, and 5 to 95% RH. If such hardware is not available, locate hardware in an accessible indoor location, in a ventilated control panel or as approved by the Project Manager or Engineer.

3.04 USER INTERFACE

A. Use existing computer at facility office for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. Real-time control functions, including scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in the BMS Network Automation Engines and Data Server (s) to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.

PART 4 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS – SOFTWARE

4.01 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Update software to latest version that operates with all existing and new controllers.

B. Revise existing graphics as required for new software. New graphics shall match existing. Alter programming for new sequences. Retain existing passwords and schedules. Alter alarms and trending for new systems. Revise system for current version of district wide Web access as required. New point designations to match existing format.

PART 5 EXECUTION

5.01 INSTALLATION, CALIBRATION AND START-UP

A. Instrument Mounting: Securely mount and adequately reinforce and make air-tight all duct and wall penetrations. Locate instrument mounting free of vibrations. Do not mount operators directly to sheet metal lighter than 18 gauge without adequate reinforcing.

B. Control Adjustment: Temperature control settings indicated are approximate and intended to indicate mid-range of instruments to be used. Make adjustments as required by individual location, job requirements and local conditions.

C. Calibration and Start-Up: Calibrate and adjust all control systems and components and place in proper operation. Check system control sequence and adjust for complete and proper operation.

D. Outdoor Temperature Sensing Devices: Protect all such controls from effects of the sun, direct or indirect.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 22 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

E. Wiring: Include all connections necessary and any miscellaneous wiring or conduit not shown on the Electrical Drawings for complete system. Comply with Division 16 for electrical requirements, especially where "plenum rated wiring" is indicated.

F. When so directed by the Architect, provide a technician fully familiar with the project to demonstrate proper operation of all control facilities.

5.02 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. All devices relating to the work or systems included herein, including controllers, valves, motors, relays, etc., shall be identified with a unique identification number or name on the submitted engineering drawings. This identification number or name, along with the service of the device (discharge air controller, mixed air controller, etc.), shall be permanently affixed to the respective device.

B. All field devices will be supplied with a nameplate indicating its name, number, address, and all other pertinent information.

C. If the field device is too small for the nameplate to be "adhered" to or on another piece of equipment near it (e.g., nameplate on air handling unit at wire penetration for mixed air temperature sensor), then attach the nameplate via nylon ties.

D. Tagging shall be computer generated. For input/output wiring, cabling, or tubing, the panel side of the terminals shall be labeled with the automation panel circuit board and terminal numbers associated with the point. The field side shall be labeled with the point number. Cable, wiring and tubing not specifically associated with an input or output shall be labeled with a number and function.

E. All wiring, tubing, and cabling both inside and outside of control panels shall be labeled at both ends using Thomas and Betts EDP printable wire and cable markers using style WSL self- laminating vinyl. Input and output cables and wiring shall be labeled with the point number and the point description, such as: CPDPS005 Primary Heating Water Pump #1 On/Off Status

F. Cable and wiring not specifically associated with an input or output shall be labeled with a number and a function description such as:

120 VAC Panel #

G. Label the 24V transformer locations with the feeding panel and circuit number.

5.03 REPORTS

A. At a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily print the following types of reports. 1. General listing of all points in the network 2. List of user accounts and access levels 3. List of all points currently in alarm 4. List of all off-line points 5. List of all points currently in override status 6. List of all disabled points 7. List of all points currently locked out 8. List of all Weekly Schedules

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 23 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

9. List of all Holiday Programming 10. List of Limits and Deadbands, throttling ranges, gains, etc. 11. List of all adjustable and virtual points

PART 6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

Air and water balancing shall be completed (and discrepancies resolved) before Control Contractor’s final system check and before the acceptance test to be conducted in the presence of the Owner’s Representative.

6.01 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Prior to acceptance, the following steps will be used by the Control Contractor to produce a testing and report by system to be submitted for approval by the Engineer or Owner.

B. Work and/or systems installed under this section shall be fully functioning prior to Demonstration, Acceptance Period and Contract Close Out. Control Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and calibrate all work and/or systems under this contract, as described below: 1. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify all circuits are free from grounds or faults. 2. Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections. 3. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system. 4. Coordinate with TAB subcontractor to obtain control settings that are determined from balancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained from TAB contractor (and note any TAB deficiencies): a. Minimum outside air damper settings for air handling units and CFM values. 5. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing, and actuating devices. a. Calibrate each instrumentation device by making a comparison between the DDC display and the reading at the device, using a standard traceable to the National Bureau of Standards, which shall be at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated (e.g., if field device is +/-0.5% accurate, test equipment shall be +/-0.25% accurate over same range). Record the measured value and displayed value for each device in the Pre-Commissioning Report. b. All analog input points are to be tested by comparing the reading obtained through the workstation and through an independent reading device (meter). c. Check each analogue output by making a comparison between the control command at the DDC controller and the status of the controlled device. Check each output point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing device and the Host computer display. 1) All analog output points are to be tested using a command from the workstation modulating the output in 10% increments and recording the associated voltage/amps sent to the controlled device. 6. Check each digital input/output point by making a comparison between the control command at the DDC controller and the status of the controlled device. Check each digital point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing/control device and the Host computer display. a. ON/OFF commands from the workstation should be performed in order to verify its true operation. 7. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all actuating devices. Manually activate damper and valve operators to verify free travel and fail condition. Check valve or damper to insure that it shuts off tight when the appropriate signal is applied to the operator. Adjust the operator spring compression as required. If positioner or volume booster is installed on the operator, calibrate per manufacturer’s procedure to achieve spring range indicated. Check split range positioner to verify proper operation.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 24 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

8. Verify proper sequences of operation. Record results and submit with Pre-Commissioning Report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all specified functions by adjusting input variable to determine if sequence of operation is operating as specified. 9. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset or overshoot. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from set point for controlled variables shall be as follows: a. Air temperature: ± 0.5 degrees F b. Water temperature: ± 1 degrees F c. Duct pressure: ± 0.05 inches wc

C. Testing, Adjusting, and Calibration shall be completed prior to Substantial Completion.

D. Provide Test Report for approval by the Engineer and Owner before system demonstration.

6.02 DEMONSTRATION

A. Prior to acceptance, the control system shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification. These tests shall occur after the Control Contractor has completed the installation, started up the system, and performed its own tests (outlined in 6.1 and to be submitted in writing).

B. The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the Control Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, startup, and debugging process. The Owners Representative will be present to observe and review these tests. The Owners Representative shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start of the testing procedures.

C. Verifying compliance of equipment operation and sequence of operation with this specification through all modes of operation. 1. If more than 10 percent of the demonstrated equipment operation and sequence of operation fails to operate per the submittals, the demonstration test will be rescheduled after the control contractor takes corrective action.

D. Programming changes for correction of improperly programmed sequences will not be considered legitimate reasons for change orders.

E. The Control Contractor shall provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication, and shall demonstrate actual field operation of each controlled and sensing point for all modes of operation including day, night, occupied, unoccupied, fire/smoke alarm, seasonal changeover, and power failure modes. The purpose is to demonstrate the calibration, response, and action of every point and system. Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the Control Contractor.

F. As each control input and output is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date, technician's and Engineer’s initials, and any corrective action taken or needed.

G. Demonstrate that all points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or commanded (as applicable) from all workstations.

H. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN communication failures meet the requirements of these Specifications.

I. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the requirements. Provide a sample of the data archive. Indicate the file names and locations.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 25 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

J. Demonstrate successful communication of point values between the BAS and other HVAC equipment.

K. Demonstrate complete operation of Operator Interface such as graphic screens, trend logs, alarms, etc.

L. Additionally, the following items shall be demonstrated: 1. DDC Loop Response. The Control Contractor shall supply trend data output in a graphical form showing the step response of each DDC loop. The test shall show the loop's response to a change in set point that represents a change of actuator position of at least 25% of its full range. The sampling rate of the trend shall be from 1 second to 3 minutes, depending on the speed of the loop. The trend data shall show for each sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values (e.g., VFD frequency or Amperage). Any loop that yields unreasonably under-damped or over-damped control shall require further tuning by the Control Contractor. 2. Optimum Start/Stop. The Control Contractor shall supply a trend data output showing the capability of the algorithm. The 5 minute trends shall include the operating status of all optimally started and stopped equipment, as well as temperature sensor inputs of affected areas. 3. Operational logs for each system that indicate all set points, operating points, valve positions, mode, and equipment status shall be submitted to the Engineer. These logs shall cover three 48-hour periods and have a sample frequency of not more than 10 minutes. The logs shall be provided in both printed and disk formats. 4. The DDC and HVAC systems will be shut down for 15 minutes and then re-started. Within 15 minutes, the DDC system shall start and obtain stable control of the HVAC systems without safety trips, alarms, or excessive deviations in temperature and pressure (as defined by the Engineer).

M. System acceptance shall occur within 120 days of substantial completion. Any delay beyond this period of time shall initiate liquidated dampers unless waived by owner. Failure or delays on engineers / owners part shall not be included in 120 day count.

6.03 ACCEPTANCE

A. All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as meeting the requirements of this document.

B. The system shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as part of the demonstration are submitted and approved.

C. The warranty period starts when the engineering accepts the system and provides this acceptance in written from the Owner and the Control Contractor.

D. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Control Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Engineer. The Owner shall then perform such tests no later than 3 months after the building is occupied. The costs for these additional tests will be incurred by the Control Contractor.

6.04 SPARE PARTS

A. The Control Contractor shall provide two spare fuses of the correct size and capacity for each fuseholder located in all the installed control systems and the Control Contractor’s related equipment.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 26 of 27

DDC CONTROLS 23 0923

B. The Control Contractor shall provide two spare pilot lights for each control unit that contains one or more pilot lights.

6.05 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of one 4-hour on-site training sessions after system acceptance and at the owner's request. The training session will occur after the as-built drawings and submittals have been provided and the Engineer has accepted the system.

B. Training shall introduce users to the system changes.

C. If during any training session, the trainer debugs more than two (2) items, the training session will be immediately terminated. The session will be rescheduled for another date. The re- scheduled training session will be carried out for the full four hours at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. The trainer must be well grounded in both DDC system operation and in mechanical systems service and should be the programmer.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 27 of 27

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 0993

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section describes the sequence of operations for HVAC control systems specified elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. Provide a complete and operational temperature control and building automation system based on the following points and sequence of operation, complete as to sequences and standard control practices. The determined point list is the minimum amount of points that are to be provided. Provide any additional points required to meet the sequence of operation.

B. Object List: 1. The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as follows: a. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop) (enable/disable), etc. b. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc. c. Analog In (AI) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc. d. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0–20mA, 4–20mA and 0– 10VDC are the only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog outputs must come from both hardware and software resident in the controllers. Transducers will not be acceptable under any circumstance.

C. Occupancy and Performance Time Periods: 1. Occupied Period is signaled automatically by adjustable settings at DDC server, Building Controller, Application Controller and also, at each zone when zone bypass timer is activated. 2. Warm-up period occurs one hour before occupied start time or as calculated by Building Controller based on system performance history and outside air temperature. 3. Unoccupied period occurs whenever Occupied, Warm-up, or Cool-down are not in effect.

D. Typical Space Setpoints: 1. Heating-Occupied Period: a. Exam/Treatment, Conferences and Offices: 70 ºF with adjustment range of 65 to 70ºF. b. Storage Rooms: 65 ºF with adjustment range of 60 to 70 ºF. 2. Heating-Unoccupied Period: 55 ºF 3. Cooling-Occupied Period: a. Exam/Treatment, Conference and Offices: 75 ºF with adjustment range of 74 to 78 ºF. b. Storage Rooms: 72 ºF. 4. Cooling-Unoccupied: 85 ºF 5. Deadband: Systems with mechanical cooling shall maintain a minimum deadband of 5 ºF.

E. Main Heating Water Pumps: Existing Controls to remain.

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 0993

F. Operating Sequence - Domestic Hot Water Pumps: Operate pump during the occupied cycle.

4.03 VRF HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

A. Room thermostats to modulate heating and cooling to maintain set-point. B. Fan coils have supplemental auxiliary electric duct heaters. The electric duct coils are equipped with SCR controllers. During heating operation, the control sequence shall include the following: 1. The auxiliary heater shall provide supplemental heat with the VRV heat pump heating. 2. The auxiliary heater shall provide emergency heat when the VRV Heat pump heating is locked out. C. Fan coils are interlocked with operation of the existing HRU-1.

4.04 EXHAUST FANS

A. Exhaust Fan EF-200(gas room): 1. Relays or starters provided under Division 26. 2. Exhaust fan(s) operation shall be continuous and be supervised. 3. On fan command on, fan starts. 4. Input/Output Point Monitoring Summary: a. As a minimum, the following points and features are to be monitored and alarmed. Control Contractor shall add additional points necessary to accomplish sequence of operation and interface with other control equipment. b. Inputs: 1) Fan run status (BI) c. Outputs: 1) Fan start/stop (BO) d. General Alarms (any unscheduled fan shut-down) 1) Fan failure (annunciated)

4.05 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS

A. Enable circulation pumps with BAS time signal. Operation shall be based on aqua stat.

4.06 ALARMS

A. Any device that monitors status and fails to show status after 10 minutes will generate an alarm.

B. Any device that monitors status and shows status when the device is commanded off for 10 minutes will generate an alarm.

C. Any zone temperature sensor that is 4˚ F (adj) below occupied set point during an occupied period for 10 minutes (adj) will generate a low sensor out of range alarm.

D. Any zone temperature sensor that is 4˚ F (adj) above occupied set point during an occupied period for 30 minutes (adj) and the associated unit has mechanical cooling will generate a high sensor out of range alarm.

E. Sensor failure will generate a non-critical alarm.

F. High priority alarms are any alarms related to the electrical room exhaust fan, freeze protection, or smoke detection.

G. Medium priority alarms are any alarms related to supply or return fans and condenser units.

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 0993

H. Low priority alarms are any alarms related to DHWR pumps, general exhaust fans, or any other alarms not specifically identified with a priority status.

I. Alarm Categories: 1. Maintenance a. Filters b. Sensor out of Range 2. General a. DHWP CMD/STS b. EF CMD/STS 3. Important a. Software Freeze protection b. Failed Sensor/All c. Fan CMD/STS d. Building COM 4. Critical a. Hard Freeze Protection b. Duct Smoke detectors 5. Default a. Should not be utilized.

END OF SECTION

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the HVAC heating and cooling water systems. Provide pipe, pipe fittings, pumps, and related items required for complete piping system.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: ASTM and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable.

B. Labeling: All piping shall be continuously and legibly labeled on each length as required by codes and standards and including as a minimum, country of origin, manufacturers identification marking, wall thickness designation, and applicable standards and approvals. Fittings shall be labeled as required by the referenced standard.

C. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building unless approved by Code or Governing Authorities.

D. Definitions: Where piping fluid is not indicated in the following paragraphs, provide similar piping materials for similar fluids.

1.03 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details, performance characteristics for all equipment.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Black Steel Pipe: 1. Applications: a. Heating water 2. Pipe: Systems 10" or smaller, operating below 400 psi, schedule 40, standard black steel pipe ASTM A-106 or A-53. 3. Threaded Fittings: For above ground installations only. a. Banded class 120 cast iron fittings, ANSI B16.4 to 125 psi. b. Banded class 150 malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3 to 150 psi.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 1 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

4. Welding Fittings: Beveled ends, seamless fittings of the same type and class of piping above. 5. Flanged Fittings: For above ground installations only. a. Class 125 cast iron fittings, ANSI B16.2 including bolting to 125 psi. b. Class 150 steel welding neck flanges, ANSI B16.9 to 150 psi. c. Class 250 cast iron fittings, ANSI B16.1 including bolting to 250 psi. d. Class 300 steel welding neck flanges, ANSI B16.9 to 300 psi. e. Facing and Gasketing: Selected for service pressures and temperatures. Full-faced for cast iron and raised face for steel flanges.

B. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: a. Heating water 2. Pipe: Type L hard temper copper with soldered joints, ASTM B88. 3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder-joint fittings, ANSI B16.22. 4. Preinsulated Piping: Type K solder joint copper piping with 1" thick urethane insulation protected by 20 gauge PVC outer jacket. Rovanco "Insul/80," equivalent Rikwil or approved substitute.

C. Plastic Pipe: 1. Application: a. Snowmelt system below slab or where concealed. 2. Pipe: a. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing manufactured by PEX-a or Engel Method for closed loop heating service (with oxygen barrier): Tested/listed to ASTM E84, ASTM F876 and F877, and CSA B137.5 listed certified to NSF standards 14 and 61. Rated for 100 PSI at 180º F. Wirsbo AQUAPEX or approved. 3. Pre-insulated PEX: Insulation equivalent to 2” of fiberglass with carrier CPE pipe. Install with no joints below grade. PEX pipe to match #2 above. Rovanco, Ecoflex or approved. 4. Fittings: ASTM F1960 cold expansion fittings. Provide fittings of the type matching piping manufacture and recommended by the piping manufacturer for the service indicated.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Provide standard products recommended by the manufacturer for use in the service indicated, and which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and reduce corrosion. Victaulic "Clear Flow."

B. Welding Materials: Provide welding materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements.

C. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. 2. Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris "Bridgit" approved. 3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS.

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges. Pressure and temperature rating required for the service indicated.

F. Sleeve Seal: Rubber-link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link-Seal. For fire rated wall, floor or ceiling penetrations, 3-M "CP-25" caulk, "No. 303" putty and/or "PSS 7904" sealing system.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 2 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

G. Strainers: "Y-pattern," 300-psig ductile iron body, or Class 125 cast iron body with tapped blow- off connection and removable 20 mesh stainless steel screen. Victaulic Style 732 / W732, NIBCO, or engineer approved equal.

H. Tracer Wire: 14 gauge, single strand, copper wire with blue insulation for water, green for sanitary and storm sewers, and yellow for gas. 3M "DBY" direct bury splice kit required at all splices.

I. Valves up to 12": 1. Ball (to 2”): a. Two-piece, cast bronze body, full port, 600 psi WOG, T/S 585-70. b. Two-piece, forged bras body, standard port, 300 psi CWP, Victaulic P589. 2. Gate (to 3”): Bronze body, non-rising stem, 200 psi WOG, T/S-133. 3. Gate (4” to 12”): Iron body, non-rising stem, solid wedge, bolted bonnet, 200 psi WOG, F- 619. 4. Globe (shutoff): Bronze body, Teflon disc, 200 psi WOG, T/S-211Y. 5. Globe (throttling): Bronze body, full plug stainless steel disc, 600 psi WOG, T-276AP. 6. Butterfly: Ductile iron body, aluminum bronze, stainless steel, or electroless-nickel coated ductile iron disc, pressure responsive seat, and stem offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating. 300 psi WOG, Lugged body – LD-2000, Wafer body – WD-2000, Grooved body-Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal / AGS-Vic300. 7. Check: Bronze or iron body spring-assisted swing check for vertical or horizontal installation, 230 psi WOG, T/S-413B and F-918B, or Victaulic Series 716 and W715.

2.03 HEATING WATER, SPECIALTIES

A. Air Vents: Install at all system high points whether shown or not; fabricate of 2" diameter or larger pipe at least 12" long. At the high point of each main install an Armstrong No. 1AV autovent, or equivalent Taco, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Dunham-Bush approved substitute.

B. Triple Duty Valve: Combination spring loaded vertical check, calibrated balancing and shut off valve with balance point memory in angle or straight pattern as required or as shown on the Drawings. Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Thrush, Victaulic, Wheatley or approved substitute. 1. Triple Duty Valve Assembly: Valve assembly shall consist of a Victaulic Vic300 MasterSeal butterfly valve with memory stop and a Series 779 Venturi-Check. For 14” and larger sizes, AGS-Vic300 butterfly valve with a Series W715 check valve.

Automatic Flow Control Valves: Stainless steel ball valve with blow-out proof stem. Valve shall include forged brass body rated for 600 WOG and 325 deg. F. with differential pressure taps. Teflon ball seals and stainless steel flow cartridge. Flow control cartridge shall be replaceable for altering flows within the range of the valve size. Provide with label of flow rate. Nexus UM series or equal Griswold, TA Hydronics or approved

C. Circuit Setter and Balancing Valves: Globe style with calibrated handle style balancing fitting with differential pressure taps, brass or bronze body and trim. TA Hydronics STAD series, or equal Nexus, Wheatley or approved substitute. Valves shall only be used where specifically called out for balance valve, otherwise use flow control valve.

D. Flow Balancing Valves: Globe valve style balancing valve with differential pressure taps, locking position stop, and position readout. Brass or bronze body and trim up to 2”, iron body over 2”. Nibco, Tour & Andersson, Armstrong, Oventrop, or approved substitute.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 3 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

1. Coil-Hook-up Connections: Victaulic Koil-Kits Series 799 or 79V may be used at coil connections. The kit shall include a Series 786/787/78K circuit balancing valve, Series 78Y Strainer-Ball, Series 78U Union-Port fitting, with Series 78T ball valve and required coil hoses. A Style 793 and/or 794 differential pressure controller shall be provided as required. A meter shall be provided by the valve manufacturer that shall remain with the building owner after commissioning.

E. Pressurized Precharged Expansion Tank: Precharged diaphragmtype hydropneumatic tank with all necessary air elimination fittings. Install with ball valve on piping connection. Amtrol, Taco, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Wheatley or approved substitute.

F. Air Separators: Coalescing or centrifugal separation operation. Fabricated steel rated for 125 psi pressure with threaded, grooved, or flanged connections. Unit pressure drop shall not exceed one foot at design flow rate. Unit shall include internal air coalescing medium or galvanized steel strainer and perforated air collecting tube. Submittals shall include unit air and dirt elimination efficiencies at design flow. Include sediment collection area and bottom blowdown valve with hose connection. Install with high capacity float operated air vent. Spirovent, Bell & Gossett, Thrush, Taco, Armstrong, Caleffi, or approved.

2.04 HYDRONIC PUMPS

A. In-Line Circulators: Pipe mounted, in-line arrangement with mechanical seals with ceramic seal seats, suitable for continuous operation at 225 deg. F at head and capacity stated on Drawings. Cast iron impeller casing, oil lubricated bronze journal and thrust bearings or regreasable ball bearings (manufacturer's standard), 1750 rpm standard frame motor. Provide pressure gauge tappings on suction and discharge flanges. Impeller size not to exceed 90% of largest diameter impeller which will fit pump casing. Minimum horsepower and efficiency as indicated on Drawings and not less than will be required at any point of the impeller curve. Impeller to be retrimmed during balancing as required, see Section 230590. Bell & Gossett, Paco, Taco, Armstrong, Aurora, Pattereson, Wilo, Grundfos or approved substitute.

B. Small In-Line Circulators: Pipe mounted, in-line arrangement suitable for hot or cold water service at head and capacity stated on Drawings. Cast iron bronze casing, pumped, fluid lubricated and cooled aluminum oxide upper and lower radial bearings and metal impregnated carbon thrust bearing, stainless steel shaft and impeller and liquid filled. Minimum horsepower as indicated on Drawings and not less than will be required at any point of the impeller curve. Provide pressure gauge tappings on suction and discharge flanges. Mount in a manner to allow disassembly of pump and motor without disturbing piping. Taco, Grundfos, Wilo, Bell & Gossett, or approved substitute.

2.05 BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Subbase Materials: A graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag.

B. Finely-Graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve.

C. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to the required densities, and complying with AASHTO designation M145, Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5. or A-3.

2.06 SNOW MELT CONTROLLER

A. Provide Uponor single zone snow melt control system with slab ice sensor.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 4 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

B. Provide all conductors, conduit, sensors, and devices to operate system. See drawings for control schematic. Refer to manufactures installation guide for required conductor size and wiring.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings.

Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building (pitched for drainage). If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions.

C. Piping: Install for services as specified in Part 2. The following are Contractor's options. 1. Heating Water Piping: Standard black schedule 40 steel pipe and 125 pound black cast screwed or approved welding fittings for pressures up to 75 psi. Welded connections on all piping underground, piping in tunnel or tile or otherwise inaccessible and on all equipment room headers 4" and over. Weldolets, Threadolets, or schedule 80 shaped nipples may be used for take-offs up to half the nominal size of main.

3.02 PIPING JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material.

B. Ferrous Threaded Piping: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI 82.l; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave no more than 3 threads exposed.

C. Solder Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: In accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. "T-Drill" field formed tees may be utilized where the main is at least two pipe sizes larger than the branch.

D. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide.

E. Weld Pipe Joints: In accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: 1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0 degrees F.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 5 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt. 3. Install welding rings for buttwelded joints. 4. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10"; 8 welds for pipe sizes up to 20". 5. Build up welds with a stringer-bead pass, followed by a hot pass, followed by a cover of filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusion. 6. Do not weld out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to comply with requirements. 7. Install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated, or install regular "T" fitting at Contractor's option.

F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gasket.

G. Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with applicable industry standards: 1. Heat Joining of Thermoplastic Pipe: ASTM D-2657. 2. Making Solvent-Cemented Joints: ASTM D-2865 and ASTM F-402.

H. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing unions or fittings. Install in a manner which will prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion where the "joining of ferrous and non-ferrous piping" is indicated. Use brass valve or nipple with diameter to length ratio of 1:8 or greater in place of dielectric unions for copper to ferrous pipe.

I. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces.

J. Line Grades: Pitch hydronic piping 1" to 40' minimum to low point drips or drains.

K. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good installation practice.

L. Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations with grooved mechanical joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)

M. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment. 1. For water systems, Victaulic flexible couplings may be used to accommodate thermal growth, contraction, and for the elimination of expansion loops. (In accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.) Where loops are required, use flexible couplings on the loop.

3.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT

A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces.

B. Strainers: Install in a manner to permit access for cleaning and screen removal and with blow- off valve.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 6 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

C. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Use steel pipe sleeves through beams, footings, girders or columns and for all penetrations of walls or floors below grade. Where floor finish is ceramic tile, terrazzo, or similar material extend standard steel pipe sleeves 1-1/2" above finished floor. Fabricate sleeves 1" diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non-structural penetrations only.

D. Sleeve Caulking: Grout uninsulated pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and/or system at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors and ceiling.

E. Valves: Install valves in accordance with Section 23 05 00. Install control valves specified in other division 23 sections.

3.04 EXCAVATING

A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, to minimize the total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling. Comply with all applicable Federal and state safety regulations.

B. Width: Excavate for piping with 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of pipe, except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other work. Excavate for other mechanical work to provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances.

C. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand-excavate the bottom cut to accurate elevations. Support the following work on undisturbed soil at the bottom of the excavations: 1. Piping of 5" and less pipe/tube size. 2. Cast-in-place concrete.

D. Depth for Subbase Support: For large piping (6" pipe size and larger), tanks and where indicated for other mechanical work, excavate for installation of subbase material in the depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, 6" below bottom of work to be supported.

E. Depth for Exterior Piping: Excavate for exterior water-bearing piping so that the top of piping will not be less than 3' vertical distance below finished grade.

F. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where unsatisfactory soil condition at the bottom of excavation exists, excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil-bearing condition. Backfill with subbase material, compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth.

G. Rock and Boulder Removal: Refer to Division 1 for procedure on additional work, including additional excavating and backfilling, rock removal, etc.

H. Excavated Materials: Store excavated material (temporarily) near the excavation, in a manner which will not interfere with or damage the excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within the drip line). Retain excavated material which complies with the requirements for backfill material. Dispose of excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material.

Remove unused material from project site, and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 7 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

3.05 BACKFILLING

A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted wherever testing is indicated. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to a uniform firm density. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6" above wrapped, coated and plastic piping and tanks, and to center line of other tanks (where recommended by tank manufacturer, use "pea gravel" backfill). Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. Do not backfill with frozen materials.

3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on the Drawings. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation connections and start-up.

B. Lubrication: Lubricate all moving and rotating parts in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up.

C. Expansion Joint and Compensator Installation: Carefully align joint or compensator and make proper allowance for temperature of pipe at time of installation.

D. Air Vents: Conduct 1/4" copper tubing from high end of air chambers to accessible locations and terminate with screwdriver cock. Conduct 1/4" copper tubing from outlets of automatic air vents to floor drains indicated or to the outside when approved by Governing Authorities and Architect.

E. Pumps: Mount in a manner to allow disassembly of pump and motor without disturbing piping.

F. Mechanical contractor and balancing contractor shall be trained on installation, connection, and balancing procedures by certified representative of differential pressure control valves.

3.07 CLEANING

A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and equipment and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary.

B. Heating Water Piping Systems: 1. Add cleaning chemical in proper concentration to clean system of manufacturing and installation contamination and residue. 2. Fill, vent and circulate the system with this solution at design operating temperature. After circulating for four hours, bleed out cleaning solution by the addition of fresh water to the system. 3. Test for pH and add sufficient amount of the cleaning chemical to obtain a pH between 7 and 8. 4. Clean all strainers and remove start-up strainers (from suction diffusers) after the system has operated for one week.

3.08 TEST

A. General:

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 8 of 9

HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2100

1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

B. Repair: 1. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop-leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

C. Heating, Water Piping: 75 psig hydrostatic for 30 psig systems without loss for four hours.

D. Tanks and Equipment: Hydrostatic pressure to 1.5 times operating pressure.

END OF SECTION

1/25/2018 Wallowa MOB Addition Page 9 of 9

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the refrigerant piping system connecting refrigeration and HVAC equipment specified in other sections of these specifications. Provide pipe, pipe fittings and related items required for complete piping system.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: ASTM, and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable. Comply with federal and local regulations regarding the handling of refrigerant.

B. Labeling: All piping shall be continuously and legibly labeled on each length as required by codes and standards and including as a minimum, country of origin, manufacturer’s identification marking, wall thickness designation, and applicable standards and approvals. Fittings shall be labeled as required by the referenced standard. Tubular fixture traps shall be stamped with manufacturer’s mark and material thickness.

C. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and bear the ARI label.

D. Installation Contractor: Manufacturer's authorized installation and start-up agency normally engaged and experienced in air conditioning/refrigeration work and certified in the handling of refrigerant.

E. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

F. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details, and performance characteristics for each type and size of refrigeration equipment.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 5

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: Refrigerant. 2. Pipe: ASTM B88 type L or K or ASTM B280, Type ACR hard temper copper with soldered joints. Cleaned and sealed at the factory. 3. Refrigerant Fittings: ANSI/ASME B31.5 or SAE J 513-F, "Refrigeration Tube Fittings." Where conflicts occur, B31.5 shall govern. 4. Wrought-Copper Fittings and Unions ASME B16.22.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

C. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.03 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide the following equipment where they are not a part of the factory installed equipment accessories.] Select equipment for operation with the refrigerant being utilized and for the pressure and temperature conditions indicated. Sporlan, Alco, Henry, Detroit, or as listed for each equipment.

B. Thermostatic Expansion Valve: Capacity matched for the system, angle or straight through pattern external equalizer, brass body complete with capillary and remote sensing bulb.

C. Solenoid Valves: For installation in liquid, suction and/or hot gas circuit as indicated. Brass body, replaceable coil of voltage indicated.

D. Liquid and Moisture Indicators: Moisture and liquid indicator installed after the liquid line filter dryer.

E. Liquid Line Filter Dryer: Sealed container up to approximately 10 tons of capacity and replaceable desiccant dryer core and strainer on larger capacity systems.

F. Charging Valves: Quick coupling type connection with removable valve core.

G. Service Valves: Install liquid, suction and discharge line valves, all suitable for refrigerant used and location in the system, designed so as to be easily packed with pressure on the line and with wing caps that completely enclose valve stem. Install all purge valves, relief valves or other valves required for safe and proper operation of the system and as may be required by State or local codes. Detroit, Alco, Sporlan or Automatic Products approved substitute.

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 5

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. 1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions.

C. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Use Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing and make all changes in direction with specified fittings. 2. Lay out the refrigerant piping system in a manner to prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor and so that oil will return to the compressor. a. Install all horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward toward the compressor. b. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. c. Use double-suction riser for maximum compressor efficiencies if load variation is expected. d. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. e. Liquid lines may be installed level. f. Take special care to keep all tubing clean and dry. 3. Install all refrigerant piping straight and free from kinks and restrictions, properly supported to minimize vibration. Provide hangers at 5' spacing for 1/2" lines, 6' spacing for 1" lines and 8' spacing for 1-1/2" and larger lines. Provide flexible connections in lines at compressor unit. Submit complete diagram for approval. 4. Comply with the refrigerant piping installation instructions of the refrigeration equipment manufacturer.

3.02 PIPING JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material.

B. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide.

C. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

D. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces.

F. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment.

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 5

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300

3.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT

A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome-plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces.

B. Filters: Install in a manner to permit access for removal and replacement of filter cartridge.

C. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Fabricate sleeves 1" diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non-structural penetrations only.

D. Sleeve Caulking: Grout insulated pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and/or system at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors and ceiling.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch-up paint where necessary.

B. Refrigeration System Piping: If, for any reason, sanitized and sealed-at-the-mill tubing is not used, clean the tubing as follows: 1. Wipe each tube internally with a dry, lintless cloth followed with a clean lintless cloth saturated with recommended refrigerant. 2. Repeat until the saturated cloth is not discolored by dirt. 3. Wipe with a clean cloth saturated with compressor oil and squeezed dry. 4. Wipe with a dry, lintless cloth.

3.05 TEST

A. General: 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

B. Repair: Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop-leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

C. Refrigerant System: 1. When the refrigerant connections have been completed, close the compressor suction and discharge valves (or receiver outlet valve in the case of condensing unit) and test the balance of the system to near operating pressure with a dry nitrogen. 2. Carefully test all joints, using soap and water or other sudsing solution. After all joints are tested, discharge the gas and repair all leaks, then repeat the test with a mixture of nitrogen and R-410A and a halide torch or an electronic leak detector.

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 5

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 2300

3. Evacuate the system to remove moisture and non-condensables. Lower the absolute pressure with a vacuum pump to 1000 microns of mercury. Apply external heat as required to vaporize moisture. 4. Dehydrate each refrigerant circuit by satisfactory use of a vacuum pump before charging with refrigerant. Furnish all necessary refrigerant and oil for complete operating charge of the system. Upon completion of the work of construction, test all refrigeration equipment under normal operating conditions and leave in operating order. Adjust automatic temperature controls. 5. After the first 24 hours of operation, measure the pressure drop across the suction filter. If the pressure drop exceeds 5 pounds per square inch, replace the cartridge with a new one, retesting and replacing the cartridge and/or adjusting the system as necessary to achieve a pressure drop of less than 5 pounds per square inch in 24 hours.

END OF SECTION

02/11/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 5

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Air Distribution Materials as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Material characteristics and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Distribution Equipment Rating: In accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and bearing the AMCA label.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for all manufactured materials.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

C. For adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (inside the waterproofing system), include printed statement of volatile organic compound (VOC) content.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL

A. Sheet Metal Materials: 1. General Material Requirements: Comply with the Mechanical Code and SMACNA’S “HVAC Duct Construction. Standards – Metal and Flexible, Third Edition” for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other perfections. 2. All interior ducts shall be constructed with G-60 or better galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and A924/A924M Standards, LFQ, chem treat. Exterior ductwork or duct exposed to high humidity conditions (that is: kitchen exhausts, etc.) shall be G-90 or better galvanized steel, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and A924/A924M Standards, LFQ, chem. treat. 3. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL 181, Class 1 type listing. Lock-forming –quality, galvanized, sheet steel with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 or G90 coating designation: factory- applied, 0.10 mm (4-mil) PVC coating on exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions, and a minimum of 0.025 mm (1-mil) thickness on opposite surface. 4. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. 5. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed ducts and No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3 or No. 4 for exposed surfaces. 6. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209/B209M, Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. 7. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

8. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, ¼ inch (6 mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

B. Duct Fabrication requirements: Metal gauges, joints and reinforcement in accordance with Mechanical Code, ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. Ductwork shall be fabricated to the following pressure classifications: 1. Return ducts: 2” negative. 2. Supply ducts from fan discharge to VAV box inlet: 4” positive. VAV box discharge to diffuser: 1” positive. 3. Exhaust ducts: 1” negative.

C. Acoustical Duct and Plenum Lining: Flexible or rigid duct liner composed of resin bonded glass fibers. Greenguard® certified. Maximum thermal conductivity of 0.25 at 75°F. Johns Manville, Owens Corning, Knauf, and Certainteed approved, meeting NFPA 90A requirements for maximum flame spread and smoke developed and containing less than 0.1% by weight deca- PDE fire retardant. 1. Line ducts with lining to meet R-5 insulation value for installation inside the building insulation envelope, and R-8 for installation outside the building insulation envelope. Owens Corning "Aeroflex Plus" or equal Schuller, Certainteed, or approved equal. 2. Duct liner adhesive shall conform to ASTM C916. Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with fasteners conforming to SMACNA Standard MF-1-1971, Schuller Grip Nails or Gramweld welding pins. Apply fire-retardant type adhesive similar to Schuller No. 44 adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81-99, Insul-Coustic 22 or 3M equivalent on all leading edges, joints and seams.

D. Duct Tapes, Sealants, Adhesives & Gaskets: 1. Two-part sealing system with woven fiber, mineral gypsum impregnated tape and non- flammable adhesive. Hardcast "DT" tape and "FTA-20" adhesive, United "Uni-Cast" system, or accepted substitute. 2. For joints and seams exposed to the weather in lieu of soldering, United "Uni-Cast" system or approved. 3. Joint & Seam Sealants (Water Based): Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. 4. Joint & Seam Sealants (Solvent Based): Flexible. Non sag, solvent-release-curing, for use in low temperature applications. Shall be resistant to UV light and shall be UL 723 Listed and meet NFPA requirements for Class 1 ductwork. 5. Flange Gasket: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer which complies with UL standard 181 and 723 testing. The gasket shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type of material that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth. 6. Liner Adhesive: Water based, fire and moisture resistant, used to adhere insulation to metal duct. It shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 723 requirements. 7. Duct Liner Sealant: Water based sealant, fire and moisture resistant, used to encapsulate fiberglass duct insulation to eliminate airborne fibers. Must comply with UL requirements.

E. Optional Duct Joints for Sheet Metal Ducts: Prefabricated slide-on transverse duct connectors will be accepted. Duct constructed using prefabricated connection systems will refer to the manufacturer guidelines for sheet gage, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper joint reinforcements. "Ductmate System" by Ductmate Industries, Inc., Ward Duct Connectors, Inc., Mez Industries, Elgen, or acceptable substitute. Spiramir self-sealing round duct connector system meeting Class 3 leakage standards with EPDM o-ring seal.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

F. Exterior and Roof Mounted Ductwork: Construct roof mounted ductwork and other ductwork exposed to outside weather of galvanized steel outer jacket, two gauges heavier than equivalent ductwork with all joints soldered in a weather-proof manner with 2" of internal duct lining. Submit shop drawings.

G. Exposed to View Round Acoustic Supply Air Ductwork: Round and flat oval spiral seam galvanized sheet metal outer shell duct with 1" thick fiberglass insulation sandwiched between it and a perforated galvanized sheet metal inner liner. Provide factory manufactured fittings matching ductwork. United Sheet Metal, Rolock, Semco Air System, Robert Lloyd Sheet Metal, Arrow, Dees, Streimer Sheet Metal, Arjae Sheet Metal.

H. Exposed to View Spiral Seam Duct: Round and flat oval spiral seam duct shall be manufactured of galvanized steel sheet metal with spiral lock seam. Sizes up to 36" diameter or 36" wide shall be 22 gauge; sizes over 36" shall be 20 gauge. Reinforcement or bracing shall be as detailed on the Drawings. Matching fittings shall be manufactured of galvanized steel with continuous welded seams. Fittings up to 36" diameter or width shall be 20 gauge, fittings larger than 36" shall be 18 gauge.

I. Concealed Round Duct: Round and flat oval spiral seam duct shall be manufactured of galvanized sheet metal with spiral lock seam. Construction, gauges, and reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA standards. Fittings shall be manufactured of galvanized steel with spot welded or riveted and sealed seams or continuously welded seams. Snap lock longitudinal seam duct shall fully comply with SMACNA standards for duct gauge and seam type for appropriate pressure class. Adjustable elbows are prohibited.

J. Flexible Ductwork-Low Pressure: Insulated low pressure flexible duct, factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel helix seamless inner liner, wrapped with a nominal 1" thick insulation for installation inside the building insulation envelope, and 1-1/2”, 2” in eastern Oregon for installation outside the building insulation envelope, 1 pound/cubic foot density fiberglass insulation. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket, factory vapor resistance sealed at both ends of each section. The composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet the Class 1 requirements of NFPA Bulletin No. 90-A and be labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. The duct shall have factory sealed double air seal (interior and exterior) to assure an airtight installation. Genflex, ATCO, Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Manual Volume Dampers: Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed; single plate up to 12" wide; multiple over 12" wide. Hem both edges 1/2" and flange sides 1/2". Use Young, Duro-Dyne, Elgen, MAT, Pottoroff or accepted substitute damper accessories. Young numbers are shown. 1. No. 605 bearing set with No. 403 regulator for dampers up to 24" long. 2. For dampers over 24" long use No. 660 3/8" rod, No. 656 end bearing and No. 403 regulator. 3. Where damper regulators are not readily accessible, use No. 660 or No. 661 rod extensions and No. 301 and No. 315 concealed damper regulators or MAT cable operated dampers as required.

Location of all volume dampers is not necessarily shown on Drawings; minimum required is one in each supply, return or exhaust main, and one in each branch.

B. Fire Dampers:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

1. Provide dampers with rating equal to surrounding construction where penetrations are made through fire-resistant rated construction per applicable codes. Provide access panels of proper fire rating. Size dampers to maintain free area through damper same as unobstructed run of duct or opening. 2. Static Fire Dampers: Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA No. 90A and UL labeled. 3. Dynamic Fire Dampers: Constructed and approved in accordance with UL Standard 555 for horizontal or vertical installations. Selection of dampers shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended CFM at 4" of static pressure for unducted dampers and 8" of static pressure for ducted dampers.

C. Fire Rated Thermal Blanket and Diffuser Fire Damper: UL listed, non-asbestos ceramic thermal blanket for use on ceiling diffusers with curtain type fire damper to fit diffuser neck indicated.

D. Smoke Dampers: 1. Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA No. 90A, UL labeled. Provide dampers with rating equal to surrounding construction where penetrations are made through fire- resistant rated construction per applicable codes. 2. Provide access panels of proper fire rating. Size dampers to maintain free area through damper same as unobstructed run of duct or opening. 3. Each damper shall have a minimum leakage rating of Class II under UL555S for use in smoke control systems. 4. In addition to the leakage rating specified herein, the dampers and their actuators shall be classified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). Appropriate electric motorized operators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of fabrication and damper/actuator assembly shall be factory cycled 10 times to assure operation. Assembly shall meet all applicable UL555S criteria for both damper and actuators. Damper shall be power open-fail close design. 5. Damper manufacturer shall provide factory assembled minimum 20 gage steel sleeve. Damper shall be sealed to the sleeve with a 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed sealant material. 6. Provide necessary relay to drop power to smoke damper motor when smoke detector at associated unit detects smoke and when unit is not running. 7. Provide all necessary wiring and devices to close dampers on a signal from the building fire alarm system.

E. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: 1. Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA No. 90A, UL labeled. Provide dampers with rating equal to surrounding construction where penetrations are made through fire- resistant rated construction per applicable codes. 2. Provide access panels of proper fire rating. Size dampers to maintain free area through damper same as unobstructed run of duct or opening. 3. Each damper shall be classified by UL as a “corridor damper” for installation in tunnel corridors, shall be rated for one hour fire resistance under UL555, and shall have a minimum leakage rating of Class II under UL555S for use in smoke control systems. Each damper shall bear a UL label designating the damper as “corridor damper.” 4. In addition to the leakage rating specified herein, the dampers and their actuators shall be classified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). Appropriate electric motorized operators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of fabrication and damper/actuator assembly shall be factory cycled 10 times to assure operation. Assembly shall meet all applicable UL555 and UL555S criteria for both damper and actuators. Damper shall be power open-fail close design.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

5. Damper manufacturer shall provide factory assembled minimum 20 gage steel sleeve. Damper shall be sealed to the sleeve with a 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed sealant material. Each corridor damper shall be equipped as standard with an electric fusible link. These fusible links shall be rated for 165 deg. F (74 deg. C) and shall be easily resettable for system testing. 6. Provide necessary relay to drop power to smoke damper motor when smoke detector at associated unit detects smoke and when unit is not running. 7. Provide all necessary wiring and devices to close dampers on a signal from the building fire alarm system. 8. Provide area smoke detectors in the corridor arranged to activate the dampers.

F. Locking Connection Straps: 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self-locking straps. Panduit, Elgen, or accepted substitute.

G. Connection Fittings: Connections to non-metallic ducts manufactured sheet metal "spin-in" fittings. Genflex, Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute.

H. Access Doors In Sheet Metal Work: 1. Hollow core double construction of same or heavier gauge material as duct in which installed. Use no door smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 18" by 24" where personnel must pass through infrequently. Use 24" by 60" minimum for filters and more frequent maintenance. Use indicated Ventlok hinges and latches or equivalent Elgen on all doors. a. 100 series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18" maximum dimension. b. 200 series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 series on high pressure systems. 2. Construct doors up to 18" maximum dimension with 1" overlap, furr and gasket with 3/4" by 1/8" sponge rubber. Fit larger doors against 1-1/2" by 1/8" or angle frame and gasket with 3/4" by 1/8" sponge rubber or felt.

I. Visual Access Panels: Install visual access panels in inlet side of all coils, at all motorized dampers, and at all fire dampers where otherwise indicated on Drawings. Construct of 18 gauge steel, 20 gauge cold rolled cover, latex gasket and 1/4" plate glass. Minimum 12" by 12" unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate with manufacturer of air handling equipment, in mixing plenums, at coils, etc. Young Regulator Company No. 1311, or accepted substitute.

J. Control Dampers: Construct of aluminum frame and aluminum airfoil blades with axle shafts and/or operating “jackshafts” with interconnecting blade linkages in the side channels of the frame to provide coordinate tracking of all blades. Interlocking multi-blade type, except where either dimension is less than 6", a single blade may be used. Opposed blade type on all modulating dampers and parallel blades on all two position dampers. Provide with stainless steel, silicone, or vinyl jamb seal and vinyl or silicone blade seals. Damper assembly rated for maximum air leakage of 3 CFM per square foot at 1" wg pressure or less and with interconnecting blade linkages in the side channels of the frame. Performance rating for the damper shall be tested under the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Greenheck VCD-40, Ruskin CD 50 or TAMCO Series 1000.

K. Anti-Backdraft Dampers: Connected, gasket-edged aluminum blades set in 14 gauge or heavier steel frame; brass, nylon or Teflon bearings; equip with spring helper with tension adjustment feature or with adjustable counterweight and adjust to open when not more than 0.10" wg pressure is applied. Ruskin CBS-4, Greenheck, Pacific Air Products, Air Balance, Controlair, Pottorff or accepted substitute.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

L. Splitter Dampers: Same specification as manual volume dampers except blade dimension in direction of air flow to be minimum 12" in all cases. Location as shown on Drawings. Splitter damper operators shall be as shown in SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Manual.

M. Opposed Blade Volume Damper: Install opposed blade volume damper in each zone supply duct on discharge of multi-zone units and where indicated on Drawings. Young No. 817 or accepted substitute.

N. Turning Vanes: 1. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA’S “HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible”; Figure 4-3 “Vanes and Vane Runners” and Figure 4-4 “Vane Support in Elbows”. 2. Turning Vanes shall be 2” or 4” double wall fabricated from the same material as the duct. Mounting rails shall have insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. 3. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that require quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have insert tabs that align the vanes automatically.

O. Flexible Connections: Flexible duct connectors shall be used to isolate vibrations and noises that may be transmitted by fans or blowers to ductwork. The flexible duct connector is an air- tight and water proof flexible connection. Connectors will comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.Ventglass, Duro-Dyne, Elgen, or accepted substitute. 1. Indoor Flexible Connector Fabrics: a. Fire Retardant Neoprene coated Fiberglass resistant to chemicals, gasoline and grease: 1) Meets NFPA 701 2) Minimum Weight: 32 oz/sq.yd. 3) Tensile Strength: 500 lbs in the warp and 500 lbs in the filling 4) Service Temperature: -40 to 200 deg F b. Fire Retardant Neoprene coated Fiberglass for high pressure applications and large ducts: 1) Meets NFPA 701 2) Minimum Weight: 40 oz/sq.yd.’ 3) Tensile Strength: 630 lbs in the warp and 465 lbs in the filling 4) Service Temperature: 285 deg F 2. Outdoor Flexible Connector: Glass Fabric coated with weatherproof Hypalon resistant to UV Rays, ozone, chemicals, and grease. a. Meets NFPA 701 b. Minimum Weight: 24 oz/sq.yd. c. Tensile Strength: 350 lbs in the warp and 250 lbs in the filling d. Service Temperature: -50 to 300 deg F

P. Gravity Exhaust Head:

1. Aluminum cap with backdraft dampers on relief only, curb connection, flashing, 1/2" mesh galvanized bird screen and hinged access. Greenheck, Carnes, Cook or accepted substitute. 2. Install with automatic relief / outside air intake damper in curb as indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. See plans for Titus numbers.

B. Finishes:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

1. Steel: Flat white enamel prime coat, factory applied on ceiling diffusers. Others are to have a baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect. 2. Aluminum: Anodized clear finish unless indicated otherwise.

C. Manufacturers: Titus, Carnes, Krueger, Price, Nailor and Tuttle & Bailey are accepted substitutes where only Titus model numbers are listed. Where other manufacturer's products are listed and/or "accepted substitute" is indicated, only the products or an accepted substitute for that item shall be provided.

D. Ceiling Matched Return and/or Exhaust Register: To match adjacent ceiling outlets. Use in spaces containing ceiling diffusers and/or T-bar ceilings. Titus PAR.

E. Sidewall or Ceiling Return or Exhaust Register: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers. Titus 350RL series.

F. Sidewall or Ceiling Return, Exhaust or Relief Grille: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers. Titus 350 series.

G. Perforated Face Diffusers: 1 to 4-way pattern modular control. Pattern of distribution as indicated. Titus PMC.

2.04 LOUVERS

A. General: Frame and sill styles compatible with adjacent substrate, specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support for weatherproof installation. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver. Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. On inside face of exterior louvers, provide anodized aluminum wire insect screen mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. AMCA licensed performance ratings.

B. Blades set 3 to 5-inches on center, 37.5 degree angle with rain hook on blade, minimum blade thickness 0.080-inch, drainable blade style. Minimum 57 percent free area for 48-by 48-inch unit. Maximum water penetration 0.01 ounce water psf free area at 1000 FPM. Maximum intake pressure drop of 0.10-inch W.G. at 750 FPM free velocity. Provide downspouts in jambs, designed to drain water from louver for minimum water cascade from blade to blade. Provide drain gutter in head frame and each blade.

C. Refer to Drawings for free area required.

D. Provide access door in duct to clean birdscreen.

E. Finish: factory prime coat finish color to be selected. Conform to AAMA 605.2. Apply coating following cleaning, and pretreatment. Dry louvers before final finish application. 1.2 mils total dry film thickness when baked at 450 degrees F for ten minutes. F. Manufacturers: Ruskin Manufacturing Model ELF6375DX, Pottorff, Carnes, Cesco, Greenheck or approved equivalent.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Air Handling Equipment Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start-up.

B. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all obstructions such as ceiling bars, electrical conduit, lights, ductwork, etc.

C. Filters: Install specified filters or accepted substitute temporary construction filters in supply units and systems prior to start-up or use for drying and/or temporary heat. Replace prior to acceptance of project.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Size and air handling characteristics shall be as shown on the Drawings.

B. Locate, arrange, and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Locate registers in tee-bar ceilings with diffusers centered on the tile unless indicated otherwise.

3.03 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION

A. Delivery, Storage and Handling: 1. Protect shop fabricated and factory fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings with a polyethylene film with a high-tack pressure sensitive adhesive to attach to the ductwork and accessories. 2. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with a polyethylene film with a high-tack pressure sensitive waterproof wrapping.

B. Support: Install ductwork with 1" wide strap cradle hangers not more than 8' on centers or as required by code. Support terminal units independent of adjacent ductwork. Attach to available building construction according to good practices for materials involved. Manufactured hanger system acceptable in lieu of fabricated hangers at contractors option. Ductmate “Clutcher” system or approved.

C. Fan and Air Handling Unit Flexible Connections: Install flexible connections in ductwork at all rotating equipment.

D. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width in plane of turn or make them square and provide single wall, turning vanes.

E. Fittings: Make transitions and take-offs as shown on Drawings. Provide volume dampers and splitter dampers as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Saddle tees are not allowed.

F. Acoustical Duct Lining: Acoustically line all fan unit intake and discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as lined on the Drawings, all sheet metal ductwork specified per Section 23 0700 as insulated, where exposed to view or subject to damage in areas such as mechanical rooms, and, at the Contractor's option, all insulated ductwork specified in Section 23 0700. The duct size noted on the Drawings is the clear opening of the duct with insulation. Insulation shall not reduce duct size listed.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

1. All duct designated to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with a fire-resistant, fiber-bonding coating, or covering (composite, polymer, vinyl or neoprene) that reduces airflow resistance and controls fiber release. The duct lining shall be adhered to the sheet metal with 100% coverage of a fire retardant adhesive. The coated surface of the duct liner shall face the airstream. When width of duct exceeds 12” and also when height exceeds 24”, use corrosion resistant mechanical fasteners 12” on center maximum lateral spacing and 18” on center maximum longitudinal spacing. Start fastening within 3” of upstream transverse edge of the liner and within 3” of the longitudinal joint. Mechanical fasteners shall be either impact-driven or weld-secured and shall not pierce the duct walls. Fasteners and washers of the specified type and length shall be used assuring no greater than 10% compression of the liner thickness. Installation shall be made so that no fastener pins protrude into the airstream. No gaps or loose edges shall occur in the insulation. Top pieces shall be supported by the side pieces. Provide insulated build out frames for attaching dampers at running vanes where required. 2. All transverse and longitudinal abutting edges of duct lining shall be sealed and lapped 3” with a heavy coat of approved adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All upstream transverse edges shall be installed with sheet metal nosings. All raw exposed edges of lining shall be ‘buttered’ with approved adhesive.

G. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the Drawings. Provide a minimum of one volume damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch. Install dampers in fiberglass ductwork (where fiberglass ductwork is allowed) with galvanized sheet metal sleeves of sheet metal gauges required for metal duct systems of the same dimensions.

H. Duct Insulation: Specified in Section 23 0700.

I. Sleeves: Provide galvanized sheet metal plaster ring around ductwork penetrating exposed finished walls. Sleeve and flash all duct penetrations through exterior walls in an air tight and weatherproof manner.

J. Plenums: Construct sheet metal plenums and partitions of not lighter than 18 gauge galvanized steel and reinforce with 1-1/2" by 1/2" by 1/8" angles as required to prevent drumming or breathing.

K. Access: Install necessary access opening and covers for cleaning, wiring or servicing motors, filters, fans, both entering and leaving air sides of coils, fire and/or smoke dampers and to other equipment located within or blocked by sheet metal work.

L. Sealing: Caulk, seal, grout and/or tape ductwork and plenums to make airtight at seams, joints, edges, corners and at penetrations. Solder all seams, joints, etc., on all ductwork exposed to the weather. Install specified tape in accordance with manufacturer's requirements using degreaser on surfaces to be taped and wiped to eliminate moisture.

M. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Install in full extended condition, free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. 2. Make all joints and connections with 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self- locking straps and make connections to non-metallic ducts with sheet metal sleeves or manufactured sheet metal "spin-in" fittings. 3. On vertically suspended ducts, secure with a minimum of three sheet metal screws on a maximum of 8" on center.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 10

AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct test, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days’ advance notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section.

D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures).

E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.”

3.05 NEW DUCTWORK CLEANING

A. Store all ductwork materials on pallets or above grade, protected from weather, dirt/mud and other construction dust.

B. Remove all accumulated dust, dirt, etc. from each duct section as it is being installed.

C. Prior to installation of diffusers, grilles and registers, install temporary system filters and cover all diffuser, grille and register openings with temporary 25% efficiency filter materials and start the fan systems. Operate fans a minimum of 8 hours. Remove all temporary filters at the end of that period.

D. Clean all diffusers, grilles and registers just prior to project final completion.

3.06 EXISTING DUCT CLEANING

A. Power vacuum and air wash with compressed air the interior of the existing supply and exhaust ductwork, from the connection with new ductwork to the termination point at the supply or exhaust register. Ductwork cleaning shall be done by a subcontractor who is regularly engaged in this work. Powermaster or accepted substitute.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 10

HVAC FANS 23 3400

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Fans as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Equipment capacity and size as indicated in the equipment lists on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each fan.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXHAUST FANS AND UNITS

A. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan (Direct Drive): Curb mounted on roof; vertical shaft, direct driven, open BI wheel as shown on Drawings with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings; fan duty motor; bird screen; weatherproof aluminum housing for mounting on square base; capacity as indicated on Drawings. Motor located outside the air stream. Casing to be easily removed for service. Motor and fan assembly to be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide backdraft damper in curb. Provide switch with pilot light for each fan so indicated. Provide factory mounted disconnect. Greenheck G, Soler & Palau RED, Jen Fan RED, Carnes VEDK, Acme PRN, PennBarry DOMEX, Cook ACE-D, Twin City DCRD or approved. All motors shall be ECM with manual speed adjustment.

B. Inline Cabinet Exhaust Fan : Belt or direct drive (see drawings), forward curved centrifugal wheel, sleeve bearings, motor and wheel and external spring vibration isolators; provide duct connection and backdraft dampers or motorized damper on discharge of exhaust fan. Size and capacity as indicated on Drawings. Provide neoprene flexible connections on intake and discharge. For Direct Drive Fans, provide with E.C. motor with integral speed control device. Carnes, Greenheck, Cook, Twin City, or approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2

HVAC FANS 23 3400

3.02 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be supported and seismically anchored on leveled, flashed and counterflashed curbs anchored to resist seismic forces and suitable for the roof construction. Minimum curb height shall be 12" above the roof unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section.

B. Make all piping, electrical and duct penetrations for each equipment within the curb unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Piping and electrical conduit routed above and across the roof shall be supported on flashed and counterflashed curbs with pipe guides anchored to the curbs in "pitch pockets." Submit shop drawings on other arrangements for approval.

3.03 CONTROLS

A. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Daikin VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) AURORA system for cold climate installation, Daikin or approved substitute. Daikin is described below and is the basis of design. If another manufacturer is used the contractor shall be responsible for re-engineering the refrigerant system.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), in accordance with ANSI/UL 1995 – Heating and Cooling Equipment and bear the Listed Mark.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

C. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function.

D. Mechanical equipment for wind-born debris regions shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7-2010 and installed to resist the wind pressures on the equipment and the supports.

E. The condensing unit will be factory charged with R-410A.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.05 STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY

A. Daikin North America LLC warrants original owner of the non-residential building, multifamily residence or residence in which the Daikin products are installed that under normal use and maintenance for comfort cooling and conditioning applications such products (the “Products”) will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty applies to compressor and all parts and is limited in duration to ten (10) years starting from the ‘’installation date’’ which is one of the two dates below: 1. The installation date is the date that the unit is originally commissioned, but no later than 18 months after the manufacture date noted on the unit’s rating plate. 2. If the date the unit is originally commissioned cannot be verified, the installation date is three months after the manufacture date.

Complete warranty details available from your local Daikin representative or at www.daikincomfort.com.

1.06 HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN

A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 1. The variable capacity heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Daikin Variable Refrigerant Volume Series (heat and cool model) system as specified.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators, branch selector boxes, REFNET ™ joints and headers, a three-pipe refrigeration distribution system using PID control and Daikin VRV  condenser unit. 3. The condenser shall be a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat recovery, multi-zone air- conditioning system with variable speed inverter driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant. 4. The condensing unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the condensing unit nominal capacity. All zones are each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control. 5. A dedicated hot gas pipe shall be required to ensure optimum heating operation performance a. Two-pipe, heat recovery systems utilizing a lower temperature mixed liquid/gas refrigerant to perform heat recovery are not acceptable due to reduced heating capabilities. 6. The Daikin condensing unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models FXFQ, FXHQ, FXMQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXTQ, FXDQ, FXZQ, FXUQ, FXEQ, FXAQ and FXMQ_MF, and shall range in capacity from 7,500 Btu/h to 96,000 Btu/h in accordance with Daikin’s engineering data book detailing each available indoor unit. a. The indoor units shall be connected to the condensing unit utilizing Daikin’s REFNET ™ specified piping joints and headers to ensure correct refrigerant flow and balancing. T style joints are not acceptable for a variable refrigerant system. 7. Operation of the system shall permit either individual cooling or heating of each indoor unit simultaneously or all of the indoor units associated with each branch of the cool/heat selector box (BSQ_T / BS_Q54T). Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Controller, an Intelligent Manager or a BMS interface. 8. Branch selector boxes: a. The branch selector boxes shall have the capacity to control up to 290 MBH (cooling) downstream of the branch selector box. b. Each branch of the branch selector box shall consist of three electronic expansion valves, refrigerant control piping and electronics to facilitate communications between the box and main processor and between the box and indoor units. c. The branch selector box shall control the operational mode of the subordinate indoor units. The use of three EEV’s ensures continuous heating during defrost (multiple condenser systems), no heating impact during changeover and reduced sound levels. d. The use of solenoid valves for changeover and pressure equalization shall not be acceptable due to refrigerant noise. 9. The RELQ_TA condensing unit model numbers and the associated number of connectable indoor units per RELQ_TA condensing unit is indicated in the following table. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled.

NOMINAL CAPACITY MAXIMUM NUMBER OF MODEL NUMBER (Tons) INDOOR UNITS RELQ72TATJU 6 12 RELQ96TATJU 8 16 RELQ120TATJU 10 20 RELQ144TATJU 12 25 RELQ192TATJU 16 33 RELQ240TATJU 20 41

B. VRV Aurora Series FEATURES AND BENEFITS 1. Voltage Platform - Heat Recovery condensing units shall be available with a 208- 230V/3ph/60Hz power supply. 2. Low Ambient Heating – Unit shall provide air cooled heating operation down to -22°FWB (- 30°CWB) as standard.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3. Enhanced Heating Capacity – System shall provide 100% heat capacity up to 0°FWB (- 18°CWB), up to 85% of nominal capacity in heating operation at -13°FWB (-25°CWB) and up to 60% of nominal capacity in heating operation at -22°FWB (-30°CWB). 4. Stable operation – System shall provide stable inverter operation at varied ambient conditions. 5. No drain pan heater – System shall be capable of heating operation at temperatures below 0°FWB (-18°CWB) without the need of a drain pan heater. 6. Auto Auxiliary Heat Changeover – System shall, below the field selected outdoor ambient temperature, provide signal to initiate auxiliary or back up heat. 7. Advanced Zoning - A single system shall provide for up to 41 zones. 8. Independent Control - Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve with up to 2000 positions for independent control. 9. VFD Inverter Control and Variable Refrigerant Temperature - Each condensing unit shall use high efficiency, variable speed all “inverter” based flash vapor injection compressor(s) coupled with inverter fan motors to optimize part load performance. The system capacity and refrigerant temperatures shall be modulated automatically to set suction and condensing pressures while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads. The control will be automatic and customizable depending on load and weather conditions. a. Indoor shall use PID to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition and optimize efficiency. 10. Configurator software - Each system shall be available with configurator software package to allow for remote configuration of operational settings and also for assessment of operational data and error codes. a. If this software is not provided by an alternate manufacturer, for each individual outdoor unit the contractor shall do the settings manually and keep detailed records for future maintenance purposes. 11. Defrost Heating – Multiple condenser VRV Aurora systems shall maintain continuous heating during defrost operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) defrost operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature. 12. Oil Return Heating – VRV Aurora systems shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return during heating operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature. 13. Low Ambient Cooling - Each system shall be capable of low ambient cooling operation to - 4°FDB (-20°CDB). 14. Flexible Design – a. Systems shall be capable of up to 540ft (165m) [623 ft. (190m) equivalent] of linear piping between the condensing unit and furthest located indoor unit. b. Systems shall be capable of up to 1640ft (500m) total “one-way” piping in the piping network. c. Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 295ft (90m) between the condensing unit and the indoor units. d. Systems shall be capable of up to 295ft (90m) from the first REFNET ™ / branch point. e. The condensing unit shall have the ability to connect an indoor unit evaporator capacity of up to 200% of the condensing unit nominal capacity. f. Systems shall be capable of 98ft vertical separation between indoor units. g. Condensing units shall be supported with a fan motor ESP up to 0.32” WG as standard to allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short circuiting. 15. Oil return – Each system shall be furnished with a centrifugal oil separator and active oil recovery cycle. 16. Simple wiring – Systems shall use 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, stranded, non-shielded and non- polarized daisy chain control wiring. 17. Space saving – Each system shall have a condensing unit module footprint no larger than 66-11/16” x 48-7/8” x 30-3/16” (1694mm x 1242mm x 767mm).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

18. Advanced diagnostics – Systems shall include a self-diagnostic, auto-check function to detect a malfunction and display the type and location. 19. Each condensing unit shall incorporate contacts for electrical demand shedding with optional 3 stage demand control with 12 customizable demand settings. 20. Advanced controls – Each system shall have at least one remote controller capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units. 21. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet or LonWorks or Modbus building management systems. 22. Low sound levels - Each system shall use indoor and condensing units with quiet operation as low as 27 dB(A).

C. PERFORMANCE: 1. The VRV RELQ_TA system shall perform as indicated below:

SYSTEM IEER SYSTEM IEER MODEL NUMBER (Ducted) (Non-Ducted) RELQ72TATJU 20.80 24.00 RELQ96TATJU 19.10 24.80 RELQ120TATJU 19.60 23.40 RELQ144TATJU 18.60 22.50 RELQ192TATJU 19.00 22.10 RELQ240TATJU 18.60 21.10

SYSTEM SCHE SYSTEM SCHE MODEL NUMBER (Ducted) (Non-Ducted) RELQ72TATJU 22.60 26.10 RELQ96TATJU 19.70 25.70 RELQ120TATJU 21.40 26.70 RELQ144TATJU 23.80 25.50 RELQ192TATJU 21.20 25.50 RELQ240TATJU 20.80 24.90

SYSTEM EER SYSTEM EER MODEL NUMBER (Ducted) (Non-Ducted) RELQ72TATJU 13.70 15.80 RELQ96TATJU 12.50 15.30 RELQ120TATJU 12.40 13.70 RELQ144TATJU 12.60 12.90 RELQ192TATJU 12.70 12.50 RELQ240TATJU 11.70 12.30

SYSTEM COP@47°F SYSTEM COP@47°F MODEL NUMBER (Ducted) (Non-Ducted) RELQ72TATJU 3.68 4.30 RELQ96TATJU 3.44 4.25 RELQ120TATJU 3.51 3.98 RELQ144TATJU 3.55 3.81 RELQ192TATJU 3.59 3.85 RELQ240TATJU 3.52 3.68

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

SYSTEM COP@17°F SYSTEM COP@17°F MODEL NUMBER (Ducted) (Non-Ducted) RELQ72TATJU 2.30 2.50 RELQ96TATJU 2.25 2.50 RELQ120TATJU 2.25 2.25 RELQ144TATJU 2.20 2.20 RELQ192TATJU 2.15 2.20 RELQ240TATJU 2.13 2.20

2. Performance Conditions: a. Cooling: Indoor temperature of 80°FDB (26.7°CDB), 67°FWB (19.5°CWB) and outdoor temperature of 95°FDB (35°CDB). b. Heating: Indoor temperature of 70°FDB (21.1°CDB) and outdoor temperature of 47°FDB (8.3°CDB), 43°FWB (6.1°CDB). c. Equivalent piping length: 25ft (7.5m) 3. Cooling or Cooling Dominant Operation: a. The operating range in cooling or cooling dominant simultaneous cooling/heating will be 23°FDB (-5°CDB) ~ 122°FDB (50°CDB). b. Cooling mode indoor room temperature range will be 57-77°FWB (13.8 - 25°CWB). c. Each system as standard shall be capable of onsite reprogramming to allow low ambient cooling operation down to -4°FDB (-20°CDB). 4. Heating or Heating Dominant Operation: a. The operating range in heating or heating dominant simultaneous cooling/heating will be -22° – 61°FWB (-30 – 16°CWB). 1) If an alternate equipment manufacturer is selected, the mechanical contractor shall provide, at their own risk and cost, all additional material and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance b. Heating mode indoor room temperature range will be 59°FDB - 80°F DB (15°CDB – 26.7°CDB).

1.07 EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical: 1. The power supply to the condensing unit shall be:

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VOLTAGE RANGE 208-230V / 3ph / 60 Hz 187V – 253V (±10%)

MODEL MCA MOP COMPRESSOR RLA RELQ72TATJU 60.8 70 20.7 RELQ96TATJU 76.5 80 36.8 RELQ120TATJU 83.4 90 39.3 RELQ144TATJU 60.8 + 60.8 70 + 70 21.6 + 21.6 RELQ192TATJU 76.5 + 76.5 80 + 80 38.1 + 38.1 RELQ240TATJU 83.4 + 83.4 90 + 90 40.4 +40.4

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

B. Wiring: 1. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non-shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable. 2. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one condensing unit with one 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring installation. 3. The control wiring maximum lengths shall be as shown below:

CONDENSER TO CONDENSER TO INDOOR UNIT TO CENTRAL INDOOR UNIT REMOTE CONTROL CONTROLLER CONTROL 6,560ft (2,000m) 3,280ft (1,000m) 1640 ft. (500m) WIRING LENGTH WIRE TYPE 16/18 AWG, 2 wire, non-polarity, non-shielded, stranded

C. Refrigerant Piping: 1. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping lengths up to 540ft (165m) actual or 623ft (190m) equivalent from the condensing unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 1640ft (500m) of piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295ft (90m) maximum vertical difference, without any oil traps or additional components. 2. REFNET™ piping joints and headers shall be used to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance. a. T style joints shall not be acceptable as this will negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance.

D. Paint/Corrosion Resistance: 1. Paint and corrosion resistance shall be at a minimum per the table below:

VRV COATING COMPONENT SURFACE THICKNESS BASE MATERIAL TREATMENT External & Internal Surface EXTERNAL Galvanized steel POLYESTER ≧1.5 mils PANEL BASE EXTERNAL Galvanized steel POLYESTER ≧1.5 mils FRONT PANEL PILLAR Galvanized steel POLYESTER ≧1.5 mils COMPRESSOR ASTM material Resin Paint ≧0. 78 mils COVER FIN GUARD Iron wire Resin Paint ≧0. 79 mils FAN GUARD AND Polypropylene No treatment required N/A DRUM FAN Acrylonitrile - glass No treatment required N/A FAN MOTOR Resin No treatment required N/A FRAME FAN MOTOR Carbon steel No treatment required N/A SHAFT FAN MOTOR Galvanized steel POLYESTER ≧1.5 mils SUPPORT HEAT Polymer Anti-corrosion Salt Spray 1000 hours, EXCHANGERS Aluminum surface treatment blister rating 10 (FIN ONLY) ELECTRICAL Hot-dip zinc- No treatment required N/A

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

PARTS BOX coated steel Glass cloth / Glass ELECTRICAL nonwoven cloth Insulation Varnish No specific thickness PARTS BOARD material Carbon steel wire High corrosion SCREWS ≧0. 28 mils rods resistance treatment

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OUTDOOR/CONDENSING UNIT

A. General: 1. The condensing unit is designed specifically for use with VRV series components. 2. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled in the USA and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. 3. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of Daikin inverter flash vapor injection scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports, liquid receiver and suction accumulator. 4. High/Low pressure gas line, liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the condensing and indoor units. 5. The condensing unit can be wired and piped with access from the left, right, rear or bottom. 6. The connection ratio of indoor units to condensing unit shall be permitted up to 200% of nominal capacity. 7. Each condensing system shall be able to support the connection of up to 41 indoor units dependent on the model of the condensing unit. 8. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The condensing unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further reduced noise during night time or via an external input. 9. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming. 10. The condensing unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side installation. 11. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure sensor and switch, low pressure sensor, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. 12. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various indoor units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature. 13. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation. Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation. 14. The condensing unit shall be capable of heating operation at -22°FWB (-20°CWB) ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls or an auxiliary heat source. 15. The multiple condenser VRV Aurora systems shall continue to provide heat to the indoor units in heating operation while in the defrost mode.

B. Unit Cabinet: 1. The condensing unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.

C. Fan:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct-drive 350, 400 or 800W fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter. Reference table below. MODEL NUMBER FAN MOTOR OUTPUT (W) & QUANTITY RELQ72TATJU 800 x 2 RELQ96TATJU 800 x 2 RELQ120TATJU 800 x 2 RELQ144TATJU (800 x 2) x 2 RELQ192TATJU (800 x 2) x 2 RELQ240TATJU (800 x 2) x 2

3. The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC (digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG. A field setting switch to a maximum 0.32 in. WG pressure is available to accommodate field applied duct for indoor mounting of condensing units. 4. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow maximum range of 7283 CFM to 17612 CFM dependent on model specified. 5. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted. 6. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

D. Sound: 1. Nominal sound pressure levels shall be as shown below. MODEL NUMBER SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL dB(A) RELQ72TATJU 60 RELQ96TATJU 61 RELQ120TATJU 63.5 RELQ144TATJU 63 RELQ192TATJU 64 RELQ240TATJU 67

2. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of automatically limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation sound level shall be selectable from 3 steps. NIGHT MODE OPERATION SOUND dB(A) SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL dB(A) APPROX. Level 1 55 Level 2 50 Level 3 45

E. Condenser Coil: 1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to ensure high efficiency performance. 3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X seamless copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to an e-Pass Design. 4. The fins shall be coated with an anti-corrosion hydrophilic blue coating as standard from factory with a salt spray test rating of 1000hr per ASTM test standards.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

5. The outdoor coil shall have three-circuit heat exchanger design eliminating the need for a drain pan heater. The lower part of the coil shall be used for inverter cooling and be on or off during heating operation enhancing the defrost operation. a. An alternate manufacturer must provide a drain pan heater to enable adequate defrosting of the unit in defrost operation. 6. The condensing unit shall be factory equipped with condenser coil guards on all sides.

F. Compressor: 1. The Daikin inverter Flash Vapor injection scroll compressors shall be variable speed (PVM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. a. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV frequency) shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target value. 1) Non –inverter-driven compressors, which may cause starting motor current to exceed the nominal motor current (RLA) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be allowed. 2. The inverter driven compressors in the condensing unit shall be of highly efficient reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll “K-type”. 3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. a. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start. 4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 4.3% to 100%. 5. The compressor’s motor shall have a cooling system using discharge gas, to avoid sudden changes in temperature resulting in significant stresses on winding and bearings. 6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector. 7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent oil management system. 8. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration eliminating the standard need for spring insolation. 9. In the event of compressor failure, the remaining compressors shall continue to operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a proportionally reduced capacity. The microprocessor and associated controls shall be manually activated to specifically address this condition for single module and manifold systems. 10. In the case of multiple condenser modules, combined operation hours of the compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours. When connected to a central control system sequential start is activated for all system on each DIII network. 11. Compressor configurations: COMPRESSOR MOTOR MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY COMPRESSOR TYPES OUTPUT (W) & QUANTITY RELQ72TATJU 3,900 1 Inverter controlled RELQ96TATJU 5,100 1 Inverter controlled RELQ120TATJU 6,600 1 Inverter controlled RELQ144TATJU 3,900 + 3,900 2 All inverter controlled RELQ192TATJU 5,000 + 5,000 2 All inverter controlled RELQ240TATJU 6,500 + 6,500 2 All inverter controlled

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2.02 BRANCH SELECTOR UNITS

A. General: 1. The BSQ36TVJ, BSQ60TVJ, BSQ96TVJ, BS4Q54TVJ, BS6Q54TVJ, BS8Q54TVJ, BS10Q54TVJ and BS12Q54TVJ branch selector boxes are designed specifically for use with VRV Aurora series heat recovery system components. a. These selector boxes shall be factory assembled, wired, and piped. b. These BSQ_T / BS (4/6/8/10/12)Q54T branch controllers must be run tested at the factory. c. These selector boxes must be mounted indoors. d. When simultaneously heating and cooling, the units in heating mode shall energize their subcooling electronic expansion valve. e. The number of connectable indoor units shall be in accordance with the table below: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF MAXIMUM CONNECTABLE MODEL NUMBER CONNECTABLE INDOOR COOLING CAPACITY UNITS PER BRANCH BSQ36TVJ 36,000 Btu/h 4 BSQ60TVJ 60,000 Btu/h 8 BSQ96TVJ 96,000 Btu/h 8 BS4Q54TVJ 144,000 Btu/h 5 BS6Q54TVJ 216,000 Btu/h 5 BS8Q54TVJ 290,000 Btu/h 5 BS10Q54TVJ 290,000 Btu/h 5 BS12Q54TVJ 290,000 Btu/h 5

B. Unit Cabinet: 1. These units shall have a galvanized steel plate casing. 2. Each cabinet shall house 3 electronic expansion valves for refrigerant control per branch. 3. The cabinet shall contain one subcooling heat exchanger per branch. 4. The unit shall have sound absorption thermal insulation material made of flame and heat resistant foamed polyethylene. 5. Nominal sound pressure levels must be measured and published on the submittals by the manufacturer. These sound levels must not exceed the values below. a. If an alternative manufacturer is selected, the mechanical contractor shall provide, at their own cost and expense, any additional material and labor to meet the published sound levels above.

SOUND LEVEL dB(A) SOUND LEVEL dB(A) MODEL NUMBER OPERATION MAX BSQ36TVJ 35 40 BSQ60TVJ 41 45 BSQ96TVJ 41 45 BS4Q54TVJ 38 45 BS6Q54TVJ 39 47 BS8Q54TVJ 39 47 BS10Q54TVJ 40 48 BS12Q54TVJ 40 48

6. Dimensions (H x L x W) a. BSQ_T unit shall be no larger than 8-1/8” x 15-1/4” x 12-13/16” (206.4mm x 387.4mm x 325.4mm).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

b. BS4Q_T shall be no larger than 11-3/4” x 18-15/16” x 14-9/16” (298.5mm x 481mm x 370mm). c. BS(6/8)Q_T shall be no larger than 11-3/4” x 22-13/16” x 18-15/16” (298.5mm x 579.4mm x 481mm). d. BS(10/12)Q_T shall be no larger than 11-3/4” x 32-5/16” x 18-15/16” (298.5mm x 821mm x 481mm). 7. Refrigerant Valves: a. The unit shall be furnished with 3 electronic expansion valves per branch to control the direction of refrigerant flow. The use of solenoid valves for changeover and pressure equalization shall not be acceptable due to refrigerant noise. b. The refrigerant connections must be of the braze type. c. In multi-port units, each port shall have its own electronic expansion valves. If common expansion/solenoid valves are used, redundancy must be provided. d. Each circuit shall have at least one (36,000 Btu/h indoor unit or smaller for the BSQ36TVJ, 54,000 Btu/h indoor unit or smaller for the BS(4/6/8/10/12)Q54TVJ, 60,000 Btu/h indoor unit or smaller for the BSQ60TVJ and 96,000 Btu/h indoor unit or smaller for the BSQ96TVJ) branch selector box. e. Multiple indoor units may be connected to a branch selector box with the use of a REFNET ™ joint provided they are within the capacity range of the branch selector. 8. Condensate Removal: a. The unit shall not require provisions for condensate removal. A safety device or secondary drain pan shall be installed by the mechanical contractor to comply with the applicable mechanical code, if an alternate manufacturer is selected. 9. Electrical: a. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. b. The unit shall be capable of operation within the limits of 187 volts to 255 volts. c. The minimum circuit amps (MCA) shall be 0.1 and the maximum overcurrent protection amps (MOP) shall be 15. d. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non- shielded 2 conductor cable.

2.03 VRV INDOOR UNITS

2.04 FXFQ_T – ROUND FLOW SENSING CEILING CASSETTE UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXFQ_T shall be a round flow ceiling cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, direct drive DC (ECM) type fan, for installation into the ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grill. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXFQ07TVJU, FXFQ09TVJU, FXFQ12TVJU, FXFQ15TVJU, FXFQ18TVJU, FXFQ24TVJU, FXFQ30TVJU, FXFQ36TVJU, FXFQ48TVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a round flow air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant decoration panel, or optional self-cleaning filter panel. The supply air is distributed via four individually motorized louvers. To save energy and optimize occupancy comfort, the indoor unit shall be equipped with built in occupancy sensor and surface temperature sensor. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73, BRC2A71 and BRC1E52B7. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 30 dB(A) to 45 dB(A) at High speed measured at 5 feet below the unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 11 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXFQ_T shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The round flow supply air flow can be field modified to 23 different airflow patterns to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net, mold resistant, antibacterial filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan with antibacterial treatment and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 33-1/2” of lift from bottom of unit to top of drain piping and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 9. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. 10. To save energy and optimize occupancy comfort, the indoor unit shall be equipped with built in occupancy sensor and surface temperature sensor. 11. Supplied air shall be directed automatically by four individually controlled louvers.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Four auto-adjusted louvers shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with multiple patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces. 4. Fresh air intake shall be possible by way of Daikin’s optional fresh air intake kit. 5. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting of supply air. 6. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. 7. Optional high efficiency air filters are available for each model unit.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.08 to 0.16 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in three manual settings. 4. The DC fan shall be able to automatically adjust the fan speed in 5 speeds based on the space load. 5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings to allow operation with the high efficiency air filter options. 6. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin and antibacterial treatment. 2. Optional high efficiency disposable air filters shall be available. 3. Optional Self-Cleaning Filter Panel, which performs automatic filter cleaning up to once a day, with dust collection box that indicates when to be emptied.

G. Coil:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 12 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2, or 3-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with up to 21 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 6. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller. 4. For the Sensing functions and the optional Self-Cleaning Filter functions, Remote controller BRC1E73/BRC1E52B7 shall be used. Consult with Daikin prior to applying controls.

2.05 FXZQ – 4 WAY CEILING CASSETTE UNIT (2’X2’)

A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXZQ shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grill. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 18,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXZQ07MVJU9, FXZQ09MVJU9, FXZQ12MVJU9, FXZQ15MVJU9, FXZQ18MVJU9 to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a four-way air distribution type, white (RAL9010), impact resistant with a washable decoration panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized louvers which can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90°. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to 34 dB(A) at low speed measured at 5 feet below the unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXZQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 13 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The 4-way supply air flow can be field modified to 3-way and 2-way airflow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations. 5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 21” of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. All electrical components are reached through the decoration panel, which reduces the required side service access. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Three auto-swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides allowing for simpler corner installation. 4. Fresh air intake shall be possible by way of direct duct installation to the side of the indoor unit cabinet. 5. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.06 to 0.12 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 -1/32 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 14 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

2.06 FXMQ_M – CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (MED. STATIC)

A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_M shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. It is constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 72,000 Btu/h to 96,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXMQ72MVJU and FXMQ96MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. The indoor units sound pressure shall be 48 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_M shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable external static pressure switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 5. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 6. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz, with a motor output of 0.51 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 15 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

6. Fan motor external static pressure for nominal airflow:

F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 13 fpi design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1-5/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

2.07 FXMQ_PB - CONCEALED CEILING DUCTED UNIT (MED. STATIC)

A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_PB shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, direct-drive DC (ECM) type fan with auto CFM adjustment at commissioning, for installation into the ceiling cavity. It is constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXMQ07PBVJU, FXMQ09PBVJU, FXMQ12PBVJU, FXMQ15PBVJU, FXMQ18PBVJU, FXMQ24PBVJU, FXMQ30PBVJU, FXMQ36PBVJU, FXMQ48PBVJU, and FXMQ54PBVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air configuration. All models feature a low height cabinet making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. Included as standard equipment, a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 18-3/8” from the drain pipe opening. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 29 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed measured 5 feet below the ducted unit.

B. Performance: As Scheduled.

C. Indoor Unit:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 16 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1. The Daikin indoor unit FXMQ_PB shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall be equipment with automatically adjusting external static pressure logic that is selectable during commissioning. This adjusts the airflow based on the installed external static pressure. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 18-3/8” of lift from the center of the drain outlet and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive DC (ECM) type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The unit shall be equipment with automatically adjusting external static pressure logic selectable during commissioning. 3. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range of 0.12 to 0.47 HP respectively. 4. The airflow rate shall be available in three settings. 5. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 6. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings. 7. Fan motor external static pressure range for nominal airflow:

F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1-1/4” outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with an 18-3/8” lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 17 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

2.08 FXDQ – SLIM DUCT CONCEALED CEILING UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXDQ shall be a Slim, built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available in capacities from 7,000 Btu/h to 24,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXDQ07MVJU, FXDQ09MVJU, FXDQ12MVJU, FXDQ18MVJU, and FXDQ24MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air or bottom return air configuration. All models feature a very low height (7-7/8") making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. Included as standard equipment, a long- life filter that is mold resistant and a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 23- 5/8" from the drain pipe opening. The indoor units sound pressure level shall range from 29 dB(A) to 32 dB(A) at low speed and 33 dB(A) to 36 dB(A) at high speed 5 feet below the suction grille.

B. Performance: As scheduled.

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXDQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have adjustable external static pressure capabilities. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 23-5/8” of lift from the center of the drain outlet and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum. 9. Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service and maintenance.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 18 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 62W to 130W. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure (ESP) settings. 6. Fan motor external static pressure range for nominal airflow:

F. Filter: The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2 or 3-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1-1/32” outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 23-5/8” lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

J. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote “in-room” sensor kit KRCS01-1B (recommended). a. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recommended for ceiling- embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 19 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2.09 FXHQ - CEILING SUSPENDED CASSETTE UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXHQ shall be a ceiling suspended fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a wall or ceiling within a conditioned space. This compact design with finished white casing shall be available in capacities from 12,000 Btu/h to 36,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXHQ12MVJU, FXHQ24MVJU and FXHQ36MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. A mildew-proof, polystyrene condensate drain pan and resin net mold resistant filter shall be included as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 32 dB(A) to 38 dB(A) at low speed measured at 3.3 feet below and from the unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXHQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self- diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto-swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. The remote controller shall be able to set five (5) steps of discharge angle. The front grille shall be easily removed for washing. The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The drain pipe can be fitted to from the rear, top or left and right sides of the unit. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall/ceiling hanging brackets and located in the conditioned space. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct-drive cross-flow fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 62W to 130W. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 20 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. 6. A condensate pan shall be located in the unit.

G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

I. Optional Accessories: 1. A condensate pump (DACA-CP3-1).

2.10 FXAQ – WALL MOUNTED UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXAQ shall be a wall mounted fan coil unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a wall within a conditioned space. This compact design with finished white casing shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 24,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXAQ07PVJU, FXAQ09PVJU, FXAQ12PVJU, FXAQ18PVJU and FXAQ24PVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71. A mildew-proof, polystyrene condensate drain pan and resin net mold resistant filter shall be included as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 31 dB(A) to 41 dB(A) at low speed measured at 3.3 feet below and from the unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXAQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self- diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto-swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. The remote controller shall be able to set five (5) steps of discharge angle. The front grille shall be easily removed for washing. The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The drain pipe can be fitted to from either left or right sides.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 21 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter. 5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 7. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 8. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall mounting template and located in the conditioned space. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct-drive cross-flow fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.054 to 0.058 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

F. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 fpi design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 11/16 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line. 6. A condensate pan shall be located in the unit.

G. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet. H. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

I. Optional Accessories: 1. A condensate pump (DACA-CP3-1)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 22 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2.11 FXTQ – VERTICAL AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit FXTQ_PA shall be a floor mounted vertical or horizontal right air handling unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve and direct-drive ECM type fan with auto CFM adjustment, for installation within a conditioned space. When installed in a vertical configuration it shall have top discharge air and bottom return air. When installed in a horizontal right configuration it shall have a horizontal discharge air and horizontal return air. This compact design with pre-painted heavy-gauge steel casing shall be available in capacities from 12,000 Btu/h to 54,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXTQ12PAVJU, FXTQ18PAVJU, FXTQ24PAVJU, FXTQ30PAVJU, FXTQ36PAVJU, FXTQ42PAVJU, FXTQ48PAVJU and FXTQ54PAVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. A KRCS01-4B remote temperature sensor kit shall be required for all FXTQ indoor units not utilizing the thermistor in the Daikin remote controller BRC1E72. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E72, BRC1E73 and BRC2A71.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXTQ_PA components shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, brazed connections, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. Return air shall be through an optional or field supplied filter. 5. Condensate draining shall be made via gravity or external condensate pump. 6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 7. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing, foil-faced insulation to control air leakage. 2. Select an installation location with adequate structural support, space for service access and clearance for air return and supply duct connections. 3. A field supplied secondary drain pan must be installed.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be a direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.2 to 0.5 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in high setting. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. 5. Fan motor external static pressure for nominal airflow:

F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a field supplied filter.

G. Coil:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 23 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coil shall be a 4-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 15 fpi design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be brazed connections and the condensate will be 3/4 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

2.12 FXUQ – 4 WAY CEILING SUSPENDED CASSETTE UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXUQ shall be a ceiling suspended cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a ceiling within a conditioned space. It shall be available in capacities from 18,000 Btu/h to 36,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXUQ18PVJU, FXUQ24PVJU, FXUQ30PVJU, FXUQ36PVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a four-way air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant with a washable panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized louvers which can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 60°. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E73. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 36 dB(A) to 40 dB(A) at low speed measured at 5 feet below the unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXUQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 4. The 4-way supply air flow can be field modified to 3-way and 2-way airflow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 24 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

5. Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 23-5/8” of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. All electrical components are reached through the decoration panel, which reduces the required side service access. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. Three auto-swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention. 3. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down outlets with multiple patterns allowing for simpler installation in irregular spaces. 4. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with three fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.06 to 0.14 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in three settings. 4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin. G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. he coil shall be a 3-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 21 FPI design completely factory tested. 4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 inch outside diameter PVC. 5. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 6. A condensate pump with a 23-5/8 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built-in safety alarm. 7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 25 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

2.13 FXEQ – ONE WAY BLOW CASSETTE UNIT

A. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXEQ shall be a ceiling suspended cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a ceiling within a conditioned space. It shall be available in capacities from 7,500 Btu/h to 24,000 Btu/h. Model numbers are FXEQ07PVJU, FXEQ09PVJU, FXEQ12PVJU, FXEQ15PVJU, FXEQ18PVJU, FXEQ24PVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ / RWEYQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a one-way air distribution type, fresh white, impact resistant with a washable panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized vertical and horizontal louvers which can be adjusted from 0° to 45° and 20° to 70° respectively. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E73. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 26 dB(A) to 38 dB(A) at low speed measured at 3.3 feet below the unit.

B. Performance: As scheduled

C. Indoor Unit: 1. The Daikin indoor unit FXEQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate lift pump, condensate safety shutoff and alarm, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3- minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 2. The indoor unit shall be able to process up to 15% fresh air 3. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory. 4. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit. 5. Return air shall be through the flat back panel, which includes a white resin net mold resistant filter. 6. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 33-716” of lift and has a built in safety shutoff and alarm. 7. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor. 8. Motor and some of the electrical components shall be reachable through the decoration panel. 9. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz. 10. The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

D. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into the ceiling. 2. The cabinet shall have a built in 4” knock-out to connect fresh air intake 3. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polyurethane noise insulation. 4. The cabinet shall be equipped with foamed polystyrene and foamed polyethylene heat insulation.

E. Fan: 1. The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco fan type with statically and dynamically balanced impeller with five selectable fan speeds available. 2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.11 to 0.15 HP. 3. The airflow rate shall be available in five settings.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 26 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.

F. Filter: 1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a mold resistant Resin net filter. 2. The filter shall be accessible from the decoration panel.

G. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond. 2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance. 3. The coils for units up to 1 ton shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 20.5 FPI design completely factory tested for the 4. The coils for units from 1.25 ton to 2.0 ton shall be 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 20.5 FPI and an additional row with 15.9 FPI. 5. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1-1/32 inch outside diameter PVC. 6. A condensate pan with antibacterial treatment shall be located under the coil. 7. A condensate pump with a 33-7/16 inch lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built-in safety alarm. 8. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

H. Electrical: 1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). 3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with a BMS system via optional LonWorks or BACnet gateways. 3. The unit shall be compatible with a Daikin Intelligent Touch Manager advanced multi-zone controller.

J. Standard Accessories Required: 1. Decoration panel BYEP40AW1 shall be required for operation of FXEQ07 PVJU thru FXEQ15PVJU 2. Decoration panel BYEP63AW1 shall be required for operation of FXEQ18PVJU and FXEQ24PVJU.

K. Optional Accessories Available: 1. Remote controller wire type (BRC1E73)

PART 3 PERFORMANCE

3.01 THE VRV IV REYQ_T SYSTEM SHALL PERFORM AS SCHEDULED

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 27 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3.02 OPERATING RANGE

A. The operating range in cooling or cooling dominant simultaneous cooling/heating will be (-4°F) 23°F DB ~ 122°F DB.

B. Each system as standard shall be capable of onsite reprogramming to allow low ambient cooling operation down to -4°F DB.

C. The operating range in heating or heating dominant simultaneous cooling/heating will be -13°F WB – 60°F WB.

D. If an alternate equipment manufacturer is selected, the mechanical contractor shall provide, at their own risk and cost, all additional material and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance. 1. Cooling mode indoor room temperature range will be 57°F-77°F WB. 2. Heating mode indoor room temperature range will be 59°F-80°F DB.

PART 4 VRV CONTROLS

4.01 VRV CONTROLS

A. The VRV Controls Network is made up of local remote controllers, multi-zone controllers, advanced multi-zone controllers, and open protocol network devices that transmit information via the communication bus. The VRV Controls Network shall also have the ability to be accessed via a networked PC. The VRV Controls Network supports operation monitoring, scheduling, error e-mail distribution, general user software, tenant billing, maintenance support, and integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) using open protocol via BACnet ® interface , Lonworks ® interface or Modbus ® adapter; all of which blend to provide the optimal control strategy for the best HVAC comfort solution. Third party equipment shall be able to be controlled as detailed and needed.

B. General: The advanced multi-zone controller will require 24 VAC to power the controller. The advanced multi-zone controller shall supply 16 VDC to the communication bus on the F1F2 (out- out) terminal of the outdoor unit. The voltage may rise or fall in relation to the transmission packets that are sent and received.

C. Wiring: The advanced multi-zone controller communication wiring shall be terminated in a daisy chain design at the outdoor unit, which is then daisy chained to branch selector (Heat Recovery system), then daisy chained to each indoor unit in the system and terminating at the farthest indoor unit. The termination of the wiring shall be non-polar. The remote control wiring shall run from the indoor unit control terminal block to the remote controller connected with that indoor unit.

D. Wiring size: Wiring shall be non-shielded, 2-conductor sheathed vinyl cord or cable, and 18 AWG stranded copper wire.

4.02 ADVANCED MULTI-ZONE CONTROLLERS

A. The Daikin AC VRV advanced multi-zone controllers are compatible with all VRV, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. The advanced multi-zone controller wiring consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the outdoor unit. The advanced multi-zone controllers may be wall-mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of up to 64 connected indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units. Set temperatures can be adjusted in increments of 1°F. In the cases where a system or unit error may occur, the VRV controllers will display a two-digit error code and the unit address.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 28 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

B. DCM601A71: intelligent Touch Manager (iTM) V2.XX.XX 1. The intelligent Touch Manager (version 2.04) shall provide control for all VRV, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. It shall be capable of controlling a maximum or 64 indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. The intelligent Touch Manager shall support operations superseding that of the local remote controller, system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. 2. The controller wiring shall consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the indoor unit at terminals F1F2 (out-out) of the outdoor unit. The intelligent Touch Manager is wall mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). 3. The intelligent Touch Manager can be used in conjunction with the BRC1E73 (Navigation Remote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller), BACnet interface, Lonworks interface, and Modbus adapter to control the same indoor unit groups. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each remote controller group associated with the intelligent Touch Manager. DIII-NET address can be set for one (1) indoor unit or each indoor unit in the remote controller group. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. 4. The intelligent Touch Manager shall be equipped with two RJ-45 Ethernet ports for 100 Mbps network communication to support interconnection with a network PC via the Internet, Local Area Network (LAN), or connection with a non-networked PC after completed installation. 5. Web access functions shall be available so that facility staff can securely log into each Intelligent Touch Manager via the PC’s web browser to support monitoring, scheduling, error recognition, and general user functions. Error emails are also sent to designated email addresses. An additional optional software function Power Proportional Distribution (PPD) tenant billing shall also be available. The optional software shall require advanced purchase and can only be activated upon receipt of a license activation key from Daikin AC. 6. Mounting:The intelligent Touch Manager shall be mounted on the wall or into the mounting fixtures included with the intelligent Touch Manager. 7. Display Features: a. The intelligent Touch Manager shall be approximately 11.42” x 9.57” x 1.97’ in size with a backlit 10.4” LCD display. b. Display information shall be selectable from English, French, Italian, Korean, Dutch, Portuguese, Chinese, Japanese, German, or Spanish. c. Featured backlit LCD with auto off after 30 minutes (default) is adjustable between 1 to 60 minutes, or the choice of 3 different screen savers. d. Area and Group configuration 1) Area contains one (1) or more Area(s) or Group(s) 2) A Group may be an indoor unit, Di, Dio point that has a DIII-Net address 3) A Group may be an external management point such as a Di, Do, Bi, Bo, Bv, Ai, Ao, Av, Mi, Mo, Mv that does not have a DIII-Net address e. An Area is a tiered group where management points (indoor unit, digital input/output, and analog input/output groups) can be monitored and controlled by global settings. Up to 650 Areas can be created. Area hierarchy can have up to 10 tiered levels (ex. top level: 1 st floor West, 2 nd level: offices, hallways, 3 rd level: Office 101, 102, and 103, etc.). Area configuration shall classify levels of monitoring and control for each management point 1) Areas and Groups may be assigned names (ex. Office 101, Lobby, North Hallway, etc.) f. The Controller shall display On/Off, Operation Mode, Setpoint, Space Temperature, Louver Position, Fan Speed for each Area or Group.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 29 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

g. The Controller shall display Date (mm/dd/yyyy, yyyy/mm/dd, or dd/mm/yyyy format selectable) and day of the week along with the time of day (12hr or 24hr display selectable). h. The Controller shall adjust for daylight savings time (DST) automatically. i. Display information shall be updated every 3 seconds to show the latest status of the indoor unit groups. j. System status icons shall display On/Off (color coded), Malfunction/Error (color coded), Forced Stop, Setback, Filter, Maintenance, and Screen Lock. k. The controller shall display the temperature setpoint in one degree increments with a range of 60 oF – 90 oF, 1 oF basis (16 oC – 32 oC, 0.1 oC basis). 1) Display of temperature setpoint information shall be configurable for Fahrenheit or Celsius l. Display shall reflect room temperature in one tenth degree increments with a range of- 58 oF – 248 oF, 0.1 oF basis (-50 oC – 120 oC, 0.1 oC basis) with 0.1 oC accuracy. 1) Display of room temperature information shall be configurable for Fahrenheit or Celsius m. The Menu List shall be used to configure options and display information for each Area or Group. n. Error status shall be displayed in the event of system abnormality/error with one of three color coded icons placed over the indoor unit icon or lower task bar. 1) System errors are generated when the intelligent Touch Manager system with other VRV controls systems are combined incorrectly or power proportional distribution calculation errors occur. The intelligent Touch Manager shall display the error with a red triangle placed on the lower task bar. 2) Unit errors occurring within the VRV system shall be displayed with a yellow triangle placed over the indoor unit icon 3) Limit errors are based upon preconfigured analog input upper and lower limit settings and are generated when the limits have been met. When limit error is generated a yellow triangle will be placed over the unit icon. 4) Communication errors between the intelligent Touch Manager and the indoor units shall be displayed with a blue triangle placed over the indoor unit icon 5) Error history shall be available for viewing for up to 500,000 errors/abnormality events with operation events. o. Layout View 1) Capable of displaying site floor plan or graphical user interface (GUI) as the background for visual navigation. Indoor unit, DIII-Net Di and Dio, and External Di, Do, Ai, Ao, Av, Mi, Mo, Mv icons with operational status can be placed on the floor layout or GUI a) Up to 4 status points can be assigned to the indoor unit icon (room name, room temperature, setpoint, and mode) b) Digital input and output icons will display On/Off status c) Analog icons will display Ai, Ao and Av. d) Multistate icons will display Mi, Mo and Mv. 2) Up to 60 floor layout sections can be created

9. Basic Operation: a. Capable of controlling by Area(s) or Group(s) b. Controller shall control the following group operations: 1) On/Off 2) Operation Mode (Cool, Heat, Fan, Dry, and Auto) 3) Independent Cool and Heat dual Setpoints or single Setpoint for current mode in the occupied period 4) Controller shall be able to limit the user adjustable setpoint ranges individually for cooling and heating based upon the Area or Group configurations 5) Independent Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setpoints in the unoccupied mode adjustable to 50 - 95 0F

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 30 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

a) Setup and Setback setpoints can only be set outside of the occupied setpoint range b) The Setup and Setback setpoints will automatically maintain a 2 oF fixed differential from the highest possible occupied setpoints c) The recovery differential shall be 4 0F (default) and adjustable between 2 – 10 0F d) Settings shall be applied based upon the Area or Group configurations 6) Fan Speed i. Up to 3 speeds (dependent upon indoor unit type) 7) Airflow direction (dependent upon indoor unit type) ii. 5 fixed positions or oscillating 8) Remote controller permit/prohibit of On/Off, Mode, and Setpoint 9) Lock out setting for Intelligent Touch Manager display 10) Indoor unit Group/Area assignment c. Capable of providing battery backup power for the clock at least 1 year when no AC power is applied. 1) The battery can last at least 13 years when AC power is applied 2) Settings stored in non-volatile memory

10. Programmability: a. Controller shall support weekly schedule settings. 1) 7 day weekly pattern (7) 2) Weekday + Weekend (5 + 2) 3) Weekday + Saturday + Sunday (5 + 1 + 1) 4) Everyday (1) 5) The schedule shall have the capabilities of being enabled or disabled 6) 100 independent schedules configurable with up to 20 events settable for each days schedule a) Each scheduled event shall specify time and target Area or Group b) Each scheduled event shall include On/Off, Optimum Start, Operation Mode, Occupied Setpoints, Setback Setpoints, Remote Controller On/Off Prohibit, Remote Controller Mode Prohibit, Remote Controller Setpoint Prohibit, Timer Extension Setting, Fan Speed, and Setpoint Range Limit c) Time setting in 1-minute increments d) Timer Extension shall be used for a timed override (settable from 30 – 180 minutes) to allow indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period. 7) A maximum of 40 exception days can be schedule on the yearly schedule (repeats yearly) a) Exception days shall be used to override specified days on the weekly schedule based upon irregular occupied/unoccupied conditions b) Exception days can be configured on a set date (Jan 1) or floating date (1 st Monday in September) 11. Controller shall support auto-changeover. 12. Auto-change shall provide Fixed (default), Individual, Averaging, and Vote changeover methods for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems based upon the changeover group configuration. This will allow for the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit’s mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint. The following changeover scheme shall be applicable to the Fixed, Individual, and Averaging methods. a. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur at cooling setpoint + 1 oF (0.5 oC) as the primary changeover deadband and takes the guard timer into consideration 1) Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) b. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur at the primary changeover deadband to cooling + 1 oF (0.5 oC) as the secondary changeover deadband. 2) Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 31 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

c. Changeover to heating mode shall occur at heating setpoint - 1oF (0.5 oC) as the primary changeover deadband and takes the guard timer into consideration 3) Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) d. Changeover to heating mode shall occur at the primary changeover deadband to heating - 1oF (0.5 oC) as the secondary changeover deadband. 4) Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) e. A weighted demand shall be configurable for the Averaging and Vote methods. 13. Fixed Method a. Changeover evaluated by room temperature and setpoint of the representative indoor unit (first registered indoor unit in changeover group) in the changeover group even when it is not operating (must be in Cool, Heat, or Auto mode) b. Changeover affects all indoor unit groups in the changeover group. 14. Individual method (recommended for Heat Recovery Systems) a. Changeover evaluated by room temperature and setpoints of the individual indoor unit group in the changeover group b. Changeover affects individual indoor unit group in the changeover group 15. Average method a. Changeover evaluated by the average of all indoor unit group’s room temperatures and setpoints operating in Cool, Heat, or Auto mode in the changeover group list b. If none of the indoor units in the group meet the above requirements the Fixed method of changeover will be applied c. A weighted demand (0 – 3) can be configured for each indoor unit in the changeover group. d. Changeover affects all indoor unit groups in the changeover group. 16. Vote Method a. In each indoor unit, the cooling demand is calculated based upon the difference between the room temperature and cooling setpoint. If the room temperature falls below the primary cool changeover point (cool setpoint plus the primary changeover deadband) the cooling demand is considered as 0 (zero). Then the total cooling demand is calculated as the sum of each indoor unit’s cooling demand b. The opposite is true for the total heating demand c. A weight (0-3) can be added to each indoor unit’s demand in the changeover group. The default setting is 1 d. The weight 0 (zero) means the indoor unit’s demand is not added in the total demand, so the indoor unit’s demand is considered to be 0 (zero) e. The weight 2 or 3 means the indoor unit’s demand is added 2 or 3 times in the total demand, respectively f. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur when the total cooling demand is greater than the total heating demand. g. The opposite is true for changeover to heating h. Vote supports a Heating Override option, which prioritizes switching to the heating mode if at least one room temperature falls below the secondary heat changeover point (heat setpoint minus the secondary changeover deadband) even if the total cooling demand is greater than the total heating demand. i. Changeover affects all indoor unit groups in the changeover group.

17. Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or branch selector box in the Heat Recovery system. 18. Guard timer a. Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during the guard timer activation period (15, 30, 60 (default) min).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 32 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

b. Guard timer is ignored by a change of setpoint manually from either intelligent Touch Manger or Remote Controller, by schedule, or the room temperature meets or exceeds the secondary changeover deadband of the mode opposite of the current mode setting 19. Interlock feature for use with 3 rd party equipment (DOAS, dampers, occupancy sensing, etc…) to automatically control Groups or Areas corresponding to the change of the operation states or the On/Off states of any Group. 20. WAGO I/O unit – Di, Do, Ai, Ao a. On/Off based monitoring and control of equipment b. Manual or scheduled operation of equipment c. Operation based upon interlock with management points (group(s)) d. Monitor equipment error/alarm status 21. Digital Input/Output (DEC102A51-US2) unit or Digital Input (DEC101A51-US2) unit a. On/Off based monitoring and control of equipment b. Manual or scheduled operation of equipment c. Operation based upon interlock with management points (group(s)) d. Monitor equipment error/alarm status 22. Controller shall support force shutdown of associated indoor unit groups.

23. Web/Email Function a. Each intelligent Touch Manager shall be capable of monitoring, operating, and scheduling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups (up to 512 indoor unit groups with the addition of the iTM Plus Adapter) from a networked PC’s web browser. It shall also be capable of creating general user access and sending detailed error emails to a customized distribution list (up to 10 email addresses). b. All PCs shall be field supplied

24. Optional Software a. DCM002A71: Power Proportional Distribution (PPD) 1) Licensed per option, per intelligent Touch Manager shall be required. 2) The tenant billing option shall be capable of calculating VRV Controls Network equipment energy usage in kWh based on the energy consumption of the outdoor unit(s) divided among the associated indoor units. This software is used in conjunction with the intelligent Touch Manager and a Watt Hour Meter (WHM). A maximum of 3 Watt Hour Meters can be connected to the intelligent Touch Manager. Up to 4 additional Watt Hour Meters can be connected to each iTM Plus Adapter, and up to 7 iTM Plus Adapters can be connected to the intelligent Touch Manager. 3) The Power Proportional Distribution results data can be saved to a USB flash drive, or on a PC with the use of the web access. Data is saved in the CSV format. Results can be stored up to 13 months in the intelligent Touch Manager

B. DCM601A72: iTM Plus Adapter (expander for ITM) 1. Provide Adapter in sufficient quantity to control all fan coils and outdoor units on project. 2. The iTM Plus Adapter shall provide control for all VRV, SkyAir indoor units, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. a. It shall be capable of handling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. b. The iTM Plus Adapter is to be used in conjunction with intelligent Touch Manager. c. Up to 7 iTM Plus Adapters can be connected to a single intelligent Touch Manager. This combination will provide intelligent Touch Manager monitoring and control of up to 512 indoor unit groups, 1024 indoor units, and 80 outdoor units. d. The iTM Plus Adapter shall support operations superseding that of the local remote controller, system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. 3. Wiring

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 33 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

a. The controller wiring shall consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the outdoor unit at terminals F1F2 (out-out). b. The iTM Plus Adapter is wall mounted and is used in conjunction with the intelligent Touch Manager to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). c. The iTM Plus Adapter is connected to the intelligent Touch Manager via a polarity sensitive 18-2 AWG stranded non-shielded wire (field supplied). 4. The iTM Plus Adapter can be used in conjunction with the BRC1E73 (Navigation Remote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller), BACnet interface, Lonworks interface and Modbus Adapter to control the same indoor unit groups. a. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. b. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. c. Manual addressing is required of each indoor unit group associated with the iTM Plus Adapter. 5. Mounting: a. The iTM Plus Adapter can be mounted on the wall or in a standard enclosure (field supplied). 6. Features: a. The iTM Plus Adapter shall be approximately 6.30” x 5.87” x 2.41” in size. 7. Basic Operation: a. Control of all associated indoor unit groups shall be done via the connected intelligent Touch Manager. 8. Programmability: a. Programming of all associated indoor unit groups shall be done via the connected intelligent Touch Manager.

C. DCM009A51: BACnet Client Option 1. The iTM BACnet Client Option shall be capable of making the intelligent Touch Manager work as a BACnet client using the BACnet/IP protocol. A BACnet client machine is able to send service requests to a BACnet server machine that then performs the services and reports the results to the client. By registering equipment and sensors connected to a BACnet server as management points, equipment and sensors can be monitored and controlled by the intelligent Touch Manager. The BACnet Client option must be enabled/ activated in each intelligent Touch Manager to be used. 2. System Capacity a. A maximum of 50 BACnet servers can be monitored and/or controlled by one intelligent Touch Manager. b. A maximum of 1536 objects can be monitored and/or controlled by one intelligent Touch Manager. c. A maximum of 512 management points, including BACnet management points,external management points, internal Ai management points, AHU management points, and Chiller management points, can be registered in one intelligent Touch Manager. 3. Objects that can be used in BACnet management points are: a. Analog Input (Object Type Number 0) b. Analog Output (Object Type Number 1) c. Analog Value (Object Type Number 2) d. Binary Input (Object Type Number 3) e. Binary Output (Object Type Number 4) f. Binary Value (Object Type Number 5) g. Multi-Sate Input (Object Type Number 13) h. Multi-Sate Output (Object Type Number 14) I. Multi-Sate Value (Object Type Number 19)

D. DCM014A51: BACnet Server Gateway Option

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 34 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of making the intelligent Touch Manager work as a BACnet gateway using the BACnet/IP protocol. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of exposing indoor unit management points as BACnet objects to the (BMS). The iTM BACnet Server/Gateway Option shall be capable of allowing the BMS to monitor and control indoor units BACnet objects. 2. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be compatible with VRV, SkyAir, Outdoor Air Processing Unit, Mini-Split system with use of KRP928, and FFQ indoor unit for Multi-split system. 3. Functions: a. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of supporting Change of Value (COV) notification. b. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall communicate to BMS using port number 47808 (configurable). c. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall function as BACnet router to provide unique virtual BACnet device identification number (ID) for every indoor unit group address. d. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall provide configurable BACnet Network number. e. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be capable of being configured as a foreign device. It shall be capable of communicating across BACnet Broadcast Management Devices (BBMD) in different subnet networks f. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option shall be run in environments with BACnet communication traffic up to 100 packets/second. g. The iTM BACnet Server Gateway Option functions shall be configurable through CSV file which shall be downloaded from iTM and configured by trained personnel. 4. System Capacity a. Max of 128 indoor units groups (Up to 256 indoor units) can be controlled from (BMS) b. Max of 8 DIII-Net ports shall be connected to iTM. 5. The Building Management System shall monitor and control the following BACnet objects for indoor units a. Indoor unit ON/OFF status. b. Alarm status with error description c. Room temperature. d. Indoor Unit ON details 1) Off 2) Normal [ON] 3) Override 4) Setback e. Filter sign status. f. Fan status. g. Communication status. h. Thermo-on status. i. Compressor status 1) On 2) Off 3) Defrost j. Aux heater status. k. Occupancy Mode 1) Unoccupied, 2) Occupied 3) Standby l. Operation Mode (Cool, Heat, Fan, and Dry) m. Cooling and Heating setpoints during occupied mode. n. Cooling and Heating setpoints during unoccupied mode. o. Maximum and minimum cooling setpoint. p. Maximum and Minimum heating setpoint

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 35 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

q. Minimum cooling and heating setpoint differential. r. Fan Speed 1) Up to 3 speeds (dependent upon indoor unit type) s. Vane direction (dependent upon indoor unit type) 1) 5 fixed positions or swing position t. Remote controller permit/prohibit 1) On/Off 2) Mode, 3) Setpoint u. Filter sign reset for indoor units f. Forced indoor units off. 6. The Building Management System may choose to monitor and control the following BACnet objects linked to iTM control logic: a. Enable/Disable iTM Schedule operation. b. Enable/Disable iTM Auto Changeover Operation. c. Set Timed Override Minutes. 1) Monitor and configure timer extension on iTM (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 minutes) d. System forced off 1) Enable/Disable all emergency stop programs that are registered on the iTM. 7. Schedule a. The BMS shall utilize iTM schedule function or support weekly schedule settings through its programming. b. BMS schedule shall support the indoor unit: 1) Each scheduled event shall specify time and target group address. 2) Each scheduled event shall include Occupancy Mode, Operation Mode, Occupied Cooling Setpoint, Occupied Heating Setpoint, and Unoccupied cooling setpoint, Unoccupied heating setpoint, Remote Controller On/Off Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Mode Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Setpoint Permit/Prohibit, and Timed Override Enable. 3) An override shall be provided for use enabling indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period by the BMS programming. 8. Auto Changeover a. The BMS shall utilize iTM Auto changeover function or support auto-changeover through its programming. b. Auto-change shall provide changeover for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems based upon the group configurations. This will allow the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit’s mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint temperature. c. Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained on the same DIII-Net communication bus to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or the same branch selector box in the Heat Recovery system. d. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur when the room temperature is great than or equal to the cooling setpoint 1) Differential to be determined by BACnet building management system programming e. Changeover to heating mode shall occur when room temperature is less than or equal to the heating setpoint. 1) Differential to be determined by BACnet building management system programming f. Guard timer 1) Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during this period. 2) Guard timer should be ignored by a change of setpoint manually from the BMS, Intelligent Touch Controller, Remote Controller, or by schedule.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 36 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

3) Guard timer to be configured by BMS programming (30 minute minimum recommended) 9. Setpoint limitation a. The BMS shall utilize maximum and minimum cooling and heating setpoint to configure upper and lower setpoints range. 10. System shutdown: a. BMS should utilize System forced off point to execute emergency stop program registered on the iTM. 11. Restricted functions: a. The following iTM functions shall be prohibited when the BACnet Server Gateway option enabled: 1) Interlocking Control. 2) Emergency Stop (Emergency stop manual release). 3) Power Proportional Distribution (PPD) option. 4) BACnet Client option. 5) D-Net Service. 6) External Management Point Registration

E. DMS502B71: Interface for use in BACnet 1. The Interface for use in BACnet shall provide the ability for a Building Management System (BMS) to control all VRV, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. 2. It shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 2 DIII-Net systems or 64 indoor unit groups (128 indoor units) connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units on each DIII-Net system. 3. Each DIII-Net system is independent of each other and each DIII-Net system will terminate on its own DIII-Net port (2 DIII-Net ports standard). The Optional DIII Board (DAM411B51) can be added to the interface. 4. This option provides 2 additional DIII-Net ports to the interface; a total of 4 DIII-Net ports (maximum of 64 indoor unit groups per DIII-Net port) which can handle a maximum of 256 indoor unit groups (512 indoor units) and 40 outdoor units. 5. The Interface for use in BACnet shall support operations superseding that of the Daikin centralized controller, local remote controller, system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. 6. The Interface for use in BACnet uses a standard open protocol based on ANSI/ASHREA Standard 135. The BACnet Interface has been certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL). The BACnet Interface is compatible with BACnet IP (ISO16484-5). 7. The interface wiring shall consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the terminals F1F2 (out-out) of the outdoor unit. The Interface for use in BACnet is wall mounted and is used as a translator between the BACnet Building Management System (BMS) and the VRV DIII- Net communication bus to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). 8. The Interface for use in BACnet can be used in conjunction with the BRC1E73 (Navigation Remote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller), and DCS601C71 (Intelligent Touch Controller (ITC)) with or without the DCS601A72 (ITC DIII Plus Adapter) to control the same indoor unit groups. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each indoor unit group associated with the Intelligent Touch Controller and the Interfaces for use in BACnet. 9. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to support interconnection with a network PC via the Internet or Local Area Network (LAN). The Ethernet connection shall be capable of transmission on 10Base-T and/or 100Base-TX connection at 100 Mbps. 10. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be capable of being configured as a foreign device. It shall be capable of communicating across BACnet Broadcast Management Devices (BBMD) in different subnet networks.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 37 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

11. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be capable of supporting Change of Value (COV) notification for all available objects. 12. The Daikin BACnet Setup Tool shall be available so that certified commissioning personnel/facility staff can securely log into each Interface for use in BACnet via a PC to support the configuration and testing of the Interface for use in BACnet. 13. Mounting: a. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be mounted indoor on the wall or in an enclosure (Field Supplied). For exterior mounting the Interface must be mounted in an enclosure, and proper NEMA and/or IP rating enclosure should be used. b. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be approximately 10.81” x 10.34” x 2.69” in size. 14. Display Features: a. LED display provides the interface’s operational status and alarm. b. The Interface for use in BACnet shall be capable of displaying indoor unit objects on the BACnet building management system. 15. The Interface for use in BACnet shall provide the BACnet building management system the capability to command the setpoint temperature in 1 0F increments with a range of 60 0F to 90 0F or in 0.1 °C increments with a range of 16 0C to 32 0C. 16. Display of temperature setpoint information shall be selectable for Fahrenheit or Celsius at the commissioning. 17. The Interface for use in BACnet shall provide the BACnet building management system the capability to display the room temperature in 0.1 0F (0.1 0C accuracy) increments with a range of -120 0F to 180 0F or in 0.1 °C increments with a range of (-84 0C to 82 0C). a. Display of room temperature information shall be selectable for Fahrenheit or Celsius at the commissioning. 18. Error codes generated by the indoor units, outdoor units, branch selector boxes, and remote controllers shall be displayed on the BACnet building management system in the event of system abnormality/error with a two digit error code as specified by Daikin. a. Communication errors between the Interface for use in BACnet and the BACnet building management system shall be displayed with a red flashing LED on the Interface for use in BACnet 19. Basic Operation: a. The Interface for use in BACnet will provide up to 32 objects that can be monitored/controlled via the BACnet building management system (see the Interface for use in BACnet Design Guide –EDUS72-749C) b. Capable of controlling up to 64 indoor unit groups (128 indoor units) per DIII-Net port (2 DIII-Net ports standard). c. Optional DIII Board (DAM411B51) can be added to increase DIII-Net ports to a total of 4 DIII-Net ports. d. This provides a total of 256 indoor unit groups (512 indoor units) that can be monitored and controlled via the BACnet building management system e. The Building Management System shall use following objects for operations: 1) On/Off 2) On/Off Status 3) Alarm Normal/Malfunction 4) Malfunction Code 5) Operation Mode (Cool, Heat, Fan, Dry) 6) Operation Mode Status 7) Fan Speed a) Up to 3 speeds (dependent upon indoor unit type) 8) Fan Speed Status 9) Measured Room Temperature 10) Setpoint 11) Filter sign signal 12) Filter sign reset for indoor units 13) Remote controller permit/prohibit of On/Off 14) Remote controller permit/prohibit of Mode

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 38 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

15) Remote controller permit/prohibit of Setpoint 16) Centralized controller (lower central controller disable) 17) Communication Status 18) Forced system off (Indoor units per DIII-net) 19) Airflow Direction (dependent upon indoor unit type) 20) 5 fixed positions or oscillating 21) Airflow Direction Status 22) Forced Thermo-off of indoor units 23) Forced Thermo-off Status 24) Energy saving offset of indoor unit setpoint 25) Energy saving Status 26) Thermo-on status 27) Compressor status 28) Indoor Fan status 29) Heater status 30) Ventilation Mode (Bypass, ERV, Auto) 31) Ventilation Mode Status 32) Ventilation Amount a) Up to 3 speeds (Low, High, Auto) b) Fresh-up 33) Ventilation Amount Status 34) Capable of providing battery backup power for up to 3 years in total time for the clock 35) Settings stored in non-volatile memory 20. Programmability: a. The BACnet building management system shall support weekly schedule settings through its programming. 1) The schedule shall support the indoor unit: 2) On/Off 3) Each scheduled event shall specify time and target group 4) Each scheduled event shall include On/Off,Operation Mode, Occupied Cooling Setpoint, Occupied Heating Setpoint, Setup (Cooling) setback setpoint, Setback (Heating) setback setpoint, Remote Controller On/Off Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Mode Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Setpoint Permit/Prohibit, and Timed Override Enable 5) Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setpoints when unit is Off (unoccupied) by Group 6) An override shall be provided for use enabling indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period by the BACnet building management system programming. b. The BACnet building management system shall support auto-changeover through its programming. 1) Auto-change shall provide changeover for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems based upon the group configurations. This will allow for the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit’s mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint temperature. 2) Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained on the same DIII-Net communication bus to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or the same branch selector box in the Heat Recovery system. 3) Changeover to cooling mode shall occur when the room temperature is great than or equal to the cooling setpoint a) Differential to be determined by BACnet building management system programming

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 39 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

4) Changeover to heating mode shall occur when room temperature is less than or equal to the heating setpoint. a) Differential to be determined by BACnet building management system programming 5) Guard timer a) Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during this period. b) Guard timer should be ignored by a change of setpoint manually from the BMS, Intelligent Touch Controller, Remote Controller, or by schedule. c) Guard timer to be configured by BACnet building management system programming (30 minute minimum recommended) c. The Interface for use in BACnet shall support force shutdown of associated indoor unit groups.

F. DMS504C71: Interface for use in Lonworks 1. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall provide control for all VRV, SkyAir indoor units, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP928BB2S RA Adapter. 2. It shall be capable of handling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups (128 indoor units) connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. 3. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall support operations superseding that of the Daikin centralized controller, local remote controller, system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. 4. The Interface for use in Lonworks wiring shall consist of a stranded non-polar two-wire connection to the terminals F1F2 (out-out) of the outdoor unit. 5. The Interface for use in Lonworks is wall mounted and can be used in conjunction with the Intelligent Touch Controller to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). 6. The Interface for use in Lonworks is connected to the Lonworks building management system by twisted two wire pair specified by Echelon. 7. The Interface for use in Lonworks can be used in conjunction with the BRC1E71 (Navigation Remote Controller), BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller), and DCS601C71 (Intelligent Touch Controller (ITC)) with or without the DCS601A72 (ITC DIII Plus Adapter) to control the same indoor unit groups. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each indoor unit group associated with the Interface for use in Lonworks. 8. Mounting: a. The Interface for use in Lonworks can be mounted indoor on the wall or in an enclosure (field supplied). For exterior mounting the Interface must be mounted in an enclosure, and proper NEMA and/or IP rating enclosure should be used. b. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall be approximately 10.23” x 6.61” x 1.94” in size. 9. Display Features: a. LED display provides the interface’s operational status and alarm. b. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall be capable of displaying the indoor unit network variable points on the Lonworks building management system. c. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall provide the Lonworks building management system the capability to command the setpoint temperature in 0.1 0C increments with a range of 16 0C - 32 0C. 1) Display of temperature setpoint information shall be displayed in Celsius 2) Fahrenheit display will require the Lonworks building management system to convert the temperature setpoint from Celsius to Fahrenheit d. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall provide the Lonworks building management system the capability to display the room temperature in 0.1 0C increments with a range of -10 0C - 50 0C. 1) Display of room temperature information shall be shown in Celsius

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 40 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

2) Fahrenheit display will require the Lonworks building management system to convert the room temperature from Celsius to Fahrenheit e. Error codes generated by the indoor units, outdoor units, branch selector boxes, and remote controllers shall be displayed on the Lonworks building management system in the event of system abnormality/error with a decimal value error code that can be cross referenced as specified by Daikin. 1) Communication errors between the Interface for use in Lonworks and the Lonworks building management system shall be displayed with a red flashing LED on the Interface for use in Lonworks 10. Basic Operation: a. The Interface for use in Lonworks will provide 2 Node Network Variables, 4 Common Network Variables for the DIII-Net communication bus, and 23 indoor unit Network Variables for each indoor unit that can be monitored/controlled via the Lonworks building management system (see the Interface for use in Lonworks Design Guide – ED72-333) b. Capable of controlling up to 64 indoor unit groups (128 indoor units) c. The Building management System shall control the following group operations: 1) On/Off 2) Operation Mode (Auto, Heat, Cool, Fan) 3) Single setpoint setting for Cooling and Heating in the occupied mode 4) Fan Speed a) 2 fan speeds selectable (High/Low) b) Indoor units with 3 or more fan speeds will display as either high or low based upon fan speed value. c) Fan speeds with a value less than 4 will display as “Low”. Values 5 or greater will display as “High”. 5) Remote controller permit/prohibit of On/Off, Mode, and Setpoint 6) Filter sign reset for indoor units 7) Disable the Intelligent Touch Controller 8) Forced off of indoor units 9) Forced Thermo-off of indoor units d. Capable of providing battery backup power for up to 3 years in total time 1) Capable of providing battery backup power for up to 1 month in total time with a minimum charging time of 24 hours. 2) Settings stored in non-volatile memory 3) Binding between the Interface for use in Lonworks and the Lonworks building management system will be saved if power is lost. 11. Programmability: a. The Lonworks building management system shall support weekly schedule settings through its programming. 1) The schedule shall support the indoor unit : 2) On/Off 3) Each scheduled event shall specify time and target group 4) Each scheduled event shall include On/Off, Operation Mode, Occupied Cooling Setpoint, Occupied Heating Setpoint, Setup (Cooling) setback setpoint, Setback (Heating) setback setpoint, Remote Controller On/Off Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Operation Mode Permit/Prohibit, Remote Controller Setpoint Permit/Prohibit, and Timed Override Enable 5) Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setback setpoints when unit is Off (unoccupied) by Group 6) An override shall be provided for use enabling indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period by the BACnet building management system programming. b. The Lonworks building management system shall support auto-changeover through its programming.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 41 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1) Auto-changeover shall provide changeover for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems based upon the group configurations. This will allow for the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit’s mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint temperature. 2) Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained on the same DIII-Net communication bus to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or to the same branch selector box in the Heat Recovery system. 3) Changeover to cooling mode shall occur when the room temperature is great than or equal to the cooling setpoint 4) Differential to be determined by BACnet building management system programming 5) Changeover to heating mode shall occur when room temperature is less than or equal to the heating setpoint. 6) Differential to be determined by BACnet building management system programming 7) Guard timer a) Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent frequent changeover during a short period b) Guard timer should be ignored by a change of setpoint manually from the BMS, Intelligent Touch Controller, Remote Controller, or by schedule c) Guard timer to be configured by the Lonworks building management system programming (30 minute minimum recommended) c. The Interface for use in Lonworks shall support force shutdown of associated indoor unit groups.

4.03 LOCAL REMOTE CONTROLS

A. Daikin VRV local remote controllers are compatible with all VRV indoor units. The remote controller wiring consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the indoor unit. The local remote controllers may be wall-mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). Temperature setpoint can be adjusted in increments of 1°F/°C. In the cases where a system or unit error may occur, the VRV controllers will display a two-digit error code and the unit address. The local remote controllers do not need to be addressed.

B. BRC1E73: Navigation (NAV) Remote Controller 1. The NAV Remote Controller can provide control for all VRV indoor units. 2. The remote controller wiring consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the indoor unit at terminals P1/P2. 3. The NAV Remote Controller is wall mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). 4. The NAV Remote Controller does not need to be addressed. 5. The NAV Remote Controller can be used in conjunction with the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller) or another NAV Remote Controller to control the same indoor unit group. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. 6. Mounting: a) The NAV Remote Controller shall be mounted into a standard 2” x 4” junction box. 7. Display Features: a. The NAV Remote Controller shall be approximately 4.75” x 4.75” in size with a 2.75” x 1.75” LCD display. b. Backlit LCD display with contrast adjustment and auto off after 30 seconds. c. Display language shall be selectable from English, French or Spanish. d. Selectable display – Detailed, Standard and Simple

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 42 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1) Detailed display a) Shall display Operation Mode, Cool, Heat and Setback setpoints, Fan Speed, Louver position, Room Temperature, Time and Day of the Week 2) Standard display b) Shall display Operation Mode, Cool, Heat and Setback setpoints and Fan Speed 3) Simple display a) Shall display Operation Mode, Cool, Heat and Setback setpoints, Fan Speed and Room Temperature b) The room temperature shall be displayed with a large 11/16” font e. All displayed items configurable f. Configure “Off” to be displayed when unit is turned off (field setting required) Prevents mode adjustment g. Setpoint can be removed from display when unit is turned Off (field setting required) Prevents setpoint adjustment h. Fan speed display removable (field setting required)Prevents fan speed adjustment i. System Status icons. j. The controller shall display temperature setpoint in one degree increments with a range of 60-90 oF (16-32 oC) k. Detailed and Simple display will reflect room temperature (0-176 oF/-18-80 oC range in one degree increments). l. Display of temperature information shall be configurable for Fahrenheit or Celsius m. On/Off status shall be displayed with an LED. n. Error codes will be displayed with a two digit code in the event of system abnormality/error.(A blinking LED will also signal system abnormality/error) o. The following system temperatures can be displayed to assist service personnel in troubleshooting: 1) Return Air Temperature 2) Liquid Line Temperature 3) Gas Line Temperature 4) Discharge Air Temperature (depending on unit), 5) Remote Controller Sensor Temperature 6) Temperature used for Indoor Unit Control 8. Basic Operation: a. Capable of controlling a group of up to 16 indoor units. b. Controller shall control the following group operations: 1) On/Off, Operation Mode (Cool, Heat, Fan, Dry and Auto* (*with VRV Heat Recovery & Heat Pump Systems)) a) Configure only the essential modes to be selectable – remove unnecessary mode selection(s) from display 2) Independent Cooling and Heating setpoints in the occupied mode a) Dual setpoints (individual Cool and Heat setpoints with minimum setpoint differential 0 – 7oF (0 – 4oC) default 2 oF (1 oC)) or Single setpoint 3) Independent Cooling Setup and Heating Setback setpoints in the unoccupied mode 4) Fan Speed a) Up to 5 speeds (dependent on indoor unit type) 5) Vane direction and oscillation (dependent on indoor unit type) a) Airflow direction b) Up to 5 louver positions and auto swing c) Individual airflow d) Provides individual control of up to four (4) louvers on an indoor unit e) Dual airflow f) Provides control of both internal and external louver positions g) Automatic draft protection i. Automatically prevents air flow from blowing directly on occupants

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 43 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

c. The controller shall be able to limit the user adjustable setpoint ranges individually for cooling and heating in the occupied period d. Function button lockout (On/Off, Mode, Fan Speed, Up/Down, Left, Right Arrows) e. Optional Controller Face Decal to hide unnecessary (locked out) buttons f. Indoor Unit group assignment g. Filter indicator 1) Filter service indicator shall be displayed after 100, 1250 or 2500 (default) hours of run time configurable via field setting h. Clock (12/24 hour) and Day display i. Automatic adjustment for Daylight Savings Time (DST) 1) Set changeover period (second Sunday in March / first Sunday in November) 9. Programmability: a. Controller shall support schedule settings with selectable weekly pattern options. 1) 7-day 2) Weekday + Weekend 3) Weekday + Saturday + Sunday 4) Everyday 5) The schedule shall support unit On/Off 6) Independent settings for Cooling and/or Heating setpoints when unit is on (occupied) 7) Independent Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setpoints when unit is off (unoccupied) 8) A maximum of 5 operations can be schedulable per day 9) Time setting in 1-minute increments b. The Controller shall support Auto-changeover mode for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems, therefore, allowing the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit’s mode between Cool and Heat according to the room temperature and temperature setpoint. c. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur at cooling setpoint + 1 oF (0.5 oC) as the primary changeover deadband and takes the guard timer into consideration.Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) d. Changeover to cooling mode shall occur at the primary changeover deadband to cooling + 1 oF (0.5 oC) as the secondary changeover deadband.Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) e. Changeover to heating mode shall occur at heating setpoint - 1oF (0.5 oC) as the primary changeover deadband and takes the guard timer into consideration. Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) f. Changeover to heating mode shall occur at the primary changeover deadband to heating - 1oF (0.5 oC) as the secondary changeover deadband.Configurable from 1 – 4oF (0.5 – 2oC) g. 1 hour guard timer 1) Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during this period. 2) Guard timer is ignored by a change of setpoint manually from either the Multi- zone Controller, Remote Controller, or by schedule. 3) The Guard timer is also ignored if the space temperature reaches the secondary changeover deadband (configurable from 1 - 4oF (0.5 – 2oC)) from the primary changeover deadband, and the guard timer has been activated 4) 60 minutes as default, configurable to 15, 30, or 90 minutes h. The controller shall support the Auto-setback by sensor function (dependent on indoor unit type) 1) The cooling and heating setpoints shall gradually relax (configurable) internally when the room is determined to be unoccupied 2) The internal setpoint shall return to the original setpoint when room occupancy is detected i. The controller shall support the Auto-off by sensor function (dependent on indoor unit type)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 44 of 45

VRV HEAT RECOVERY 23 7700

1) The indoor unit shall turn off when it is determined that the room is unoccupied after a specified time has elapsed 2) The indoor unit shall be turned on manually when occupancy is detected j. The controller shall support the Filter Auto Clean function to be performed once a day (dependent on indoor unit type) 1) Eight (8) time periods (00:00-03-00, 03:00-06:00, 06:00-09:00, 09:00-12:00, 12:00-15:00, 15:00-18:00, 18:00-21:00, 21:00-00:00) shall be available to select from to enable the automatic filter cleaning function 2) Default time period (00:00 to 3:00) shall be used if the period for filter auto cleaning is not specified 3) The indoor unit shall be stopped during auto filter cleaning function operation k. The Controller shall support an Auto Off Timer for temporarily enabling indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period. 1) When the Off Timer is enabled and when the unit is manually turned on at the remote controller 2) The controller shall shut off the unit after a set time period 3) The time period shall be configurable in the controller menu with a range of 30- 180 minutes in 10 minute increments l. The room temperature shall be capable of being sensed at either the NAV Remote Controller, the Indoor Unit return air temperature sensor (default), or Remote Temperature Sensor (KRCS01-1B) configured through the field settings.

C. KRCS01-1B: Remote Temperature Sensor 1. The Remote Temperature Sensor can provide temperature sensing for all VRV indoor units. 2. The remote controller wiring consists of a non-polar two-wire connection to the indoor unit at terminals X13A. 3. The Remote Temperature Sensor is wall mounted and is used to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit. 4. The Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in conjunction with the Navigation Remote Controller, Simplified Remote Controller, and the Wireless Remote Controller to sense space temperature outside of the indoor unit. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. 5. Mounting: a. Sensor Box shall be 2.38” x 1.97” x 0.75” (H x W x D) in size. b. Can be mounted on the wall in the provided sensor box c. Can be mounted in the Simplified Remote Controller (BRC2A71). d. Can be mounted a button temperature sensor holder (field supplied). 6. Application: a. The location of the temperature sensor should provide a realistic sample of the space temperature in order to provide the optimum comfort level to the occupants. 1) Things that need to be considered are: a) Indoor unit location b) Will outside area be brought into the space and/or indoor unit c) Ceiling heights d) Control Scheme e) Design and limitations due to architecture f) Plenum air return 7. Basic Operation: a. Replaces indoor unit return air temperature sensor. b. Senses room temperature for only one indoor unit.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 45 of 45

TERMINAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 8000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating Equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Equipment capacity and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 0500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled.

B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and ARI labeled.

C. See Commissioning specification for additional requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each HVAC unit.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SMALL PACKAGED HVAC UNITS

A. Non-Ducted, Split System Cooling Unit: 1. Indoor Section: Non-ducted, compact fan coil unit designed for wall mounting. 2. Outdoor Section: Capacity matched with indoor section, steel cabinet with hermetically sealed compressor, accumulator, crankcase heater, high and low pressure switches, restart delay relay, and propeller fans. 3. Refrigerant Piping: See Section 23 2300. 4. Unit shall be R-410A 5. Power for indoor unit shall be derived from outdoor unit for systems smaller than 2-1/2 tons. 6. Provide with integral pump for location where gravity drain is not indicated on drawings. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mitsubishi or Daikin only. 8. Minimum efficiency shall be 18 SEER per AHRI 210/240 test procedure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

B. Piping: Refer to applicable sections for piping, ductwork, insulation, painting, etc.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2

TERMINAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 8000

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, to include electrical and piping connections. Report results to A/E in writing. Inspection must include a complete startup checklist to include (as a minimum) the following: Completed Start-Up Checklists as found in manufacturer's IOM.

D. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service. Clean entire unit, comb coil fins as necessary and clean filters. Measure and record electrical values for voltage and amperage. Refer to Division 23 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" and comply with provisions therein.

E. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain the unit. Refer to Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures and Demonstration and Training.

3.02 AIR HANDLING INSTALLATION

A. Installation and Arrangement: Air handling equipment shall be installed and arranged as shown on the Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation connection and start-up.

B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up.

C. Filters: Specified filters or approved temporary construction filters shall be installed in supply units prior to start-up or used for drying and/or temporary heat.

3.03 CONTROLS

A. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the electrical work specified in this Section.

B. The requirements of this Section apply to the electrical systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 26 sections.

C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes.

D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Electric distribution equipment. 2. Complete lighting and power systems, including panelboards, branch circuits, devices, lighting fixtures, lighting controls, etc. 3. Connection of electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of this Specification. 4. Wiring to and connection of electrical equipment or appliances furnished outside of these Specifications and Contract but described on the Electrical Drawings. 5. Grounding. 6. Special systems as specified herein.

E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements.

F. Temporary electrical service, Division 1.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the UL label.

B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 2. Federal Specifications (FS) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 7. Factory Mutual (FM) 8. 2012 International Building Code (IBC) 9. National Electrical Code (NEC) 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

12. 2012 International Fire Code (IFC) 13. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 14. 2012 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)

D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner.

E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed.

F. All disconnect switches, panelboards, and equipment of like nature shall be of the same manufacturer.

G. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. If Drawings and Specifications contradict each other, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification prior to the bid. If time constraints are such that this is not possible, then the more stringent of the conflicting requirements shall be included in the bid. The Specifications are not automatically more authoritative than the drawings.

1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items, and include the wiring and/or devices shown on the Drawings or listed in other sections of this Specification. Also see "Equipment Connections."

1.04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions.

B. Control devices and control wiring relating to the heating and air conditioning systems are specified under other Sections of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid.

D. All sections of Division 26 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 26. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section.

B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used.

D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method.

E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified.

F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans.

G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor’s responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data.

H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time.

1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION

A. Material other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted.

1.07 CHANGE ORDERS

A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work.

1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain a set of record drawings as directed in Division 1.

B. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date.

C. Record and accurately indicate the following: 1. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed conduits/cables.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

2. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, addenda, obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information.

D. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review.

E. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents as indicated in Division 1.

F. Use standards set in contract documents. Computer-aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project record drawings. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor’s expense.

1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Upon completion of Contract and after no further action is noted as being required on catalog data submitted for review, submit multiple sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Brochure as specified in Division 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operation procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts lists, service representatives, supplier for replacement parts, etc. Bind each set of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab marker for each classification of equipment or data.

1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. At the completion of the project, at a time scheduled by the Owner, assemble key mechanics, subcontractors, vendors, factory representatives and similar personnel required to explain all facets of maintenance and operation of the installed system to the Owner's personnel. Instructions shall include actual operation of systems and methods of maintenance.

1.11 ALTERNATE BIDS

A. Refer to Division 1 for possible effect upon Work of this Division.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice.

B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or be approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and ordinances.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

B. All material shall be new and bear manufacturer's name, model number, electrical characteristics and other identification, and shall be the standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of similar material.

C. All materials shall be of manufacturer's latest design, and of the best quality. The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable standards listed under Quality Assurance.

2.02 ACCESS PANELS

A. Provide panels of adequate size for equipment requiring service and installed above plaster or gypsum board ceilings, behind walls or in furring. Furnish complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Size, number and location of access panels is not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for simple manual access, nor smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through. Milcor Style A, K, L, or M panels or equivalent Bilco or Potter-Roemer as required by construction. Access panels shall maintain ceiling fire rating.

2.03 PAINTING

A. The work of this Division includes painting of the electrical items. All exposed conduits, boxes, surface raceways, etc. shall be painted per the Architect's direction. See Division 9 for additional painting requirements.

2.04 FIRE RATINGS

A. Electrical items (light fixtures, boxes, etc.) recessed into fire rated walls or ceilings shall be alcoved in gypboard enclosures or be UL listed to maintain the fire rating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without added cost to the Owner.

B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner approved by the Architect.

C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made.

D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment.

F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing, with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually satisfactory time and duration.

G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's liability.

H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information shown prior to rough-in or demolition and notify the Architect of any discrepancies.

I. Coordinate all work and trim with carpet installers. Provide carpet plates on all carpet surfaces, complete as required.

J. Install equipment such that code-required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances for future maintenance.

K. Coordinate installation of electrical conduit, boxes, fittings, anchors, and miscellaneous items to be concealed in precast concrete assemblies.

3.02 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILL

A. Provide trenching, backfilling, compaction, repaving or other site restoration as required by the work done in this Division. Minimum trench depth shall be 36" unless otherwise noted. Install 6" wide red vinyl tape with lettering "Caution: Buried Electric Line Below" 18" above all buried electric lines in this contract.

B. Excavating and backfilling required for installation of electrical work shall be performed in accordance with requirements specified in Division 31. Backfill in excavations outside of building may be excavated material from site containing no rocks over 3/4" in diameter.

C. Provide all necessary backfill materials, whether from site excavations or from off-site borrows, to completely fill excavations. Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work with the Owner.

D. Bored Crossings: Casing shall be smooth steel pipe fabricated in sections for welded joints, of size sufficiently large to provide adequate working space to properly install conduits, continuous butt welded at joints for rigid, watertight encasement, minimum thickness of 0.188” for casing under 14” diameter, and 0.281” for casings 14” and larger diameter.

3.03 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Protect electrical work, wire and cable, materials and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective.

B. Switchgear, panels, light fixtures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or closed to exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect if damaged.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

C. Including products of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored or damaged.

D. Provide for dehumidification of equipment during construction when directed by Architect.

E. Remove debris from project site upon completion or sooner if directed.

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Provide raceways and conduits for all electrical system wiring as specified herein. Class II or III systems wiring installed per Article 725 of NEC will be required to be installed in raceway unless otherwise indicated. When open wiring is permitted, raceways will be required in insulated walls and in other inaccessible areas. Low voltage wiring installed in return air plenums shall utilize plenum rated cable.

B. The extent of the branch circuiting and control wiring shown shall not be changed.

C. Cross or hash marks on power and lighting conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 minimum copper branch circuit conductors unless otherwise noted. Where such marks do not appear, provide conductors as required to provide an operable system, sized per local codes.

D. Repair surfaces damaged during installation to match adjacent undisturbed areas. Surface preparation, including cleaning and priming, shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's requirements.

E. Adjacent panelboards, component cabinets, terminal cabinets, trench duct, and wire gutter exposed in finished areas shall have matching trim and finish.

F. In general, the mounting heights shall be as noted on the Drawings or as listed below. Where no heights are indicated, request clarification from the Architect. Consult the Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts prior to roughing in. All dimensions are to the center of the device above finished floor unless specified otherwise. Lighting dimensions are to the bottom of suspended fixtures; mount panelboards 72" to top handle; mount devices above counters, 12" above counter or 4-1/2" above backsplash, whichever is greater; and receptacles in unfinished areas 48".

G. All raceways and wiring shall be concealed where possible. All wiring devices, recessed light fixtures, etc., shall be flush mounted unless otherwise noted.

H. Relays, panels, cabinets and equipment shall be level and plumb and installed parallel with structural building lines. All equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in which they will operate.

I. The Drawings do not indicate all items necessary. Provide associated equipment, materials, and labor as required for complete and operable systems.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Under no conditions are beams, girders, footings or columns to be cut for electrical items unless so shown on Drawings or written approval obtained from the Architect.

B. Cutting, patching and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified, including plastering, gypsum board, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work and painting shall be performed by workers skilled in their respective trades.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

C. Follow requirements specified in Division 1.

3.06 SLEEVES AND CHASES

A. Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass through floors, ceilings or walls. Seal all openings around conduits against leaks and in a manner to maintain the fire rating of the structure penetrated. Prevent unnecessary cutting in connection with the finished work. Make all repairs and seals in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

3.07 NOISE CONTROL

A. The entire electrical system apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.

B. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back-to-back, nor shall straight- through boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note, to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces.

C. Contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise-producing devices shall not be placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space.

D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced.

3.08 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a finished working installation.

B. Verify the rough-in and wiring requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring electrical connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. Motor connections shall be made for the proper direction of rotation. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system and proper lubrication to all bearings in unit is checked. Minimum size flex for mechanical equipment shall be 1/2". Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex.

C. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical equipment and equipment furnished under other Divisions are based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually furnished may be of a different brand with different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire and circuit breakers shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained. Responsibility for this coordination shall rest with the Contractor.

3.09 TESTS

A. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of faults, shorts, or unintentional grounds.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500

B. After the interior wiring system installation is completed, and at such time as the Owner may direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The test shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or an authorized representative. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests, and the Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod, the resistance, and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all conductors, cables, connectors, lugs, cable ties, and terminations for all systems.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All conductors shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and comply with Fed. Spec. J-C- 30B and UL 83. Materials omitted here but necessary to complete the work are to be of comparable quality.

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver conductors and cables in complete coils with UL label and bearing manufacturer's name, wire size, and type of insulation.

B. Store and handle materials so as not to subject them to corrosion or mechanical damage and in a manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operation.

C. Deliver conductors No. 10 and smaller in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged cartons with labels legible and intact.

1.04 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. None required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller may be soft-drawn, stranded, or solid copper. Conductors larger than No. 10 AWG shall be stranded, soft-drawn copper.

B. Insulation for new conductors installed in raceways shall be "THWN" for conductors No. 8 AWG or smaller, and "THWN" or "THHN" for conductors No. 6 AWG or larger, or as noted.

C. Where adverse conductor exposure exists, code-approved insulation suitable for the conditions encountered shall be used unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

D. All wire and cable for feeder circuits shall conform to the latest requirements of the current edition of the NEC and shall meet all ASTM Specifications. Wire and cable shall be new and have wire size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals.

E. Sizes shall not be less than indicated. Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG. Class I remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 18 AWG.

F. All insulation shall be rated 600 volts unless noted otherwise.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Hatfield, Anaconda, Rome Cable, Essex, Belden, West Penn, or approved.

2.02 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. All connectors shall be solderless pressure type per Fed. Spec. W-S-610, properly taped. All taped joints shall be with plastic tape, "Scotch 33," applied in half-lap layers without stretching to deform.

B. Splices shall utilize Scotch "Hyflex" or "Ideal" wing nut connector installed properly. Splices for No. 8 and larger wires shall be made with tin or silver plated copper compression sleeves.

C. Splices made in handholes and manholes, or underground splices, shall be made water tight with epoxy resin-type splicing kits.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulation shall be removed with a stripping tool designated specifically for that purpose. All conductors shall be left nick-free.

B. UL listed pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made.

C. Raceway shall be complete, clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors.

D. Wire shall not be left extending out of exposed conduit stubs or incomplete raceways where subject to mechanical injury.

E. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding tensions, bending radii of the cable and compounds.

F. Conductors shall be terminated as required.

G. Conductor sizes for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer except as noted.

H. Stranded conductors shall not be terminated with post and screw unless compression spade/ring lug is utilized.

I. 120-volt homeruns over 80 feet in length shall be minimum #10 conductor.

3.02 LABELING

A. Provide color coding of building wiring consistent throughout the work as listed herein, unless required otherwise by local code authority. Band feeder conductors not available in colors where clearly visible at each termination, tape or splice using two full wraps of 3/4" adhesive vinyl tape or equally visible color marking corresponding to the following table.

Less than 250V between phases 251 to 600V btwn phases Phase A - Black Phase A - Brown Phase B - Red Phase B - Orange Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519

Neutral - White Neutral - Gray Ground - Green Ground - Green

B. Switch legs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the above phases to which they are connected or may be any other color distinctive from those listed above. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors but the identification shall be by labels throughout. Labeling shall be accomplished by using computer-generated heat shrink labels suitable for the wire size used. In no case will hand lettering or wraparound labels be accepted.

C. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A-B-C left to right or A-B-C top to bottom.

D. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made.

E. Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and conductor identification shall match that shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable.

3.03 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splices are to be made up completely promptly after wire installation. Single wire pigtails shall be provided for fixture and device connections. Wire nuts may be used for fixture wire connections to single wire circuit conductor pigtails.

3.04 CONNECTORS

A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool- applied, spade-flared lug when terminating at a screw connection.

B. All screw and bolt-type connectors shall be made up tight and be retightened after an eight-hour period.

C. All tool-applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness.

D. Check terminations in all panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, etc., six months after completion of installation. Supply a confirming letter to the Owner at completion of test.

3.05 TESTS

A. Perform insulation resistance tests on all feeders and circuits over 100 A, 480 volt and below, with a 1,000 volt megger. The written test report listing the results of the test to be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Equipment which may be damaged by this test shall be disconnected prior to the test.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide ground system as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as required by NEC and other rules and regulations pertaining to grounding.

1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. None required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment or grounding conductors shall be soft drawn copper, stranded per ASTM B8 and, if insulated, shall have green insulation.

2.02 GROUNDING BUSHINGS/WEDGES

A. Sufficient ampacity with grounding conductor set screw connection.

2.03 CONNECTOR

A. Cast, set screw or bolted type.

2.04 GROUND RODS

A. Copper-clad steel, not less than 3/4" in diameter, 8' long, driven full length into the earth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with Article 250, Tables 250.66 and 250.122 of the NEC.

B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded.

C. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the flange connection.

D. Where the metallic water service is used, it shall be grounded as described by Article 250.53 of the NEC.

E. Generally, all supplemental grounding electrodes shall be ground rods.

F. All ground wire connections below finished grade, cast in concrete, or bonding solid wire shall be exothermically welded.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526

G. Where there is no metallic water service to the building, ground connections shall be made to driven ground rods on the exterior of the building.

H. The maximum resistance measured in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional rods shall be installed not less than 6' on centers, or if sectional- type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Engineer shall be notified immediately.

I. Grounding conductor connectors shall be made up tight and located for future servicing and to ensure low impedance.

J. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod and the resistance and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

K. Where new circuits are to be served by existing panels with no ground bus, provide supplemental copper ground bus in panel.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all electrical equipment and wiring with adequate supports of specified type required for a complete installation.

1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Submit shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FASTENERS

A. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw-type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs, heat-treated or spring steel tension clamps on steel work; for new concrete installation use cast-in-concrete inserts. Kindorf D-255 or approved.

B. Hammer-driven and trigger-fired anchors may be used only after obtaining specific written authorization from the Architect.

2.02 OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS

A. Wood Stud Walls: Adjustable bar hangers with "C" channel cross section Steel City 6010 series, or approved, or mounted on solid blocking. 4-inch square boxes adjacent to wood studs may be side nailed and back braced with Steel City No. 50 box brace.

B. Light steel construction, bar hangers with 1-inch long studs between metal studs or metal stud "C" brackets snapped on and tab-locked to metal studs.

C. Concrete or masonry walls where boxes are not cast in place. Flush anchors or concrete inserts.

D. Flush Ceiling Outlets: Steel City 6010 series or equal bar hangers.

2.03 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. One Hole Malleable Straps: Steel City, Appleton, T&B, Diamond, Raco, or approved.

B. Conduit Clips: Caddy, Raco, or approved.

C. Nail-Up Straps: 1/2" through 1", Raco 2252, 2253, 2254, or approved.

D. Adjustable Hangers for Conduits 1-1/2" and Larger: Steel City C-149 with threaded steel rod of proper size.

E. Adjustable trapeze hangers to support groups of parallel conduits; Steel City B-905 steel channel, H-119 square washer, C-105 strap, threaded rod. Components of Unistrut, Globe Strut, Harvey Alstrut, Kindorf, Thomas & Betts, or approved.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529

2.04 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS

A. Side Beam Connector, Kindorf E-244; 90 degree fitting, Kindorf B-916; clamp type anchor clips Kindorf Type "C," Unistrut P2675 or approved, spot type concrete insert Kindorf B-255 with "Galv-Krom" finish.

2.05 SUPPORT CHANNELS

A. Conduit: Kindorf B-905 with Galv-Krom finish, and C-105 single bolt channel pipe straps.

B. Lighting: Kindorf B-900 with G-969 closure strip and G-977 swing connector.

C. Recessed in Concrete: Kindorf D-980 with D-982 anchored end caps and D-983 joiner clips.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Every fastening device and support for electrical equipment (includes fixtures, panels, outlets, conduits, and cabinets) shall be capable of sustaining not less than four times the ultimate weight of the object or objects. Fasten support to the building or a building structural member.

B. Provide independent supports to the building or building structural member for electrical fixtures, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls, or in void spaces and/or over the furred or suspended ceilings. Chain or additional ceiling wires may be used for light fixture supports.

C. Other crafts' fastening devices shall not be used for the supporting means of electrical, equipment, materials, or fixtures.

D. Supports and/or fastening devices shall not be used to support more than one particular item.

E. Vertical support members for equipment and fixtures shall be straight and parallel to building walls.

F. Examine all equipment locations to determine type of supports required.

G. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures.

H. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1-1/2" in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4" in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars. Holes not used shall be filled.

3.02 BOXES

A. Boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be supported independently of the ceiling supports.

B. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and sheet metal boxes shall be supported directly from the building structure or by bar hangers.

C. Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box and the raceway shall be supported with an approved fastener not more than 24" from the box.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529

3.03 RACEWAYS

A. Support conduits within 18" of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets, couplings, elbows, and deflections. Maximum distance between supports shall not exceed ten (10) foot spacing.

B. Conduit up to and including 1" EMT may be supported from ceiling fixture wires by conduit clips or other approved devices only with written approval of the installer of the ceiling support system. All other conduit runs shall be secured to the structure by two-hole straps or supported on Kindorf or Unistrut hangers. Wire will not be permitted for supporting conduit. All visible conduit runs will be parallel to the building structural lines.

C. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire.

D. In partitions of light steel construction, sheet metal screws may be used, and bar hangers may be attached with saddle-suspended ceiling construction only. Lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports.

E. Support suspended feeder conduits by metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel rods. Wire ties to prevent displacement, using not less than No. 14 iron wire, may be used only for concealed runs in concrete for conduit up to 1-1/4".

F. At main distribution and surface mounted branch panels and cabinets where conduit exits from the top, provide support channels on wall 24" above panel and at 6'-0" intervals from there on for support of conduits.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all raceways, fittings, and boxes of specified type required for complete project. Install all systems in raceways unless specifically noted otherwise. Provide all outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and special boxes required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved

B. All boxes shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. Where special fabrication is required, the work shall be performed by a listed facility in accordance with UL 50, and all products of manufacture shall bear a label. Outlet and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements for "THHN" wire or as noted on Drawings.

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver raceways with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label and bearing manufacturer's name on each length.

B. Deliver fittings in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact.

1.04 APPLICATION

A. Areas of use:

Underground PVC Within poured Concrete (except GRC, IMC, PVC slab-on grade) or CMU Dry concealed locations GRC, IMC, EMT Wet or Dry exposed locations, GRC, IMC subject to damage Dry exposed locations, not subject GRC, IMC, EMT to damage Hazardous Class I or II GRC, IMC

B. Underground conduit shall be minimum 3/4" trade size. PVC shall not be used inside building. Unless otherwise approved, all conduits shall be installed under reinforcing steel.

C. Where the contractor elects to utilize PVC in lieu of GRC, the contractor shall provide supplemental ground bus in terminating switch and panelboards, and green ground wire in conduit according to code rules.

D. For the purposes of this section, poured concrete slabs on grade and under-the-building slabs are not classified as dry locations.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533

E. Flexible metal conduit will be permitted only where flexibility is necessary. Exceptions are connections to recessed light fixtures. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection to all equipment subject to movement or vibration such as motors, transformers, etc. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used when moisture may be present and for exposed motor and equipment connections.

F. Surface raceway may be used only where specifically called for on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

G. Aluminum conduit is not permitted.

1.05 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A Submit product data for surface raceway and wireway.

B. Submit product data for floor boxes. Submit shop drawings for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. Include layout drawings showing components and wiring.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Allied Tube & Conduit, Western Tube & Conduit, Triangle, Bridgeport, AFC, Carlon, Western Plastics, Alflex, or approved substitute. Wiremold, Walker, or approved substitute. Raco, Thomas & Betts, or approved substitute.

2.02 CONDUITS

A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC) shall be hot-dip zinc, galvanized inside and out, mild steel pipe manufactured in accordance with UL-6 and ANSI C80.1. All threads shall be galvanized after cutting.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel only and shall comply with UL-797 and ANSI C80.3. Exterior shall be hot-dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion-resistant lubricating coating.

C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) shall comply with UL-1242 and ANSI C80.6. Exterior shall be hot-dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion-resistant lubricating coating.

D. Rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC) polyvinyl chloride shall be schedule 40 unless otherwise noted, and shall comply with UL-651 and NEMA TC 2.

E. Surface raceway shall utilize snap-in cover and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer and shall comply with UL 5 standard. Material and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

F. Flexible metal conduit shall be steel and comply with UL 1 and ANSI standards. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall comply with UL 360 and ANSI standards.

2.03 WIREWAYS

A. Gutters: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knockouts on standard spacing, screw cover, suitable for environment.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a complete system.

C. Exterior wireways and fittings/accessories shall be stainless steel.

2.04 FITTINGS

A. GRC and IMC shall be coupled and terminated with threaded fittings. Ends shall be bushed with insulating bushings equal to T&B 1220 or 1230 series.

B. Connectors and couplings for EMT shall be steel concrete tight compression type or set screw type with insulated throats on connectors. Indent type connectors shall not be used.

C. Conduits piercing a building waterproof membrane shall be provided with O-Z type FSR fittings.

D. Flexible metal conduit shall utilize screw-in type connectors. Couplings and set-screw type connectors are not permitted.

E. Seal-offs with filler fiber, compound, large removable cover. All components shall be of the same manufacturer.

F. Expansion Couplings: 1. Exposed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be weatherproof with external bonding jumper, providing at least 4” longitudinal movement with bushed conduit ends. 2. Concealed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be water tight with an internal bonding jumper and neoprene construction. The fitting shall allow 3/4” movement in any direction or deflection of 30 degrees from normal.

G. Locknuts shall be galvanized steel.

2.05 BOXES

A. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 4" square and 1-1/2" deep except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved.

B. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock-out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required.

C. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings and walls above 14 feet.

D. Boxes shall be of the cast-metal hub type when located in normally wet locations and when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces.

E. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension rings or plastic covers as required.

F. Cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with the outside of exterior surfaces shall be gasketed.

G. Provide boxes suitable for the intended environment and sized as required to accommodate the equipment within. Exterior boxes shall be stainless steel.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533

H. Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by the National Electrical Code shall be constructed of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified above. Boxes shall be furnished with screw-fastener covers. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Ends of metal conduits shall be reamed and left free of burrs.

B. Provide pull boxes or vaults where shown or required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree bends, or to ease pulling tension. Use boxes of code- required size with removable covers, installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed.

C. Conceal all wiring in finished spaces so far as practicable. Exposed conduit shall be used only in unfinished spaces.

D. Exposed raceways shall be parallel or at right angles to structural lines, and shall be neatly offset into boxes. Exposed raceways shall follow existing exposed piping/ductwork/conduit paths as far as practicable.

E. Conduit stubbed from a concrete slab or wall to serve an outlet mounted on a table or to supply a machine shall have a rigid conduit coupling flush with the surface of the slab. Provide plug where conduit is to be used in future.

F. Keep conduit and raceway closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance.

G. Remove all foreign matter from raceways and pull mandrel through conduits larger than 1-1/2" prior to installing conductors.

H. Where no conduit size is noted on the Drawings, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of type THHN conductors installed, but in no case smaller than 1/2" trade diameter. Conductor quantities indicated in conduits do not include ground wire unless otherwise noted. Adjust conduit sizes accordingly.

I. Where the contractor elects to combine branch circuit runs shown as separate runs on the Drawings, provide a minimum 3/4" conduit or increase raceway size to provide a minimum of 25 percent spare capacity for future conductors. Feeder runs shall not be combined.

J. All conduits installed in concrete construction, underground, or under the building slab shall be minimum 3/4", unless otherwise noted.

K. Assemble, glue and seal PVC conduit in straight lengths prior to installation in trench.

L. Seal-offs shall be installed in all conduits which route from warm areas into refrigerated areas.

M. Install PVC conduit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Cut the conduit ends square and apply an approved solvent to clean the joint. Apply an approved cement and allow to set 24 hours before installing conductors.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533

N. Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by the National Electrical Code, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, a single locknut and bushing may be used.

O. A pull wire shall be inserted into each empty raceway in which wiring is to be installed by others. The pull wire shall be of No. 15 AWG zinc-coated steel, or of plastic having not less than 200- pound tensile strength. Not less than 10" of slack shall be left at each end of the pull wire.

P. Raceway shall not be installed under the fire pits of boilers and furnaces and shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of flues, steam pipes and hot water pipes.

Q. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Field- made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit-bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed.

R. Expansion fittings complete with grounding jumpers shall be installed where raceways cross expansion joints, construction joints, sawed joints, and where shown.

S. Where conduit is shown stubbed into a telephone, computer or communication terminal area, conduit shall be stubbed up 6" above floor or 12" below ceiling and terminated with insulating bushings.

T. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment.

U. The end of a conduit stub shall have an insulated bushing.

V. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating partitions.

W. Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, etc., to prevent spread of smoke or fire where installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating fire-rated barriers. An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk and/or putty form may be used.

X. Outlet boxes shall be designed for the intended use. Flush outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished surface lines.

Y. Outlet boxes on flex connected fixtures shall be installed within five feet of conduit knock-out in fixture.

Z. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment.

3.02 INSTALLING CONDUIT BELOW SLAB-ON-GRADE OR IN THE GROUND

A. All electrical wiring below slab-on-grade shall be protected by a conduit system.

B. No conduit system shall be installed horizontally within concrete slab-on-grade. For slab-on- grade construction, horizontal runs of rigid plastic shall be installed below the floor slab.

C. Conduit passing vertically through slab-on-grades shall be coated rigid steel.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533

D. Slope conduits away from terminal equipment; drain away from the building interior.

E. Rigid steel or IMC conduits, metal boxes, and couplings installed below slab-on-grade or in the earth shall be field-wrapped with 0.010" pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlay, or shall have a factory applied plastic resin, epoxy, or coal-tar coating system. Zinc coating may be omitted from rigid steel conduit, or IMC which has a factory-applied epoxy system. All joints shall be threaded, sealed and wrapped with tape to prevent entry of water. Use 20 mil pipe wrapping tape to cover wrench marks, field cuts, or abrasions to the outer factory installed anti-corrosion covering.

F. Provide duct seal at ends of all underground and under-slab conduits.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work.

1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. None required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. Unless otherwise specified, all identification nameplates shall be made of laminated three-ply plastic in accordance with Fed. Spec. L-P-387 equal to "Lamicoid." Nameplates shall be minimum 1/16" thick, with black outer layers and a white core, red outer ply for all emergency applications. Edges shall be chamfered.

B. Provide identification nameplates for starters, switchboards, safety switches, panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, equipment (air handling units, exhaust fans, pumps, etc.), with a minimum of 1/4" high letters.

C. Provide identification nameplates for control power transformers, control devices (relays, contactors, etc.), with a minimum of 1/8" high letters.

D. Where switches control remote lighting, exhaust fans, or power outlets, or where switches in the same gang (two or more) serve different purposes, such as light, power, intercom, etc., or different areas, such as corridor and outlet, furnish engraved cover plates with 1/8" black letters indicating function of each switch or outlet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LABELING

A. Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be permanently marked with an identification nameplate to identify the equipment by type or function and specific unit number as shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear, transparent covers accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work, and not the designation on the construction drawings. Minimum panel schedule width shall be 4" with 1/4" height allowed for each circuit line. Panel schedules shall be the type which install in a metal frame or pocket. Panel schedules shall be of the odd/even sequence (1-3-5-7-9... and 2-4-6-8-10...).

C. Identify service entrance and distribution switchboards with engraved nameplate corresponding with the plans, mounted on the face of the switchboard. Identify each feeder, breaker, and switch with engraved nameplate corresponding with the plans.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553

D. Identify branch panels with engraved nameplate corresponding with the main or subdistribution panel labeling, mounted on the face of the door. No brand labels or other markings shall be on the outside of the panels.

E. Label all disconnect switches, relays, contactors, starters and time switches indicating voltage, amperage, power panel source, circuit number and equipment served with laminated plastic label.

F. Nameplates shall be secured with screws or pop rivets. Adhesive-only fasteners shall not be permitted.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 PANELBOARDS 26 2416

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide at locations shown on the Drawings, panelboards of a type indicated and specified herein.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect against damage and moisture. Store materials off ground. Remove damaged materials from site immediately after detection.

B. Deliver with UL label and bearing manufacturers name. Panelboard exterior trim separately packaged to prevent damage during delivery and storage on site.

C. Store and handle panelboards so as not to subject them to corrosion or mechanical damage and in a manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operation.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listing/approval.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standards. 1. Panelboards - UL67. 2. Cabinet and Boxes - UL50.

C. National Electrical Code.

D. NEMA Standard - PB1.

1.05 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall contain overall panel dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions. The location of the main, branches, and solid neutral shall be clearly shown. In addition, the drawing shall illustrate one-line diagrams with applicable voltage systems. Include copy of panel schedules in record documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PANELBOARDS

A. Panels shall be factory pre-assembled using tin-plated aluminum bussing and bolt-on circuit breakers. Separate feeder lugs shall be provided for each feeder conductor. They shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machine drilling or tapping.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 PANELBOARDS 26 2416

B. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings.

C. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A separate ground bus shall be included in all panels. There shall be a neutral and ground bus space for each breaker location listed as space.

D. Panelboard boxes shall be at least 20" wide, made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with National Electrical Code. Maximum panel depth shall be 5-3/4", unless otherwise shown or specifically approved by the Owner. Surface panel boxes shall be painted to match trim.

E. Switching device handles shall be accessible. Doors and panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts.

F. All panel doors shall be provided with a flush type combination catch and lock with two milled keys. On doors more than 48" high, a three point combination catch and lock shall be provided with a vault type handle. All locks shall be keyed alike. All panel trims shall be "hinged front" construction, meaning trim has a piano hinge down one side, door opens by a single latch, and entire trim hinges open by removing two screws.

G. Single pole breakers shall be full module size; two poles shall not be installed in a single module. Each breaker shall be securely fastened to prevent movement and trims shall fit neatly and tightly to the breaker assembly. Interrupting capacity shall be minimum 10,000 ampere or as indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to Fed. Spec. W-C-375. All 15 or 20 ampere single pole breakers shall have "switching-duty" capability.

H. Permanent numbers, engraved, stamped or painted shall be affixed to each pole next to breakers. Stick-on numbers are not acceptable.

I. Panelboards shall be coated with a rust inhibiting phosphate primer and two coats of light gray enamel. Trims to be separately packed and protected from scratching and marring.

J. Panelboards shall be tested, listed, and marked for use with a UL witnessed and recognized fuse/breaker combination.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Breaker handle guards shall be provided on each circuit supplying obviously constant loads to prevent accidental shutting off. Such loads are contactor controlled circuits, freeze protection, etc.

B. Provide typed schedules as in Section 26 0553.

C. Provide engraved laminated name plates under the provisions of Section 26 0553.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 PANELBOARDS 26 2416

D. Provide one 3/4" spare conduit stubbed into an available accessible space above for every three single pole spare or space in new flush branch panels.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 WIRING DEVICES 26 2726

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all wiring devices and finish plates as required unless specifically indicated otherwise.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved.

B. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, with special devices as noted on the Drawings. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein, such device shall be of same grade and manufacture as specified below.

C. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall be from the same manufacturer and have identical appearance characteristics.

1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Submit product data for wiring devices and cover plates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Wall Switches: 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC, quiet type, Hubbell HBL1221 Series, color as selected by Architect. Single pole, double pole, 3-way, locking, or other type as indicated.

B. Receptacles: Single and duplex receptacles shall be rated 20 amperes, 125 volts, two-pole, three-wire, grounded type, Hubbell HBL8200 Series. Receptacles shall have nylon faces, one- piece brass mounting strap with integral ground contacts and bypass power contacts; color as selected by Architect. All receptacles shall be listed as Hospital-Grade.

C. Receptacles with ground fault interrupters shall be in accordance with UL 943.

D. Special purpose or heavy duty receptacles shall be of the type and of ratings and number of poles indicated or required for the anticipated purpose. Contact surfaces may be either round or rectangular. One appropriate straight or angle-type plug shall be furnished with each receptacle. Locking facilities, where indicated, shall be accomplished by the rotation of the plug.

E. Device plates of the one-piece type shall be provided for all outlets and fittings to suit the devices installed. Plates on unfinished walls and on fittings shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel, cast metal, or impact resistant plastic having rounded or beveled edges. Plates on finished walls shall be impact-resistant plastic, color as selected by the Architect.

F. Receptacles in wet locations shall be labeled as “Weather-Resistant”, and shall be installed in a weatherproof enclosure, the integrity of which is not affected when the receptacle is in use. The enclosure shall be of high-impact polycarbonate construction, with a keyhole hinge without a spring and other metal parts, with a gasketless translucent lid that is lockable and tinted and has large cord openings. The enclosure shall be one or two-gang, and shall be securely secured to the receptacle box with tamper-proof fasteners through factory-drilled or field-drilled through factory-prepared drill points.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 WIRING DEVICES 26 2726

Bell "Rayntite II", Intermatic WP1000 series, or equal.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell, Bryant, P&S, Leviton, and Cooper.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines.

B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted.

C. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings unless otherwise specified.

D. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch.

E. All outlets shall have a cover plate. Provide blank cover plate to match surrounding area if none other is specified.

3.02 TESTS

A. Test all receptacles for line to line, line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground, opens or shorts, and correct defective wiring.

3.03 LABELING

A. See Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2800

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide overcurrent protective devices of a type as specified herein.

B. Provide disconnect switches of a type as specified herein and where required by the National Electrical Code. Provide fused or unfused switches as required by equipment manufacturer or circuit requirements.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed.

B. The circuit breaker(s) referenced herein shall be designed and manufactured according to the latest revision of the following standards. 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches 2. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 3. UL 943 - Standard for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 4. CSA C22.2 No. 5.1 - M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers 5. NEC

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver equipment with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label and bearing manufacturer's name.

1.04 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Submit product data for each disconnect switch, circuit breaker, and fuse type, including descriptive data, outline drawings with dimensions, time-current curves, let-through current curves for fuses with current limiting characteristics, and coordination charts and tables and related data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General Requirements 1. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area. 2. Circuit breakers shall have an over center, trip free, toggle operating mechanism which will provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common tripping of all poles. 3. The circuit breaker handle shall reside in a tripped position between ON and OFF to provide local trip indication. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked ON and OFF in addition to providing International I/O markings. 4. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. 5. Each circuit breaker larger than 100A shall be equipped with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 6 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2800

6. Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed with a hologram quality mark and shall have date code on face of circuit breaker. 7. Branch circuit breakers exposed to fault currents higher than their AIC rating shall be series-rated with upstream feeder breaker, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Circuit breaker/circuit breaker and fuse/circuit breaker combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be listed by UL as recognized component combinations. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end use equipment along with the statement "Caution - Series Rated System. ______A Available. Identical Replacement Component Required". 8. Manufacturer shall provide electronic and hard copy time/current characteristic trip curves (and Ip & I2t let through curves for current limiting circuit breakers) for each type of circuit breaker. 9. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with UL Listed electrical accessories as noted on the Drawings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON and OFF position. 10. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line and load markings and be suitable for mounting in any position. 11. Circuit breakers shall have factory installed mechanical lugs. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed to accept field installable/removable mechanical type lugs. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap in design not acceptable. All lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid (not larger than #8 AWG) and/or stranded copper conductors. 12. All circuit breakers shall be capable of accepting bus connections. 13. Circuit breakers used for motor disconnects and not in sight of the motor controller shall be capable of being locked in the open (OFF) position. 14. Acceptable Manufacturers: Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE.

B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Thermal trip elements shall be factory preset and sealed. Circuit breakers shall be true rms sensing and thermally responsive to protect circuit conductor(s) in a 40 deg C ambient temperature. 3. Circuit breaker frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the circuit breaker. 4. Standard two- and three-pole circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be UL Listed as HACR type.

C. Equipment Ground Fault Protection (in Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers) 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be equipped with a Ground Fault Module. 2. Ground fault sensing system shall be modified zero sequence sensing type. 3. The ground fault system shall require no external power to trip the circuit breaker. 4. Companion circuit breaker shall be equipped with a ground-fault shunt trip. 5. The ground fault sensing system shall be suitable for use on grounded systems. The ground fault sensing system shall be suitable for use on three-phase, three-wire circuits where the system neutral is grounded but not carried through the system or on three- phase, four-wire systems. 6. Ground fault pickup current setting and time delay shall be field adjustable. A switch shall be provided for setting ground fault pickup point. A means to seal the pickup and delay adjustments shall be provided. 7. The ground fault sensing system shall include a ground fault memory circuit to sum the time increments of intermittent arcing ground faults above the pickup point. 8. A means of testing the ground fault system to meet the on-site testing requirements of the NEC shall be provided. 9. Local visual ground fault trip indication shall be provided.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 6 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2800

10. Where noted on Drawings, the ground fault sensing system shall be provided with zone selective interlocking communication capabilities compatible with other thermal magnetic circuit breakers equipped with ground fault sensing, electronic trip circuit breakers with integral ground fault sensing and external ground fault sensing systems. 11. The companion circuit breaker shall be capable of being group mounted. 12. The ground fault sensing system shall not affect interrupting rating of the companion circuit breaker.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers 1. Where indicated on Drawings, provide electronic trip circuit breakers per the following. 2. Breakers shall have a microprocessor-based tripping system which consists of three current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. 3. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed type as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed to carry 80% of their ampere rating continuously. 4. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based programmable time-current curve shaping adjustments. The short-time pick-up adjustment shall be dependent on the long-time pick-up setting. a. Programmable long-time pick-up. b. Programmable long-time delay with selectable I2t and I4t curve shaping. c. Programmable short-time pick-up. d. Programmable short-time delay with selectable flat or I2t curve shaping and zone selective interlocking. e. Programmable instantaneous pick-up. f. Programmable ground fault pick-up trip or alarm. g. Programmable ground fault delay with selectable flat or I2t curve shaping and zone selective interlocking. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have a powered/unpowered selectable thermal memory to provide protection against cumulative overheating should a number of overload conditions occur in quick succession. 5. Means to seal the trip unit adjustments in accordance with the NEC shall be provided. 6. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault trip occurrences shall be provided. 7. An ammeter to individually display all phase currents flowing through the circuit breaker shall be provided. Indication of inherent ground fault current flowing in the system shall be provided on circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection. All current values shall be displayed in true rms with 2% accuracy. 8. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjusted ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be provided. 9. The trip system shall include a Long Time memory circuit to sum the time increments of intermittent overcurrent conditions above the pickup point. Means shall be provided to reset Long Time memory circuit during primary injection testing. 10. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with back-up thermal and magnetic trip system. 11. Circuit breaker trip system shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port for use with a Universal Test Set. Disassembly of the circuit breaker shall not be required for testing. Test set shall be capable of verifying the operation of all trip functions with or without tripping the circuit breaker.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 6 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2800

2.02 FUSES

A. Fuses 0 through 600 amperes: 1. Circuits protected with fuses 0 through 600 amperes shall be protected by current-limiting Class RK1 or J dual-element time-delay fuses. 2. All fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. 3. Fuses shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element that has a 284 degrees Fahrenheit melting point alloy. 4. The fuses shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, and be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 5. Peak let-through currents and i2t let-through energies shall not exceed the values established for Class RK1 or J fuses.

B. Fuses 601 through 6000 amperes. 1. Circuits protected with fuses 601 through 6000 amperes shall be protected by current- limiting Class L time-delay fuses. 2. Fuses shall employ "O" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. 3. Fuse links shall be pure silver (99.9% pure) in order to limit the short-circuit current let- through values to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. 4. Fuses shall be time-delay and shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in 0.01 seconds or less, with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, and be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 5. Peak let-through currents and i2t let-through energies shall not exceed the values established for Class L fuses.

C. Spares: 1. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall provide the owner with the following: a. 10% (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of installed fuses shall be supplied as spares. b. Spare fuse cabinet(s) shall be provided to store the above spares.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman, Littelfuse, and Gould-Shawmut.

2.03 DISCONNECTS

A. Enclosed safety switches shall be horsepower rated in conformance with Table III or Fed. Spec. W-S-865. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.

B. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick-make, quick-break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock. Operating handles shall be located to side of switches.

C. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use, unless specifically noted otherwise, NEMA 3R where installed exposed to the weather or designated by the subscript "WP," and explosionproof where designated with the subscript "EP" or as required by the environment. Exterior enclosures shall be stainless steel.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 6 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2800

D. Disconnects shall be fusible or non-fusible as required by function or code. Equip all fusible disconnects with dual element fuses required by the equipment served. Coordinate fuse sizes at the time equipment is connected. Adjust fuse sizes if necessary to accommodate actual equipment installed. In no case shall fuses be sized smaller than the starter heaters on motor circuits.

E. For single-phase motors, a single- or double-pole toggle switch, rated only for alternating current will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, provided the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor rating.

F. All disconnects shall be of same manufacturer.

G. Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application.

H. Switches used for motor disconnects and not in sight of the motor controller shall be capable of being locked in the open (OFF) position.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, Siemens, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices.

B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work.

C. Fasten circuit breakers without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling.

D. Inspect circuit breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.

E. Adjust all adjustable/programmable features of electronic trip circuit breakers in accordance with results of electrical power system studies. Reference Section 26 05 73.

F. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during shipment of the equipment from the manufacturer to the job site, or from water that may contact the fuse before the equipment is installed.

G. Install safety and disconnect switches where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.

H. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, motors, and controllers within sight of the controller position and within 25 feet.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 6 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2800

3.02 TESTING

A. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 6 LIGHTING 26 5000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of the type designated and appropriate for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar or like locations.

B. Coordinate installation of fixtures with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a total system that is neat and of orderly appearance.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fixtures shall conform to the following specifications.

B. Manufacturers specified are indicative of the general type and performance desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Architect prior to the bid.

C. Equality shall be determined by comparisons of performance, construction, installation ease, maintenance, and appearance.

D. All light fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Submit product data describing fixtures, drivers, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation.

B. Include data on features and accessories and the following information. 1. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principle features. 2. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of laboratory tests. 3. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units.

C. Submit shop drawings from manufacturers detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FIXTURES

A. General: 1. LED lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with IED, NFPA, UL, as shown on the Drawings and as in these Specifications. 2. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: a. Power factor: > 0.9 nominal b. Input Voltage: 120V – 277V, 60 Hz c. Total Harmonic Distortion: < 20% d. Temperature Rating: 0 deg C – 40 deg C e. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. 3. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 3 LIGHTING 26 5000

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. b. Minimum 80 CRI and color temperature 3500 deg K unless otherwise specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule/List. c. Minimum Rated Life: 70,000 hours per IES L70, unless otherwise specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule/List. d. Light output initial lumens as specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule/List. e. LED modules shall be field replaceable and contain quick-disconnects. 4. LED lighting fixtures shall have available digital IES files from a NVLAP accredited testing laboratory in accordance with IESNA LM-79, which specifies the entire luminaire as the source, resulting in an efficiency of 100%. Lighting fixtures that do not have these test results available will not be accepted.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. All surface-mounted lighting fixtures shall have low density label. 2. All recessed lighting installed in fire-rated ceilings shall be provided with fire-rated protective covers per UL standards.

2.02 RECESSED FIXTURES

A. In insulated ceilings, recessed fixtures to be equipped with “IC” rated housing or with a field fabricated fireproof box (metal, sheet rock, etc.), complying fully with all clearance requirements.

B. Recessed troffers shall be as follows: 1. Diffusers shall be pattern 12 extruded clear acrylic plastic, 0.125" overall thickness, unless otherwise specified in the fixture schedule by catalog number or remarks. Door shall be securely closed by use of enclosed cams. 2. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. 3. Housing shall be 22-gauge minimum. Overall depth shall be 4-1/2” minimum. Spacing from bottom of lamp to top of lens shall be 1-7/8” minimum.

2.03 OUTDOOR FIXTURES

A. Outdoor fixtures shall be weatherproof, heavy duty types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of heat and safe cleaning and relamping. Luminaires shall be sealed unless filters are provided. Lenses shall be heat and impact resistant, tempered glass. Lens gasket shall be heat and weather resistant. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be nonferrous metal or stainless steel.

B. Reflectors on fixtures shall be secured with lock washers.

C. Set screws on fixture reflectors shall be factory furnished in size and quantity to assure that reflector does not vibrate when touched or struck.

2.04 FIXTURES

A. See Drawings for Fixture List.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean them.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 3 LIGHTING 26 5000

B. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the Architectural reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment shall be made by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported and fastened to the ceiling system.

C. Verify all ceiling conditions and provide all lighting fixtures complete with factory furnished stems, balls, aligners, and canopies as required for a complete installation.

D. Recessed troffers installed in suspended T-bar ceiling shall be independently supported on two opposite corners by #12 gauge steel wire attached to structure, per UBC Standard #47-18.

E. Surface mounted light fixtures shall be securely fastened to the building surface via factory- created holes in the fixtures. Attachment of fixture merely to recessed outlet box is not sufficient.

F. Where two switches are shown dedicated to an office, room, or area, provide two-level lighting.

G. Lighting fixtures in any single enclosed room shall be connected using a common (one) circuit, except in cases where the loading requires a second circuit.

H. Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be provided for proper installation.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 3 PROJECT OVERVIEW 27 0000

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work in this specification to be completed on the Wallowa MOB project.

B. This is a new facility located in Enterprise, Oregon.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Plans

B. Division 1

C. Division 26

D. Division 27

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Requirements to submit on project 1. Meet requirements in Section 27 0100. 2. Additional requirements may be set by Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Refer to specific section of specifications

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SYSTEMS

A. Phone/data is rough in (conduit and box) only.

B. Modify existing fire alarm as necessary.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 1 INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS 27 0530

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The interior communications pathways shall be in the most direct and efficient path possible. All conduits are to be sized so the cable load does not go beyond 40% fill. Cable paths shall be capable of future use and a string is to be left after cabling has been completed.

B. The Fire Rating of any structured penetrated during construction will be restored by the contractor who made the penetration.

C. All conduit stubs shall terminate with an end connector and plastic bushing. No cable path will have a junction box in a location that is not accessible after the project is complete. Only factory ells (no more than three) are allowed between junction boxes.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Industry standards permit the use of EMT for installation of conductors in circuits rated below and above 600 volts, nominal, and in accordance with Article 348 of the National Electric Code.

B. The National Electric Code® (NEC®) establishes the minimum requirements for a safe electrical installation. Because of the varied environments in which electrical equipment is installed, local amendments are often added. Always consult local codes prior to any installation .

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data describing all equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Any Electric Metallic Tubing manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the following: 1. American National Standards Institute - C80.3 2. Underwriters Laboratories Standard - UL 797 3. National Electric Code® 2002 - Article 358 (NEC® 1999 Article 348) Federal Specification - WW-C-563A

B. Caddy J-Hooks and supports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit 1. All conduits are to be installed with the most efficient route possible. No cable pathway will have more the 40% fill as recommended by the TIA/EIA Standards, verify cable load prior to installing conduit paths. 2. It is the responsibility of the contractor that is awarded the project to confirm the schedule for installation with the General Contractor. 3. Conduit paths shall terminate with end connectors and plastic bushings whether in junction boxes or stubs in accessible ceiling space.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 2 INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS 27 0530

4. Any penetrations made for the cable paths is the to be fire-stopped by the contractor who made the penetration. 5. Conduits will be installed and supported in a manner that meets or exceeds the requirements of the AHJ. 6. All low voltage outlets shall utilize a 1” conduit and double gang extra deep junction box. Conduit shall stub to accessible ceiling space and terminate with an end connector and thread on plastic bushing. 7. Floor boxes with space allocated for low voltage cabling will be provided a minimum of (2) 1” conduits, unless otherwise noted on plans.

B. J-hooks 1. For best cable support J-hooks should be placed every 5 feet maximum and at corners as required for a clean and professional install.

C. Grounding 1. All interior pathways will be grounded per industry standard utilizing a continuous ground. If cable tray/ladder rack is painted a portion will have the paint removed to have the ground lug attached for metal-to-metal contact.

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic design requirements and specifications for the fire alarm replacement.

B. This Section contains requirements that pertain to all 28 0000 series sections, and includes the design basis, as well as requirements for submittals, quality assurance, product handling, record documents, project conditions, installation, testing, demonstrations and training.

C. Within the appropriate section will be more specific information necessary for the construction of the systems required for this project.

D. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes.

E. The work shall include but not be limited to removing existing system, cable, head-end, and installing a code compliant system.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings 1. Symbols used on the drawings are defined in the symbols schedule of the drawings. Some of the symbols scheduled may not be required for the project. 2. Because of the scale of the drawings, symbols are shown on drawings as close as possible to the mounting location. Verify exact locations with the onsite Representative. 3. Drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the extent, general arrangement and locations of the work. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as conduit fittings, access panels, cabinet sizes, sleeves, pull boxes, back boxes and junction boxes may not be shown. Include all items where required by code, other Sections, and for proper installation of the work.

B. Provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section.

C. All Division 28 Specifications

1.03 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

B. National Electric Code (NEC)

C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

F. International Building Code (IBC)

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

G. International Fire Code (IFC)

H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

I. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

J. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC)

1.04 REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturer 1. Have verified testing and documentation showing the parameters and abilities of the system as installed. 2. The system and its components must be manufactured by a company engaged in the manufacture of the specific equipment for a minimum of 3 years. 3. Must be listed in the approved manufacture listing within the appropriate section.

B. Contractor 1. Documented successful work experience of at least 10 facilities of equivalent size and technical requirements utilizing the equipment proposed to be used. 2. Have a designated Project Manager for the site with documented experiences from at least 5 other projects of similar size and technical difficulty. 3. Have enough trained installers to meet the schedule of the project, without causing delay. 4. Must be Licensed and Bonded.

C. System Installers 1. Shall have no less than 3 years of documented work experience on projects of equivalent size and technical difficulty. If you are using a Subcontractor their installers must meet the requirements, this is a requirement of the installer not the bidder. 2. “Experience” is defined as the completion of an operational system, with the system being successfully operated by the customer for its intended purpose for at least one year. 3. Must have current certification, from the Manufacturer, on the system to be installed so the customer may benefit from the best warranty available from the manufacturer.

D. Any errors made in the plans or specifications are to be brought to the attention of the architect to be resolved before construction begins.

E. All work done is to meet the Codes and requirements listed above. The most stringent having precedence over the others.

F. The equipment and material being submitted for this project shall be an “End-to-End Solution” for compatibility and warranty by manufacturer.

G. OR APPROVED EQUAL 1. In order to submit items for “approved equal” status there must first be a request on the plans or specifications stating “or approved equal” for that item or system. 2. The submittal for “approved equal” must be received prior to bidding with enough time to let ALL BIDDERS know a new item or manufacturer has been approved. This day and time will be at the architect discretion, they will determine the length of time prior to bidding that is required to share this information. 3. No items will be “approved as equal” after bidding without the architect’s written approval.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

4. Items cannot and will not be approved as equal during the submittal process. If an item is submitted and approved during the submittal process that is not listed as approved on the bid documents and there is not a record of being approved prior to bid, that does not make this item or manufacturer approved. The contractor will still be liable for providing the equipment requested in the bid documents or that was “approved as equal” prior to bidding.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. 1. Include dimensions, wiring and block diagrams, conduit sizes, performance data, ratings, control sequences, and all other descriptive data necessary to describe the item proposed and its operating characteristics. 2. Shop drawings need to be submitted as hard copy and electronic format. Electronic format shall be ACAD 2000 or later, using the same scale as used on the bid set. 3. Symbols used on the Shop Drawings shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. 4. Coordinate with other applicable trades in submittal of shop drawings. 5. Shop drawings shall detail space conditions to accommodate other concerned trades, subject to final review by the Architect.

B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period.

C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used.

D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. 1. Submit complete technical data necessary to evaluate the material and equipment. Include a complete technical specification for the submitted equipment, noting differences and adherence to this Section . 2. Submittals need to be clear and concise requiring no interpretation by the contractor to be clearly understood. Products to be used, within a system, shall be grouped within the submittals so the system can be clearly understood. 3. Data sheets are to be submitted in a 3-Ring binder, separated by systems if a particular piece is to be used for multiple systems show it in each section.

E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified.

F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans.

G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor’s responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time.

I. Samples 1. Provide Workstation outlet sample including faceplate, jacks, and proposed labeling. 2. Confirm acceptance of colors and design with architect prior to ordering.

J. Submit a list of at least 5 facilities of equal size and technical requirements utilizing the equipment submitted. 1. For each facility, list: a. Name and location of facility. b. Date of Occupancy by customer. c. Representative to contact and telephone number. d. Construction Manager or General Contractor. e. Provide information on the installed locations with operational equipment.

K. Certifications 1. Copies of certifications held by employees for the system to be installed. 2. Certificates shall be from the manufacturer or facility that provided the training listing the employee who has successfully passed the program.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. All work is to be performed in a manner so the customer may benefit from the most complete warranty available by the manufacturer.

B. The installing company is to submit all paperwork, on behalf of the customer in the customer’s name, to the appropriate manufacturer so the installed system is covered by warranty.

C. A one-year warranty is to be provided by the installing contactor for hardware, cable and terminations. All work/cost required to replace a defective item is to be covered by the warranty.

1.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Operation and Maintenance Data for the electronic systems shall include layout drawings of each panel with each item of equipment identified and cross referenced with equipment data sheet. Operation and Maintenance Data shall include complete terminal block schedule for each panel with the following data for each point: 1. Type of point, i.e., input, output, etc. 2. Schedule relating points, terminal block numbers, and signal source or destination. 3. Input and output schedule. 4. Location and type of input source device. 5. Location and type of output device controlled. 6. Project-specific, illustrated user’s manual. 7. Provide detailed electrical schematics for all electrical/electronic components.

B. All Operation and Maintenance Data shall include “record drawing” system interconnection diagrams with major components identified and number and type of interconnecting conductors. Submit two copies of each record drawing. 1. Floor plan drawings shall be provided showing location of equipment and routing of conduit and cable.

C. Maintenance and operating instructions on all systems.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

D. Control wiring diagrams for all locking systems with each system identified.

E. Certification from system manufacturers that systems are installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and are functioning correctly at the time of final inspection.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design Requirements 1. Provide and install all related devices, equipment and appurtenances necessary to complete the work as a complete and fully operational system. 2. All materials, hardware, and electronics are to be delivered to the site in the original packaging. Used or remanufactured material will not be allowed. 3. All cabling shall be routed through dedicated concealed raceways unless otherwise indicated. All raceways shall be a minimum 1 inch unless otherwise noted. Size raceways and install conductors in accordance with the NEC, NFPA, and TIA/EIA. a. EMT conduit with compression fittings may be utilized in all inaccessible areas unless otherwise required by code. b. Rigid metal conduit with Liquid-tight Fittings shall be used in exposed exterior applications. c. PVC conduits shall be used in underground applications; stub-ups shall be rigid metal conduit. d. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in all interior accessible areas where concealed conduit requirements cannot be met. Submit drawings, diagrams and information to Customer’s Representative for review prior to work. e. All conduits shall terminate, whether in Pull-box or not, with the appropriate size End- fitting with a bushing to protect cable from abrasion. 4. Mounting heights and accessibility to equipment requiring access by individuals with disabilities shall comply with ADA requirements. 5. Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4 rated

B. Equipment specifications may not deal individually with every part, control, or device, which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Include such items, as required, for a complete operational system, whether or not specifically indicated.

C. All equipment contained in Division 28 Sections shall be compatible with current computer standards.

D. If installation of equipment, raceways, cable trays and/or conduit is performed prior to coordination with other trades, which interferes with work of other trades, make necessary changes to correct the condition at no additional cost to the customer.

E. If R&I (Removal and Installation) of existing equipment is needed. The awarded contractor must test systems PRIOR to any removal. If any component is not working it needs to be brought to the attention of the onsite representative. If this is not accomplished, any component not working after install that was part of R&I, will be replaced with a new unit at no additional cost to the customer.

F. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the UL label.

G. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

H. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both.

1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All materials and equipment are to be delivered in the original manufacturer packaging and shall be of the latest design available from manufacturer.

B. Provide and apply protective covering immediately upon receiving the products and maintain throughout the construction process.

C. Protect materials stored on the job site, during construction, after installation, and until time of substantial completion.

D. Keep products clean and dry, elevate equipment above ground and floor.

E. Any material damaged, before time of substantial completion, is to be replaced at no cost to the customer.

F. Equipment shall not be delivered to site more than 2 weeks prior to install by cabling contractor.

G. Location to store materials, on site, will be designated by General Contractor or Customer Representative depending on the project.

1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Electrical General Requirements provide complete schematic drawings depicting location of interface, number of conductors, types of connectors, and type of enclosure.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Active Services: Protect existing active services, water, gas, sewer, electrical, when encountered, against damage. If active services are encountered which require relocation, notify the Architect promptly in writing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Product line must be conformance with the specifications. 2. Where manufacturers have been named, use one of those named. 3. Manufacturers may be designated in the appropriate Section for the system involved.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be of the proper designation and design for the area in which they are to be installed so as to be in compliance with all Standards and Codes i.e. plenum or OSP rated.

B. All anchors used for the support of any equipment are to be of the appropriate design and load rating for that area as set by manufacturer recommendations.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without added cost to the Owner.

B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner approved by the Architect.

C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made.

D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents.

E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment.

F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing, with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually satisfactory time and duration.

G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's liability.

H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information shown prior to rough-in or demolition and notify the Architect of any discrepancies.

I. Coordinate all work and trim with carpet installers. Provide carpet plates on all carpet surfaces, complete as required.

J. Install equipment such that code-required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances for future maintenance.

K. Coordinate installation of electrical conduit, boxes, fittings, anchors, and miscellaneous items to be concealed in precast concrete assemblies.

3.02 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Protect materials stored on the job site. Protect equipment until time of Substantial Completion.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

B. Provide and apply protective material immediately upon receiving the products and maintain throughout the construction process.

C. Failure to protect materials constitutes sufficient cause for rejection of the apparatus or material.

D. Protect factory finish from damage during construction operations and until final acceptance. Restore finishes that become stained, scratched, or damaged.

E. Protect existing equipment from any damage during the construction process.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install all devices and equipment in accordance with standards set by industry practice and manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Use only highly skilled and experienced workers certified by the manufacturer of the system involved.

C. When change in location or size is required, obtain approval of Architect before making change.

D. Do not make any changes without written approval of Architect.

E. Provide to Division 26 installer all non-standard electrical boxes.

F. Fill percentage: Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent.

G. Install conductors, control and communications cables, coaxial cables, etc., for the work of this division according to code, standard, or manufacturer recommendations which ever is the most stringent.

H. Provide installation, including connections, cable pulling, testing and interfacing of systems.

I. Execute all work described in this specification and shown on drawings and all work dependent upon, and necessary to, complete finish of the work so described or shown, in a workmanlike manner using materials best adapted to purposes where such work or material is not specifically mentioned.

J. Fire stopping is to be completed on all penetration occupied by material installed by communications contractor. Whether the penetration was made by the contractor or for the contractor, if your company is utilizing the sleeve or conduit you are responsible for the Fire- Stopping to meet the TIA/EIA Standards.

3.04 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Tests 1. Notify customer’s representative in writing, in advance of testing to prevent delays in construction schedules. 2. Test all systems and place in proper and specified working order prior to demonstration of the systems. 3. Test system grounds to demonstrate that the ground resistance does not exceed the requirements of the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) or the National Electric Code (NEC). 4. Perform tests, as required, by authorities having jurisdiction over the site. 5. Testing shall be in the presence of the customer’s designated representatives, Contractor, and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

B. Verification of Performance 1. Prior to acceptance of the work, the System Integrator/Installer shall demonstrate to the customer, designated representatives, Contractor, and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction, all subsystems, features and functions of the system, and shall instruct the customer in the proper operation and event sequences of the system. 2. Demonstrate each system and subsystem. The demonstration is to consist of not less than the following: a. Designate actual location of each component of a system or subsystem and demonstrate its function and its relationship to other components within the system. b. Demonstrate the systems and subsystems operations by actual “START-STOP/ON- OFF/OPEN-CLOSE” cycling showing how to work controls, how to reset devices, how to replace fuses and emergency operating/operations procedures. c. Demonstrate communication, signaling and door control equipment/devices by actual operation of such devices.

C. Demonstration 1. System Integrator/Installer shall furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstration and instructions or arrange to have the manufacturer’s representatives present to assist with the demonstrations. Training time shall include, as a minimum, the total time determined by the sum of the times specified in each Section, for performing the prescribed demonstrations/training. 2. System Integrator/Installer shall arrange with the customer’s designated representative the date and times for performing the demonstrations. The customer will select date and time for demonstration. 3. Comply with requirements for Systems Demonstrations in each Section.

3.05 INSPECTIONS

A. At the completion of the project and prior to final acceptance of the work, provide evidence of final inspections and approvals to the customer, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction.

3.06 CUSTOMER TRAINING

A. Include 1. Train Operations and Maintenance Personnel in use and maintenance of systems provided under this section. 2. Train maintenance staff in troubleshooting and maintenance of each system. 3. Provide copies of technical manuals, including function and operational circuit and operational circuit characteristics and schematic diagrams, for each system and system components.

B. Training sessions 1. Shall be conducted by instructors certified in writing by manufacturer of specific system 2. Conduct sessions for not less than four-hour periods during normal working hours, i.e., Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM. 3. Training session schedules shall conform to requirements of customer. 4. Submit schedules to the customer for approval not less than two weeks prior to training session. 5. Do not schedule training sessions for different systems concurrently. 6. Give 20 hours of instruction on each system to the customer to assure that personnel are fully trained.

C. Instruct operating staff in proper operation, including hands-on training.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 10 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 0010

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Division.

B. The requirements of this section apply to the Fire Alarm and Detection System.

C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, include all design, labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with a complete system required by applicable codes. Provide all labor, materials, and perform such other services necessary and reasonable incidental to the design and installation of a monitoring system, required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. The fire alarm and detection system is a deferred submittal system, to be completed by the contractor in permit ready form. The fire alarm devices shown on the plans and described in the specification are provided to assist the contractor in their design process to provide a code compliant (at minimum) system.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the National Fire Protection Association Standard Number 70, “National Electrical Code,” Standard Number 72, “National Fire Alarm Code,” and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All equipment and devices shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or approved by Factory Mutual Laboratories and shall meet Federal Specification Standards.

C. All material and equipment shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products.

D. Equipment shall be represented by a firm with a local service organization that is factory trained and certified. The name of this organization shall be furnished to the Owner.

E. The contractor shall include in the basic bid all installation charges rendered by the supplier.

F. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the system’s integrity.

G. The fire alarm and detection system is a deferred submittal system, to be completed by the contractor in permit ready form. The fire alarm devices shown on the plans and described in the specification are provided to assist the contractor in their design process to provide a code compliant (at minimum) system.

H. Design Requirements 1. Comply with latest adopted edition of the NFPA 72. 2. Design, layout, and install a system based on the occupancy type and occupant load provided by the architect.

I. Code required fire alarm and detection, per occupancy and occupant load, will be the minimum of the design. Items requested above and beyond code

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 1 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

J. Revisions to the Contractor’s design, required by the Governing Agency/Authority Having Jurisdiction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

K. The system and all associated operations shall be in accordance with the following: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 2. National Electric Code (NEC) 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 6. International Building Code (IBC) 7. International Fire Code (IFC) 8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 9. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 10. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC)

1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. The fire alarm system shall be fully functional at the close of the project. The fire alarm will be checked to verify the entire system, both modified and existing, is fully operational.

B. System operation will remain as it was prior to system modification. The new components shall operate exactly as the system was originally designed, unless otherwise requested by the AHJ.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met. 3. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the following standards. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.

C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. 4. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop drawings.

D. Software Modifications: 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software installations, modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 2 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.

E. Certifications: Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification.

F. Fire alarm documents are to be submitted together for review.

G. Additional requirements maybe set by Architect verify prior to submittal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Match existing.

B. Documentation from the manufacturer shall be presented to the Architect and Engineer certifying that the persons making the final connections, system programming, check-out and providing the warranty are factory trained technicians in the employ of the factory authorized representative.

2.2 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL:

A. The FACP shall be modified as required for additional circuits.

2.3 ANNUNCIATORS

A. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator: 1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located backlit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. 3. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display. 4. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application. 5. It shall be possible to connect up to 32 LCD displays and be capable of wiring distances up to 6,000 feet from the control panel. 6. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated "terminal mode" EIA-485 interface. This is a two-wire loop connection and shall be capable of distances to 6,000 feet. Each terminal mode LCD display shall mimic the main control panel. 7. The system shall allow a minimum of 32 terminal mode LCD annunciators. Up to 10 LCD annunciators shall be capable of the following system functions: Acknowledge, Signal Silence and Reset, which shall be protected from unauthorized use by a key switch or password. 8. The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and provide each of the features listed above.

2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

A. Addressable Devices – General:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 3 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 0 to 9) type address switches. 2. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch, are not an allowable substitute. 3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits. Detectors shall be supplied with dual auxiliary contacts for connection to air handlers, elevator controls, and other systems as required. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity. 6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. 7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. Base shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications. 8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real- time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector. 11. Detectors shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LEDs shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 12. Addressable devices shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LED(s) shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 13. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.

B. Addressable Pull Box (Manual Station): 1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 4 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.

C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector: The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light- scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.

D. Intelligent Thermal Detectors: Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 deg. F (58 degrees C) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 deg. F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.

E. Duct Smoke Sensor: The detector is to be Photoelectric type. 1. If possible the detector and housing will be a one-piece design. The housing and detector separate is allowed if a one-piece unit is not available. a. The duct detector housing shall be supplied with a clear cover so the presence of smoke can be monitored. b. Shall be supplied with either a magnetic test feature or an injection tube for device testing. c. Designed to operate with air velocity in the range of 300-4000fpm. d. Coordinate with mechanical plans for duct size and provide the appropriate length of sampling tubes. e. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housing front cover. 2. Detectors of either design will be provided with relays to connect to the fire alarm panel and DDC panel, as well as connect to a remote status LED. 3. Remote status LED will display the detector status exactly the same as the detector. The remote status LED is to indicate the detector is operational, in trouble mode, or in alarm. a. The remote status LED is required if the duct detector is over 10’ off the finished floor or is not visible because of a drop ceiling. b. Verify exact location to mount the remote status LED with the local AHJ prior to installation.

F. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module: 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLCs. 2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. 3. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.

G. Two-Wire Detector Monitor Module: 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device). 2. The two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box or with an optional surface backbox. 3. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 5 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

H. Addressable Control Module: 1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. 2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox. 3. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation, or as a dry contact (Form-C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. 4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply. 5. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.

I. Addressable Relay Module: Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires.

2.5 ALARM INDICATING DEVICES

A. Horns shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all occupants of the building and/or fire area, as required by these specifications. Wall mounted devices shall be mounted in such a way that the lens is not less than 80” and not greater than 96” above the finished floor. Locations where ceilings prevent the installation at 96" centerline, the centerline of the unit shall be 6" below the ceiling.

B. Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of a least 60 seconds (whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupied area. The average ambient sound level is the root mean square, a weighted sound pressure measured over a 24- hour period.

C. Strobes shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of the UL 1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual notification appliances can be seen from any location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate. 1. Strobes shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the listed input voltage (20VDC - 31VDC) range. 2. Strobes shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid-state circuitry. 3. Strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15/75, 30/75, 60/75, 75 or 110 Candela. Dual listing strobes of 15/75 intensity for UL 1971/near-axis requirements shall be used where acceptable. 4. Strobes shall be available for semi-flush or surface mounting and in conjunction with audible appliances as required.

D. Provide manufacturer’s standard wireguard where so indicated on the Drawings.

2.6 CONDUIT AND WIRE:

A. Conduit:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 6 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-29. 4. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum.

B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and shielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. In certain applications, the system shall support up to 2 SLCs with up to 1,000 feet of untwisted, unshielded wire. The design of the system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication circuit.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 OPERATION

A. The fire alarm components (i.e. pull stations, smoke detectors, photoelectric smoke detectors, horns, magnetic door holders, fire alarm panel, batteries, chargers, fire alarm cable, etc.) will be supplied, installed and connected by Division 16 Contract Work. Duct smoke detectors are to be installed by Division 15, supplied and wired by Division 16.

B. The fire alarm system operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any pull station or automatic detection device shall be as follows: 1. Sound the building audible alarm devices. 2. Display on the control panel the English language description of the alarm and its location. 3. Print on the printer the alarm type, location, time and date. 4. Activate programmed output modules points. 5. Report the condition to the central station. 6. Log in the event buffer all system activity. 7. Recall the elevator if the alarm is activated from the lobby smoke detector(s).

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 7 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

8. Release magnetically held fire doors. 9. Deactivate the 120 volt smoke damper circuits. 10. Operate the elevator power module shunt trip switch to disconnect elevator power if the alarm is activated from the elevator heat detector(s).

C. Zoning: Provide each initiating device with its own address. This includes all detectors, pull stations, sprinkler flow switches, tamper switches, low air switches and any other monitored point.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Boxes, Enclosures and Wiring Devices: 1. Boxes shall be installed plumb and firmly in position. 2. Extension rings with blank covers shall be installed on junction boxes where required. 3. Junction boxes served by concealed conduit shall be flush mounted. 4. Upon initial installation, all wiring outlets, junction, pull and outlet boxes shall have dust covers. Dust covers shall not be removed until wiring installation when permanent dust covers or devices are installed. 5. All junction box covers shall be painted fire department red and be affixed with a decal or silk-screened label “Fire Alarm System.” 6. Wet or damp locations shall require a NEMA rated enclosure suitable for the environment in which an addressable field device or module are to be installed. (i.e. monitoring of sprinkler water flow, tamper switches and OS&Y valves) 7. Termination junction boxes shall be of adequate size and room to facilitate ease of accessibility to work on wiring and to provide ample space for proper identification labeling. Enclosure design shall incorporate the use of a back plate within the enclosure to provide ease of installation. Terminal blocks shall be affixed to a secured mounting rail. Terminal enclosures shall be painted fire department red and stenciled “Interior Fire Alarm System.” 8. Electrical conduits shall enter only at the side or the bottom of control cabinets, unless designed and approved for entry on the top. 9. All conduits shall be grounded to a water main by approved ground clamps with a conductor equal in size to the largest conductor used in the system; but in no case shall the ground conductor be smaller than no. 10 AWG.

B. Conductors: 1. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each with wire markers at terminal points. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible. 2. All wiring shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the requirements of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70, Article 760, and that of the manufacturer-wiring guides. 3. Wiring in accessible locations (i.e. above removable ceiling tiles) may be open fire alarm cable. The cabling is to be supported off the ceiling grid by means of D-rings, J-Hooks, or other products manufactured for the purpose. The cable is to be supported at least every 5’ and will not share a cable path with any other system. Cable shall not be attached to conduit, pipe, or ceiling stringers used by any other trade. 4. Wiring in inaccessible locations (i.e. walls, above gyp ceilings) shall be in a conduit raceway system. The contractor has the option to re-use the existing fire alarm raceway system if applicable and found to be in good condition. All conductors installed in existing raceway shall be THHN. Verify wiring with equipment supplier and increase conduit size where required. 5. Wiring for analog loop circuits, conventional detection circuits, speaker circuits and telephone circuits shall be based on the fire alarm manufactures wiring guidelines, but shall not be smaller than #18 AWG. 6. Splices shall be made with UL listed wire nuts of the appropriate size for the cable gauge and count.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 8 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

7. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors. 8. A consistent color code for fire alarm system conductors throughout the installation shall be provided. The installation contractor shall submit for approval prior to installation of wire, a proposed color code for system conductors to allow rapid identification of circuit types. 9. All nominal voltage branch circuit power feeds (120/220 VAC) shall be identified “labeled” at both ends of the circuit to indicate its source and purpose. 10. Wiring within system control panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance and to isolate nominal voltage wiring from system low voltage wiring. 11. Splices in electrical conductors in vertical risers are prohibited. 12. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. 13. Communication circuits give off RF noise. Maintain at least an eighteen-inch distance from all other communication circuits, where possible.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certificate of Compliance: Complete and submit to the project engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, paragraph 1.7.2.

B. Field-Testing General: 1. Prior to any testing or programming verify numbering scheme, room names, and other means of identifying addressable devices prior to testing and labeling. The owner will be given a minimum of one week notice prior to the contractor requiring to have the numbering scheme requested by the owner. 2. Each addressable analog smoke detector shall be individually field tested prior to installing the device at its designated location to ensure reliability after shipment and storage conditions. A dated log indicating correct address, type of device, sensitivity and initials of the technician performing test - using test equipment specifically designed for that purpose - shall be prepared and kept for final acceptance documentation. After testing, the detection devices and base shall be labeled with the system address, date and initials of installing technician. Labeling shall not be visible after installation is complete. 3. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Tests shall check for stray voltage not to exceed 1 volt AC/DC unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses. 4. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests shall be made available by the installing contractor. 5. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the acceptance inspector.

C. Final Acceptance Testing: 1. Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA72 and this specification. 2. A final As-built Function Matrix shall be prepared by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm, trouble or supervisory condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any," "or," "not," "count," "time," and "timer" statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix. 3. The installing contractor prior to testing shall prepare a complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging printers.

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 9 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

4. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the tests, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following: a. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of: 1) Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog signaling line circuit. 2) Open, shorted and grounded network signaling line circuit. 3) Open, shorted and grounded conventional initiating device circuits. 4) Intelligent device removal. 5) Primary power or battery disconnected. 6) Incorrect device address. 7) Printer trouble, off line or out of paper. 8) Loss of data communications between system control panels. 9) Loss of data communications between system annunciators. b. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed. 2) Audibility and visibility at required levels. c. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) Correct message display for each alarm input, at the control panel, each remote alphanumeric LCD display. 2) Correct annunciator light for each alarm input, at each annunciator and color graphic terminal. 3) Correct printer logging for all system activity. d. System on-site and/or off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) Correct alarm custom message display, address, device type, date and time transmitted for each alarm input. 2) Correct trouble custom message display, address, device type, date and time transmitted for each alarm input. 3) Trouble signals received for disconnect. e. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as specified. 2) System primary power shall be restored for forty-eight hours and system-charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged battery bank. 3) System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD display. 5. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed at the discretion of the acceptance inspector, the test shall be terminated. a. The installing contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the acceptance inspector. b. In the event that software changes are required during the testing, the system manufacturer to compare the edited program with the original shall furnish a utility program. This utility shall yield a printed list of the changes and all system functions, inputs and outputs affected by the changes. The items listed by this program shall be the minimum acceptable to be retested before calling for resumption of the testing. The printed list and the printer log of the retesting shall be submitted before scheduling of the testing. c. The acceptance inspector may elect to require the complete testing to be performed again if modifications to the system hardware or software warrant complete retesting.

D. Notify owner representative one week prior to all system testing days so they may witness tests.

E. Documentation:

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 10 of 11

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 28 31 10

1. System documentation shall be furnished to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Provide cut sheets for all equipment installed during construction. If multiple items are shown on one page indicate exactly which item was installed. Provide this information in hard copy and on CD with the record drawings. b. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible hard copy, as well as, drawings on CD (compact disks) in a both CAD (or compatible program) and PDF. c. System operation, installation and maintenance manuals. d. Written documentation for all logic modules as programmed for system operation with a matrix showing interaction of all input signals with output commands. e. Documentation of system voltage, current and resistance readings taken during the installation and testing. f. System program “hard copy” showing system functions, controls and labeling of equipment and devices. Also provide a CD with system file.

F. Test Equipment: The contractor shall furnish to the owner all test equipment as required to program the field analog devices, specifically an intelligent device programmer-tester or a calibrated smoke generator with power source.

G. Warranty/Services: The contractor shall warrant the entire system against system hardware and electrical defects including programming software defects for a period described in the contract general conditions, but not less than one year. This period shall begin upon satisfactory completion and certification of final acceptance testing of the system. Contractor shall provide to owner a letter stating the start-date and end-date of warranty period. In addition, the contractor shall also provide an updated list of name(s) and phone number(s) for normal and off- hours contacts necessary to respond to warranty issues. Response to warranty notification shall require a reply within 24 hours of initial contact.

3.4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Complete maintenance instructions for all devices including trouble-shooting procedures shall be provided to the owner.

3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide manuals in accordance with Section 28 0010. Manuals are to contain as-built drawings on disk utilizing Autocad, spare parts list, operating procedures, trouble shooting guide, operating system data file print out, operating system data file on disk, a one year service proposal on the system and a copy of the completed NFPA “Record of Completion.”

END OF SECTION

01/25/2019 Wallowa MOB Addition 11 of 11